Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 4.

0 Assembly Help Topic Collection

Parametric Technology Corporation

Copyright 2008 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: For Windchill products, select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page. For InterComm products, on the Help main page, click the link for Copyright 2007. For other products, select Help > About on the main menu for the product. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 01012008 Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

Table of Contents
Assembly....................................................................................................... 1 Manipulating Components ............................................................................. 1 Managing Views........................................................................................... 1 Using Assembly ........................................................................................... 2 About Assembly Functionality ..................................................................... 2 Assembly Functions ................................................................................ 2 Simplified Representations ...................................................................... 2 Interchange Assemblies .......................................................................... 2 Skeleton Models ..................................................................................... 3 Pro/NOTEBOOK ...................................................................................... 3 Assembly Process Planning ...................................................................... 3 Creating Assemblies .................................................................................. 4 About Creating an Assembly .................................................................... 4 Assembling Components....................................................................... 4 Using Datum Planes as the First Feature ................................................. 5 Assembling a Component Parametrically................................................. 5 Creating a Base Component .................................................................. 5 Tip: Set Up or Use a Default Template ...................................................... 5 Configuring Pro/ENGINEER for using Assembly.............................................. 5 About Assembly Configuration Options ...................................................... 5 To Set Assembly Configuration Options ..................................................... 6 allow_copy_with ext_refs ........................................................................ 6 allow_package_children .......................................................................... 6 allow_redo_intersections ......................................................................... 6 allow_ref_scope_change ......................................................................... 7 allow_save_as_instance .......................................................................... 7 assem_placement_ignore_units................................................................ 7 auto_assembly_with_layouts ................................................................... 7 auto_constr_always_use_offset................................................................ 7

iii

Table of Contents

autoplace_single_comp ........................................................................... 7 can_snap_to_missing_ref ........................................................................ 8 check_same_assy_parts.......................................................................... 8 comp_angle_offset_eps........................................................................... 8 comp_assemble_start ............................................................................. 8 comp_assemble_with_interface ................................................................ 8 comp_offset_dec_places ......................................................................... 9 comp_snap_angle_tolerance .................................................................... 9 comp_snap_dist_tolerance ...................................................................... 9 comp_rollback_on_redef ......................................................................... 9 convert_to_wf3_replace .......................................................................... 9 copy_geom_update_pre_2000i_dep.......................................................... 9 create_temp_interfaces........................................................................... 9 default_comp_geom_scope.....................................................................10 default_comp_invalid_refs ......................................................................10 default_comp_scope_setting...................................................................10 default_comp_skel_geom_scope .............................................................10 default_comp_skel_scope_setting............................................................10 default_ext_ref_scope............................................................................10 default_obj_constraints_scope ................................................................10 default_object_geom_scope....................................................................11 default_object_invalid_refs .....................................................................11 default_object_scope_setting..................................................................11 default_placement_scope .......................................................................11 dim_inactive_components ......................................................................11 dont_show_symbol_nodes ......................................................................11 enable_advance_collision .......................................................................12 enable_assembly_accuracy.....................................................................12 enable_implied_joints ............................................................................12 erv_show_external_only.........................................................................12 exec_prog_on_assem_retr .....................................................................12 iv

Table of Contents

fail_ref_copy_when_missing_orig ............................................................12 fast_highlight........................................................................................12 fix_refs_to_intersections ........................................................................13 force_upd_assem_mp_in_simp_rep .........................................................13 freeze_failed_assy_comp........................................................................13 ignore_all_ref_scope_settings .................................................................13 ignore_export_geom_declaration.............................................................14 mass_property_calculate........................................................................14 model_allow_ref_scope_change ..............................................................14 mp_calc_level .......................................................................................14 multiple_skeletons_allowed ....................................................................14 package_constraints ..............................................................................14 package_ref_alert .................................................................................14 placement_rep_by_default .....................................................................14 preserve_comp_color_in_preview ............................................................15 ref_scope_copy_color ............................................................................15 ref_scope_copy_color_change.................................................................15 ref_scope_no_pick_to_copy ....................................................................15 ref_scope_no_pick_to_prohibit................................................................15 ref_scope_prohibit_color ........................................................................16 ref_scope_prohibit_color_change ............................................................16 regen_int_mdls_on_retr .........................................................................16 regen_layout_w_assem..........................................................................16 regen_simp_retrieve..............................................................................16 replace_comp_name_method .................................................................16 retrieve_data_sharing_ref_parts..............................................................17 retrieve_instance_dependencies ..............................................................17 retrieve_merge_ref_parts.......................................................................17 save_display_status_in_submodel ...........................................................17 scope_invalid_refs .................................................................................17 sel_insts_on_comp_retrieval...................................................................18 v

Table of Contents

shrinkwrap_alert ...................................................................................18 simprep_ondemand_activation ................................................................18 simprep_ondemand_cleanup...................................................................18 simprep_ondemand_editing ....................................................................18 simprep_ondemand_regeneration............................................................19 simprep_ondemand_selection .................................................................19 simprep_ondemand_settings ..................................................................19 skeleton_model_default_color .................................................................19 spin_with_part_entities ..........................................................................20 start_model_dir ....................................................................................20 style_state_transparency .......................................................................20 update_rep_refs....................................................................................20 use_new_intchg ....................................................................................20 visible_annotations_scope ......................................................................20 Creating Components ...............................................................................21 Creating Subassemblies .........................................................................21 To Create a Subassembly by Copying an Assembly .................................21 To Create an Empty Subassembly .........................................................21 About Empty Components in an Assembly..............................................22 To Create a Subassembly and Set Default Datums ..................................22 Locate Datums Methods ......................................................................23 Creating Solid Parts ...............................................................................23 To Create a Solid Part and Its Feature ...................................................23 To Create a Solid Part and Set Default Datums .......................................24 To Create a Solid Part by Copying From an Existing Part ..........................25 Copying Parts with Layouts or External References..................................25 To Create an Empty Part .....................................................................26 Creating Bulk Items ...............................................................................26 About Bulk Items................................................................................26 To Create Bulk Items in an Assembly ....................................................27 To Create a Bulk Item Template ...........................................................27 vi

Table of Contents

To Assemble an Existing Bulk Item .......................................................28 About Defining Bulk Item Parameters ....................................................28 To Create a Length Measurement Parameter ..........................................29 To Create a Distance Measurement Parameter........................................30 To Create a Diameter Measurement Parameter .......................................30 To Create an Area Measurement Parameter ...........................................31 To Create an Angle Measurement Parameter ..........................................31 To Create a Parameter Sum .................................................................31 Bulk Item Workflows..............................................................................32 To Create Bulk Items Containing Paint...................................................32 To Define Bulk Model Properties ...........................................................32 To Measure Painted Model Surfaces.......................................................33 To Set Up Parameter Relations .............................................................33 To Set Up Parameters for Different Color Instances .................................33 To View Bulk Items in the BOM.............................................................33 Placing Components .................................................................................34 About the Component Placement User Interface ........................................34 Feature Icon ......................................................................................34 Slide-up Panels ..................................................................................34 Dialog Bar .........................................................................................35 Shortcut Menus ..................................................................................38 About Placing Components .....................................................................40 To Display Constraint Sets in the Model Tree.............................................40 To Place a Component ...........................................................................40 To Place a Component Multiple Times.......................................................42 About Editing Placement References ........................................................42 User-Defined Sets .................................................................................43 About Using Placement Constraints .......................................................43 To Define Mate or Align Offset Values ....................................................49 Constraint Orientation Assumptions ......................................................49 Tip: Using Extra Constraints.................................................................50 vii

Table of Contents

To Create Datum Planes for Constraints.................................................50 Assembling a Component to a Datum Plane (Translate and Rotate) ...........50 Example: Flipping a Mate and an Align Constraint ...................................51 Predefined Sets .....................................................................................51 About Predefined Constraint Sets..........................................................51 About Bodies......................................................................................56 To Define a Body as Ground.................................................................57 Tip: Creating Ground Bodies ................................................................57 Example: Flipping Connections .............................................................57 Example: Flipping the Orientation of a Component ..................................58 About the Mechanism Design Model Tree in Assembly..............................59 About Motion Axes in Predefined Constraint Sets ....................................60 To Set Zero Position References ...........................................................60 Zero Positions ....................................................................................61 To Set the Motion Axis Regeneration Value ............................................61 Regeneration Values ...........................................................................62 To Set Motion Limits ...........................................................................62 To Set Motion Axis Dynamic Properties ..................................................63 Using Motion Axis Parameters and Dimensions in Family Table Instances ...64 To Convert User-Defined Constraint Sets to Predefined Constraint Sets......64 About Editing Springs and Dampers in Assembly.....................................64 To Display Connections in the Graphics Window......................................65 Packaged Components ...........................................................................65 About Packaged or Partially Constrained Components and Mechanisms ......65 Configuration File Options for Moving Packaged Components ....................66 To Package a New Component in an Assembly........................................67 Moving Packaged Components .............................................................67 To Fix the Location of a Packaged Component ........................................69 To Finalize Packaged Components.........................................................69 About Packaged or Partially Constrained Components and Mechanisms ......69 Unplaced Components ...........................................................................71 viii

Table of Contents

About Unplaced Components................................................................71 To Create an Unplaced Component .......................................................71 To Place an Unplaced Component .........................................................71 To Include an Unplaced Component ......................................................72 Assembling Components to a Pattern .......................................................72 About Assembling Components to a Pattern ...........................................72 Example: Assembling a Component to a Pattern .....................................73 To Assemble Components to a Reference Pattern....................................74 Assembling Components to a Reference Pattern......................................75 Example: Assembling to Group Patterns ................................................76 About Dimension Patterns....................................................................76 To Assemble Components to a Dimension Pattern ...................................77 Example: Assembling a Component to a Dimension Pattern......................78 About Assembling Components to a Table Pattern ...................................78 To Assemble Components to a Table Pattern ..........................................79 Assembly Intersections in Table Patterns ...............................................79 To Replace All Pattern Members Using Family Tables ...............................79 To Replace Individual Pattern Members Using Family Tables .....................79 About Replacing Pattern Members by a Family Table Instance ..................80 Manipulating Components .........................................................................80 About Kinematic Movement of Components ..............................................80 Excluding Flexible Components.............................................................80 Using Mirrored Subassemblies ..............................................................81 Moving Components Being Placed ............................................................81 About Moving Components...................................................................81 To Move Components Using Keyboard Shortcuts .....................................81 To Move Components Using Orient Mode ...............................................82 To Move Components Using Translate or Rotate......................................82 To Move Components Using Adjust .......................................................83 About Assembling Components by Proximity Snapping ...............................84 To Set Proximity Tolerance Allowances .....................................................85 ix

Table of Contents

To Set Drag Preferences.........................................................................85 Dragging Assembly Entities and Taking Snapshots .....................................86 About Dragging and Taking Snapshots ..................................................86 To Drag Assembly Entities: Points and Bodies.........................................87 To Apply Constraints During a Dragging Operation ..................................88 To Specify the Position of a Motion Axis While Dragging ...........................89 To Copy Constraints from One Snapshot to Another ................................89 To Orient Planes and Surfaces During a Dragging Operation .....................89 To Lock a Body Prior to a Dragging Operation.........................................90 To Capture a Snapshot ........................................................................90 To Make Snapshots Available as Exploded Views .....................................90 Snapshots and Exploded Views.............................................................90 To Use Snapshot Construction ..............................................................91 To Edit a Snapshot..............................................................................91 To Remove a Snapshot........................................................................91 To Exclude a Flexible Component from a Dragging Operation....................91 About Excluding Components from Dragging Operations ..........................92 To Exclude or Include a Component During Dragging Operations ..............92 Collision Detection ..............................................................................93 Using Component Interfaces ......................................................................94 About Automatic Placement of Components ..............................................94 Drag-and-Drop Automatic Placement.....................................................94 Automatic Placement Using Interfaces ...................................................94 About Component Interfaces...................................................................94 To Define a Component Interface ............................................................95 To Define a Component Interface Template ..............................................96 To Edit a Component Interface ................................................................96 To Place a Component Using Interface Matching ........................................97 To Redefine Component Placement Using Interfaces ..................................99 To Save a Component Interface When Placing a Component .......................99 About Setting Rules for a Component Interface .........................................99 x

Table of Contents

To Set Rules for Assembly Conditions..................................................... 100 About Placement Preferences ................................................................ 100 To Edit Placement References ............................................................... 101 Placement Preference Configuration Options ........................................... 102 About Placing a Component Using Temporary Interfaces........................... 102 To Activate Temporary Interface Placement ............................................ 102 Nested Interfaces ................................................................................ 103 About Nested Interfaces .................................................................... 103 To Define a Nested Interface .............................................................. 103 About Placing a Component with a Nested Interface .............................. 103 Working with Assembly Components......................................................... 104 About Working with Assembly Components............................................. 104 To Create a Group of Components and Features ...................................... 104 To Place an Assembly User-Defined Feature ............................................ 105 To Delete a Component from an Assembly .............................................. 105 To Delete Pattern Member Components .................................................. 106 To Insert a Component in the Regeneration List ...................................... 106 To Reorder Components in an Assembly ................................................. 106 To Reroute Placement References.......................................................... 106 About Suppressed Components ............................................................. 107 About Handling Children of Suppressed Components ................................ 107 To Suppress Components and Assembly Features .................................... 107 To Handle Children of Suppressed Components ....................................... 107 To Resume Components and Assembly Features...................................... 108 Displaying Component Annotations ........................................................ 108 Redefining Component Placement Constraints ......................................... 109 About Redefining Placement Constraint Sets......................................... 109 To Redefine Component Constraint Sets .............................................. 109 Assembly Operations ........................................................................... 110 Working with Assembly Features ........................................................ 110 Using Intersected Components ........................................................... 113 xi

Table of Contents

Modifying Assemblies ........................................................................ 118 Restructuring Components................................................................. 124 Regenerating Parts and Assemblies ..................................................... 125 Resolving Retrieval or Regeneration Failures ........................................ 127 Replacing Components in an Assembly ................................................... 130 About Replacing Assembly Components ............................................... 130 To Replace a Component with a Family Table Member ........................... 130 To Replace a Component with a Shrinkwrap Model ................................ 131 To Replace a Component with an Interchange Assembly ........................ 131 To Replace a Component Using a Layout.............................................. 132 Using Layouts to Replace Components................................................. 132 To Replace a Component with an Unrelated Component......................... 132 To Replace a Component with a New Copy ........................................... 133 Rules and Restrictions for Copied Replacement Components................... 133 Allowing Multiple Skeleton Replacement Copies .................................... 134 To Replace a Flexible Component with a New Copy ............................... 135 To Add or Remove Components from the Component Replace List........... 135 To Replace Additional Components...................................................... 135 Tip: Successful Component Replacement ............................................. 135 About Component Replacement and Legacy Designs ............................. 136 About Replacing Unrelated Components with Reference Pairing............... 136 To Replace an Unrelated Component Using Reference Pairing ................. 137 Using Evaluation Rules to Replace Components .................................... 138 Interchange Assemblies ....................................................................... 139 About Interchange Assemblies............................................................ 139 To Create an Interchange Assembly .................................................... 140 To Insert a Functional Component in an Interchange Assembly ............... 140 To Create Reference Tags .................................................................. 140 About Reference Pairing in an Interchange Assembly............................. 141 To Pair Reference Tags ...................................................................... 141 To Pair Reference Tags Automatically .................................................. 142 xii

Table of Contents

Using Evaluation Rules in Interchange Assemblies................................. 143 To Insert a Simplify Component in an Interchange Assembly .................. 143 To Create a Simplify Part in an Interchange Assembly ........................... 144 To Set Mass Properties for a Simplify Component.................................. 145 To Substitute a Simplify Component in a Simplified Representation ......... 146 About Displaying and Removing Interchange Components...................... 147 To Remove Interchange Components .................................................. 147 Example: Substituting Interchangeable Components in a Simplified Representation ................................................................................. 148 Copying Components ........................................................................... 148 About Copying Components ............................................................... 148 To Copy a Component ....................................................................... 148 Example: Copying a Component ......................................................... 149 Mirroring Components Inside an Assembly.............................................. 150 About Mirroring Components Inside an Assembly .................................. 150 To Create a Mirrored Copy of a Part Inside an Assembly ........................ 151 Example: Creating a Mirrored Copy of a Part Inside an Assembly ............ 151 About Opening Mirrored Parts in Part................................................... 152 To Edit the Merge Feature Definitions .................................................. 152 About Mirrored Copies of Subassemblies .............................................. 153 To Create a Mirrored Copy of a Subassembly........................................ 154 Rules for Mirrored Subassemblies ....................................................... 155 Using Intersections to Create Parts ........................................................ 155 To Create a Part from an Intersection.................................................. 155 Parts Created from an Intersection...................................................... 155 Using Flexible Components ................................................................... 156 About Flexible Components ................................................................ 156 To Place a Flexible Component ........................................................... 157 To Define a Flexible Component in an Assembly.................................... 157 To Predefine a Flexible Component in an Assembly................................ 158 Using Varied Items for Flexible Components......................................... 158

xiii

Table of Contents

Propagating Flexible Components ....................................................... 165 Searching for Assembly Items ............................................................... 166 To Select a Parent Assembly or Subassembly from the Graphics Window . 166 To Search and Select Items by Attributes ............................................ 167 To Search and Select Items by History ................................................ 167 To Search and Select Items by Status ................................................. 168 To Search and Select Items by Copied Refs.......................................... 169 To Search and Select Items by Geometry ............................................ 170 Managing Views ..................................................................................... 171 Exploded Views ................................................................................... 171 About Exploded Views ....................................................................... 171 To Create and Save a New Exploded View............................................ 171 To Explode or Unexplode an Assembly View ......................................... 172 To Set the Exploded Position of Components ........................................ 172 To Set the Exploded Status of Components .......................................... 172 About Offset Lines in Exploded Views .................................................. 173 To Create Offset Lines ....................................................................... 173 To Modify Offset Lines ....................................................................... 173 To Add or Modify Jogs in Offset Lines .................................................. 174 Cross Sections .................................................................................... 174 About Assembly Cross Sections .......................................................... 174 Assembly Zones .................................................................................. 175 About Assembly Zones ...................................................................... 175 To Clip a Zone.................................................................................. 176 To Create a Zone Using a Distance from an Element.............................. 176 To Create a Zone Using Closed Surfaces .............................................. 177 To Create a Zone Using Datum Planes ................................................. 177 To Delete a Zone from an Assembly .................................................... 178 To List All Zones in an Assembly ......................................................... 178 To Redefine a Reference in a Zone ...................................................... 178 To Remove a Reference from a Zone ................................................... 179 xiv

Table of Contents

To View a Zone ................................................................................ 179 To Rename a Zone............................................................................ 179 Multiple References for Assembly Zones .............................................. 179 To Create a Zone Using Offset Distance from a Coordinate System.......... 180 Assembly Display Style ........................................................................ 180 About Display Style for an Assembly ................................................... 180 To Create a Display Style................................................................... 181 To Edit a Display Style ...................................................................... 181 To Redefine a Display Style from the Model Tree................................... 182 Display Styles for Components ........................................................... 182 Assembly Orientation ........................................................................... 183 About Assembly Orientation ............................................................... 183 To Save an Assembly Orientation........................................................ 184 Combination Views .............................................................................. 184 About Combination Views .................................................................. 184 To Create a Combination View............................................................ 184 To Redefine a Combination View ......................................................... 185 References and Dependencies.................................................................. 186 Reference Views.................................................................................. 186 About the Reference Viewer User Interface .......................................... 186 About Reference Investigation in Assembly .......................................... 188 About Reference Types...................................................................... 188 About Viewing Parent and Child References .......................................... 189 To Investigate References.................................................................. 189 To Set Reference Filters..................................................................... 190 To View Solid Model and Component References ................................... 190 Tip: Displaying Only External References ............................................. 191 To Find a Reference Path ................................................................... 191 To Save a Reference Path .................................................................. 191 To Export All References.................................................................... 191 To Investigate Circular References ...................................................... 192 xv

Table of Contents

To View a Reference Path .................................................................. 192 To Filter the Model Tree..................................................................... 192 To Export a Model Tree to a Text File .................................................. 193 To Toggle the Display of Parents and Children in the Reference Viewer .... 193 To Investigate Dependencies.............................................................. 193 About Breaking Dependencies ............................................................ 194 To Break Object Dependencies ........................................................... 194 Reference Viewer Tutorial ..................................................................... 194 About the Reference Viewer Tutorial.................................................... 194 Setup.............................................................................................. 195 About Exercise 1 .............................................................................. 196 Task 1-1: Open the Reference Viewer.................................................. 196 Task 1-2: View the Subitem Window ................................................... 197 Reference Representations in the Parent/Child Graph ............................ 198 About Exercise 2 .............................................................................. 198 Task 2-1: Set the Reference Filters ..................................................... 198 Task 2-2: Filter the Model Tree........................................................... 199 Path Overview Graph Symbols............................................................ 200 About Exercise 3 .............................................................................. 200 Task 3-1: Define the Path Overview Graph........................................... 200 Task 3-2: Find All Paths Between Two Objects...................................... 201 Task 3-3: Investigate Circular References ............................................ 201 About Exercise 4 .............................................................................. 202 Task 4-1: Display Dependencies ......................................................... 202 Task 4-2: Break Dependencies and Retrieve Missing References ............. 202 Summary ........................................................................................ 203 Object-Specific Reference Control .......................................................... 203 About Object-Specific Reference Control .............................................. 203 To Define Object-Specific Reference Control ......................................... 204 Tip: View Object-Specific Settings from the Model Tree.......................... 205 Environment Reference Control ............................................................. 205 xvi

Table of Contents

About Environment Reference Control ................................................. 205 About the Publish Geometry Reference Filter ........................................ 206 To Set Color Feedback for Out-of-Scope External References.................. 207 External Reference Control ................................................................... 207 About Shared Geometry Settings ........................................................ 207 To Define Global Reference Scope Control Settings ............................... 208 Example: The Scope Settings of Subassembly and None ........................ 209 To Channel All External References Through Skeleton Models ................. 210 To Backup Forbidden or Out-of-Scope External References..................... 210 To Set Selection Options for Out-of-Scope External References ............... 211 To Specify Default Scope Settings....................................................... 211 To Replace or Prevent Missing Locally Copied References ....................... 212 Tip: View the Status of Locally Copied References from the Model Tree.... 212 About External Reference Backup ....................................................... 212 To Convert an External Reference Backup to a Copy Geometry Feature.... 212 Working with Assemblies......................................................................... 213 To Copy an Assembly........................................................................... 213 About Copying and Pasting in Assembly.................................................. 213 Using Start Components and Default Templates ...................................... 213 About Regenerating to Update Modified Parts .......................................... 214 Using the Assembly Model Tree ............................................................. 214 Using Save A Copy with Assemblies ....................................................... 215 To Add Information Columns to the Model Tree ....................................... 216 To Control the Visibility of a Part Layer at the Assembly Level ................... 216 Controlling the Visibility of Part Layers at the Assembly Level .................... 217 About Creating Reference Dimensions .................................................... 217 About Displaying Assembly Information.................................................. 217 To Review Assembly Instructions for a Component .................................. 218 To Check Clearance ............................................................................. 218 Setting Advanced Clearance Checking .................................................... 219 About Entering Relations in Assembly..................................................... 219 xvii

Table of Contents

About Using an Assembly Bill of Materials (BOM) ..................................... 220 BOM and Mass Properties Behavior in Skeletons ................................... 220 BOM and Mass Properties Behavior in Master Representations ................ 220 About Showing Dimensions in Part and Assembly .................................... 221 Assembly Family Tables ....................................................................... 221 About Assembly Family Tables............................................................ 221 About Working with Assembly Family Instances .................................... 222 To Create a Family of Assemblies........................................................ 223 Example: An Assembly Family Table ................................................... 224 Using Part Family Members in an Assembly .......................................... 224 To Substitute a Component with an Instance from its Family Table in a Simplified Representation ............................................................ 224 To Replace a Reference Model of a Merge or Inheritance Feature With a Family Instance ...................................................................... 225 To Replace a Component with an Instance from its Family Table ............. 225 To Replace Assembly Components in the Assembly Instance .................. 226 To Automatically Update References to Assembly Instances ................... 226 Example: Automatically Updating References to Assembly Instances ....... 227 To Assemble an Instance Automatically Using Pro/NOTEBOOK ................ 227 Example: Family of Assemblies........................................................... 227 To Replace Assembly Components in the Assembly Instance .................. 227 To Configure Components of an Assembly Instance............................... 228 Controlling Assembly Family Table Instance Retrieval ............................ 228 Mirroring Assemblies............................................................................ 228 About Mirroring Assemblies ................................................................ 228 To Mirror an Assembly....................................................................... 229 Top Down Design...................................................................................... 229 Skeleton Models..................................................................................... 229 About Skeleton Models in Top-Down Design ............................................ 229 About Skeleton Models ......................................................................... 230 About Standard Skeleton Models ........................................................... 231 To Create a Standard Skeleton Model..................................................... 232 xviii

Table of Contents

About Motion Skeleton Models............................................................... 233 To Create a Motion Skeleton Model ........................................................ 233 About Creating Geometry for a Motion Skeleton Model ............................. 234 To Create a Design Skeleton ................................................................. 234 To Create a Body Skeleton ................................................................... 235 Tip: Specify a Default Layer Name for Skeleton Models............................. 236 To Create a Display Color for Skeleton Models ......................................... 236 Display Colors for a Skeleton Model ....................................................... 236 Data Sharing ......................................................................................... 237 Shrinkwrap Features ............................................................................ 237 About Shrinkwrap Features ................................................................ 237 To Create a Shrinkwrap Feature ......................................................... 237 To Define a Component Subset........................................................... 238 Shrinkwrap Associativity.................................................................... 239 To Update a Shrinkwrap Feature......................................................... 239 Updating a Shrinkwrap Feature .......................................................... 239 To Create an External Shrinkwrap Feature ........................................... 239 External Shrinkwrap Features............................................................. 240 To Redefine Shrinkwrap References .................................................... 240 To Preview Current References ........................................................... 241 To Break Shrinkwrap Dependency....................................................... 241 Merge and Inheritance Features ............................................................ 241 Merge Features ................................................................................ 241 Inheritance Features ......................................................................... 248 Copy and Publish Geometry Features ..................................................... 258 About Copy and Publish Geometry Features ......................................... 258 Regenerating Copy and Publish Geometry Features ............................... 258 Publish Geometry Features ................................................................ 258 Copy Geometry Features ................................................................... 260 Annotation Propagation ........................................................................ 266 About Propagating Annotation Elements into Data Sharing Features ........ 266 xix

Table of Contents

About Propagating Annotation Element Display Status Through Data Sharing Features....................................................................... 266 To Propagate an Annotation to Data Sharing Features ........................... 267 Layouts ................................................................................................ 268 Preparing Layouts ............................................................................... 268 About Layouts .................................................................................. 268 To Work with Multiple Sheets ............................................................. 269 To Create a Layout ........................................................................... 269 To Create a Reference Datum Plane for a Layout .................................. 270 To Create a Reference Datum Axis for a Layout .................................... 270 To Create a Reference Datum Point for a Layout ................................... 271 To Create a Reference Datum Coordinate System for a Layout................ 271 About Reference Datums in Layout Mode ............................................. 272 Example: A Layout Reference Datum Plane and Axis ............................. 272 To Delete Reference Datum Entities from a Layout ................................ 272 To Import a Drawing into a Layout...................................................... 272 Global Dimensions and Relations in a Layout ........................................ 273 Annotating Layouts.............................................................................. 279 About Annotating Layouts .................................................................. 279 To Add Notes to a Layout................................................................... 279 To Include Parameter Values in Notes ................................................. 280 Declaring Layouts................................................................................ 281 About Declaring Layouts .................................................................... 281 About Layout Hierarchy ..................................................................... 282 To Declare a Layout to Another Layout ................................................ 282 To Declare a Model to a Layout........................................................... 282 To Create Relations From a Layout...................................................... 283 Rules for Skeleton Models and Layouts ................................................ 283 To Undeclare a Model from a Layout.................................................... 283 Tip: Remove Global References to Undeclare a Layout ........................... 284 Declaring Datums in a Layout ............................................................... 284

xx

Table of Contents

About Declaring Datums .................................................................... 284 To Declare an Axis, Planar Surface, or Datum Plane Explicitly ................. 284 About Declaring Datums by Table ....................................................... 285 To Declare Datums by Table .............................................................. 285 To Undeclare Datums ........................................................................ 286 About Automatic Assembly Using Layouts ............................................ 286 Example: Automatic Assembly Using Declared Datums .......................... 286 Layout Case Studies ............................................................................ 289 About Case Studies........................................................................... 289 To Create a Case Study ..................................................................... 289 To Retrieve a Case Study................................................................... 289 To Copy Undimensioned Geometry into a Case Study ............................ 290 To Create Dimensions in a Case Study................................................. 290 About Case Study Relations ............................................................... 290 To Add Case Study Relations.............................................................. 291 To Modify Case Study Relations .......................................................... 291 To Declare Case Study Dimensions ..................................................... 291 Managing Large Assemblies........................................................................ 292 Simplified Representations ...................................................................... 292 About Simplified Representations .......................................................... 292 About Creating Simplified Representations.............................................. 292 Excluding and Substituting Components .............................................. 293 Rules and Restrictions ....................................................................... 293 To Create a Simplified Representation On the Fly..................................... 293 To Create Simplified Representations Using Definition Rules...................... 294 Types of Simplified Representations ....................................................... 295 Example: Excluding a Component from a Simplified Representation ........... 296 To Change Properties of a Simplified Representation ................................ 297 Opening a Simplified Representation by Default....................................... 298 To Set a Simplified Representation to Active ........................................... 298 To Retrieve a Simplified Representation of an Assembly ........................... 299 xxi

Table of Contents

Retrieving Simplified Representations .................................................... 299 Tip: Retrieve Components Before Saving a Simplified Representation ......... 299 To Copy a Simplified Representation ...................................................... 299 To Rename a Simplified Representation.................................................. 300 To Delete a Simplified Representation .................................................... 300 To List Simplified Representations ......................................................... 300 To Substitute a Simplified Representation for a Subassembly or Part .......... 301 About Placing a Component in a Simplified Representation........................ 301 To Retrieve Placement References ......................................................... 302 Simplified Representations in Top-Down and Bottom-Up Design ................ 302 Updating Mass Properties of Simplified Representations............................ 302 On-Demand Simplified Representations..................................................... 303 About On-Demand Simplified Representations......................................... 303 To Define On-Demand Simplified Representations Settings ....................... 303 To Erase Unused On-Demand Component Representations ....................... 304 External Simplified Representations .......................................................... 305 About External Simplified Representations .............................................. 305 Rules for External Simplified Representations ....................................... 305 Creating External Simplified Representations........................................ 306 To Create an External Simplified Representation Using View Manager......... 306 To Create an External Simplified Representation Using the New Dialog Box . 306 To Create an External Simplified Representation Using Save a Copy ........... 307 To Set the Purpose of an External Simplified Representation Component .... 307 To Redefine an External Simplified Representation ................................... 307 To Update an External Simplified Representation ..................................... 308 Lightweight Components in Simplified Representations................................ 308 About Symbolic Representations............................................................ 308 To Assemble a Lightweight Component .................................................. 309 Shrinkwrap Models ................................................................................. 309 About Shrinkwrap Models ..................................................................... 309 Types of Shrinkwrap Models ................................................................. 310 xxii

Table of Contents

To Create a Surface Subset Exported Shrinkwrap Model ........................... 312 Setting Quality Levels for Shrinkwrap Models .......................................... 314 Faceted Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Models........................................... 314 Merged Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Models ........................................... 314 To Create a Faceted Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Model.............................. 314 Lightweight Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap Parts ............................................ 315 To Create a Merged Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Model .............................. 315 Display Styles........................................................................................ 316 About Display Styles ............................................................................ 316 To Create a Display Style ..................................................................... 317 To Change the Display Style of a Component .......................................... 317 Envelopes ............................................................................................. 317 About Envelopes ................................................................................. 317 To Create an Envelope ......................................................................... 318 To Include an Envelope in an Assembly .................................................. 319 To Modify an Envelope ......................................................................... 319 To Delete an Envelope ......................................................................... 320 To Display Envelopes in the Model Tree .................................................. 320 Configuring Assemblies with PROGRAM ........................................................ 320 About Program ...................................................................................... 320 Glossary .................................................................................................. 321 Glossary for Assembly ............................................................................ 321 Index ......................................................................................................... 325

xxiii

Assembly Assembly Overview

The Assembly Help describes the procedure of assembling parts created in Pro/ENGINEER Part mode. It offers information about working with assembled models and managing assembly projects. Refer to these help topics for information on using the Assembly environment, tools, and techniques. For a detailed overview, skim the Help contents. Tasks for Assembly

Adding Components to the Assembly Placing Components Using Constraint Sets Using Component Interfaces Packaging Components Leaving Components Unplaced Manipulating Components Moving Components for Placement Purposes Dragging Placed Components Detecting Component Collision Working with Assembly Components Copying Components Mirroring Components Resolving Retrieval Failures Modifying Assemblies Redefining Component Placement Replacing Components Intersecting Assemblies Interchanging Assemblies

Using Top-Down Design Working with Skeleton Models Working with Layouts Sharing Design Data Managing Views Exploding Assembly Views Displaying Cross Sections Setting Assembly Zones Setting Display Styles Simplifying Large Assemblies Using Simplified Representations Using Envelopes Exploring References and Dependencies Investigating References Controlling External References

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Using Assembly
About Assembly Functionality
Just as you can combine features into parts, you can also combine parts into assemblies. Pro/ENGINEER enables you to place component parts and subassemblies together to form assemblies. You can modify, analyze, or reorient the resulting assemblies.

Assembly Functions
Pro/ENGINEER provides basic assembly tools, and various Pro/ENGINEER modules give you additional functionality for assembly operations. Assembly supports the design and management of large and complex assemblies through the use of powerful tools such as simplified representations, interchange assemblies, and the use of Top Down design procedures.

Simplified Representations
Simplified representations are variations of a model you can use to change the view of a particular design, enabling you to control which members of an assembly Pro/ENGINEER brings into session and displays. This lets you tailor your work environment to include only the information of current interest to you. You can, for example, temporarily remove a complicated subassembly from memory that is unrelated to the portion of the assembly on which you need to work. You can also substitute a complicated subassembly or part with a simpler part or envelope. Using advanced performance tools, you can speed up the retrieval process and general work performance of large assemblies using simplified representations. Simplified representations also allow you to show a component in a symbolic state. This means that no geometry is shown for a component. Instead, a symbol represents placement of the component. Mass properties can be calculated using the placement point of the components and actual mass properties of the part. You can also create a user defined 3D symbol to represent the symbolic part. External representations can be created without modifying the master assembly. External simplified representations are created in separate specialized assembly files.

Interchange Assemblies
An interchange assembly is a special kind of assembly that you can create and then use in a design assembly. An interchange assembly consists of models that are related either by function or representation. You can create both functional interchanges (to replace functionally equivalent components) and simplify interchanges (to substitute components in a simplified representation) in the same interchange assembly. Interchange assemblies, like family tables and layouts, provide a powerful method of automatic replacement.

Assembly

Skeleton Models
The skeleton model of the assembly is the framework of the assembly. A skeleton model is a specialized component of an assembly that defines skeletal, space claim, interface, and other physical properties of an assembly design that you can use to define geometry of components. In addition, you can use skeleton models to perform motion analysis on an assembly by creating placement references to the skeleton model and then modifying the skeleton dimensions to imitate motion. Skeleton models can be used to capture in a central location design criteria defined in the subassembly or delivered from a higher-level assembly. Using skeleton models in more than one assembly allows you to distribute design criteria associatively throughout the product structure. When design criteria change, updating is propagated to affected components. Skeleton models provide a clearly understood hierarchy of driving design criteria, they provide an organized display, and they allow improved performance. Skeleton models are the recommended mechanism for controlling top-level design iterations, and you can use them to facilitate task distribution. Skeletons are represented by a unique icon in the Model Tree because their functional characteristics are significantly different from those of other components. Skeleton models can be filtered out the BOM and drawing views and can be specially handled during the creation and manipulation of simplified representations and Shrinkwrap features. Skeleton models are placed before all other components with solid geometry in the model tree. Reference scope control settings can be used to restrict making assembly placement references to skeleton models only. Skeleton models, like regular components, can be replaced by both family table instances and other skeleton models. You can copy a part model component into a new skeleton model, as long as the part model satisfies the skeleton model criteria. You can generate a native skeleton model, based on a native part model, and have it replace the part model in an assembly, with all references remapped to the new skeleton model. This effectively allows a part to be designated as a native skeleton model, through the use of a new model file. Skeleton models can maintain their own family tables. This enhancement allows assemblies to maintain different skeleton instances across a family table. Although skeletons can be created only within an assembly, they can be retrieved, operated upon, and saved as ordinary parts.

Pro/NOTEBOOK
The optional Pro/NOTEBOOK module supports top-down assembly design with tools that enable you to create hierarchically-linked assembly layouts.

Assembly Process Planning

Assembly Process Planning enables you to create a drawing that illustrates the assembly process of the assembly. Assembly steps are defined using the actual Pro/ENGINEER assembly. Each process step can be further described with specific exploded views, simplified representations, parameters and notes assigned to each process step. 3

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Creating Assemblies About Creating an Assembly

To create a subassembly or an assembly, you must first create datum features or a base component. You can then create or assemble additional components to the existing component(s) and datum features. Assembling Components You can add components to an assembly in the following ways: Assemble a component parametrically by specifying its position relative to the base component or other components and/or datum features in the assembly. Assemble components manually or automatically using predefined component interfaces. Refer to About Automatic Placement of Components for more information. Assemble a component nonparametrically using the Package command in the Insert > Component menu. Use packaging as a temporary means to include the component in the assembly; then finalize its location with assembly instructions. Create a part or subassembly directly in Assembly. You can use layouts and specify declarations to assemble components automatically. You create these assemblies by automatically aligning datum planes and axes of different parts in accordance with the declarations previously made in Layout and Part modes. You can specify declarations, and after a component has a declaration, it can be automatically assembled. You can include a component as a member of an assembly without actually placing it in the assembly window. This technique allows you to list the component as a member of the assembly even if the component is not ready to be assembled (for example, it does not have geometry). The system lists included components in the Model Tree and BOM, but does not display them on the screen or include them in mass property calculations. To add constraints later, you can redefine the placement of the component.

You can remove a component from an assembly by deleting it or replacing it with another component. In addition, you can also redefine the placement constraints for assembled components. To place a base component or feature, you must either create three orthogonal datum planes as the first feature, assemble an existing component (part, subassembly, or skeleton model), or create a base component. Note: A component that is added into an assembly is saved in the assembly directory.

Assembly

Using Datum Planes as the First Feature When you create three orthogonal datum planes as the first feature in an assembly, you can assemble a component with respect to these planes, or create a part in Assembly as the first component. Using datum planes as the first feature has the following advantages: You can redefine the placement constraints of the first assembled component. You can pattern the first component you add, creating a flexible design. You can reorder subsequent components to come before the first one (if the components are not children of the first component).

Assembling a Component Parametrically Using the Component Placement dialog box, you can assemble components parametrically by establishing constraints that define the component's position in the assembly. The component's position changes according to changes in components or assembly features to which it is constrained. Creating a Base Component If you do not create three orthogonal datum planes, the base component is the first part, subassembly, or skeleton model placed into an assembly. In many ways it is like the base feature of a part. The initial assembly units are the same as the units of the base component. When a base component is the first object in an assembly (before any assembly features), no placement constraints are defined. You place the component with the Default constraint. If you replace a base component with interchangeable components, the replacing components will always be placed by default as well. When you create the first component of an assembly, you can either create an empty component or copy from an existing component. As with an assembled base component, the initial assembly units are the same as the base component, and interchange components that replace the created base component will always be in the default orientation.

Tip: Set Up or Use a Default Template

If you have specified a default template (you can set the configuration file option start_model_dir to specify its location), the system uses that template, or start model, for the part. Using a template as a start model allows you to include critical layers, datum features, and views in the model.

Configuring Pro/ENGINEER for using Assembly About Assembly Configuration Options

You can preset environment options and other global settings by entering the settings you want in a configuration file. To set configuration file options use the Options dialog box (Tools > Options). 5

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

This help module contains a list of configuration options, in alphabetical order, showing for each option or group of related options: Configuration option name. Associated variables or values. The default values for the options are shown in italics. Brief description.

To Set Assembly Configuration Options

1. Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens. 2. Click the Show only options loaded from file check box to see currently loaded configuration options or clear this check box to see all configuration options. 3. Select the configuration option from the list or type the configuration option name in the Option box. 4. In the Value box type or select a value. Note: The default value is followed by an asterisk (*). 5. Click Add/Change. The configuration option and its value appear in the list. A green status icon confirms the change. 6. When you finish configuring, click Apply or OK.

allow_copy_with ext_refs
Allow a part with external references to be mirrored copy. Note that any features of the original component that are dependent become independent.

allow_package_children
all, feature, none Sets allowances of features to reference packaged components. After you set this option, it takes effect immediately in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER. allAllows both feature and component placement references featureAllows only geometric feature references noneDisables both feature and component placement references

allow_redo_intersections
yes, no yesDisplays the ReIntersect command in the ASSY FEAT menu.

Assembly

allow_ref_scope_change
yes, no To change the reference scope settings. yesChanges to reference scope settings allowed. noDisplays the message: "Reference Scope changes are prohibited by the configuration file settings." when the Ref Scope user interface is changed. After you set this option, it takes effect immediately in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER.

allow_save_as_instance
no, yes Allows the option to save a copy of the active model as a family table instance.

assem_placement_ignore_units
no, yes yesEnables an automatic update of model units when placing a model whose unit settings are different from the assembly unit settings. The unit settings of the placed model update to those of the assembly. noDisables automatic unit update.

auto_assembly_with_layouts
yes, no Controls automatic assembly. yesEnables automatic assembly. noDisables automatic assembly.

auto_constr_always_use_offset
yes, no Controls whether auto constraint creates offsets. yesAuto constraint always creates offsets. noAuto constraint snaps align or mate if surfaces are within tolerance.

autoplace_single_comp
yes, no Assembling components with an interface automatically places the component at the first position satisfying the interface definitions.

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

can_snap_to_missing_ref
yes, no Enables snapping to missing references while using the drag-and-drop operation for component placement.

check_same_assy_parts
yes, no Determine whether to permit different names for different part occurrences or not in the mirror subassembly user interface.

comp_angle_offset_eps
Specifies the angle epsilon when the selected surface is equal or greater than the epsilon (in degrees). An angle offset constraint is created.

comp_assemble_start
Adjusts the position of a component during placement. default, constrain_in_window, package, move_then_place defaultDisplays the component being placed outside the assembly. constrain_in_windowDisplays the component being assembled in a separate window. packageAttaches the component being assembled to the pointer. Move the component to the required location, click, and open the Placement panel to place the component. move_then_placeAttaches the component being assembled to the pointer. Move the component to the required location, click, and select references to place the component.

comp_assemble_with_interface
default_multi, default_single, from_list, none Options for placing a component with configured interfaces. default_multiYou can automatically place multiple instances of the component using a configured interface. default_singleYou can automatically place a single instance of a the component using a configured interface. from_listThe Select Interface dialog box opens before the Component Placement dashboard appears. Select the interface for component placement from the list and then specify multiple or single placement. nonePlace components without using interfaces.

Assembly

comp_offset_dec_places
Sets the default number of decimal places (0-10) to display in the offset column of component placement.

comp_snap_angle_tolerance
0-90, 30 Specify the angle tolerance for snapping while freeform dragging components being assembled.

comp_snap_dist_tolerance
0.1, 0-1 Specify the distance tolerance for snapping while freeform dragging components being assembled. Relative to the size of the component being assembled.

comp_rollback_on_redef
yes, no Controls whether the system rolls back the assembly when you redefine a component.

convert_to_wf3_replace
no, yes Updates legacy designs to use Wildfire 3 Replace functionality.

copy_geom_update_pre_2000i_dep
yes, no yesFlags independent copy geom features in a pre-2000i model as modified when retrieved into Pro/ENGINEER. This enables you to save the model immediately to update the models copy geom dependency information. This information has changed in Release 2000i for improved interpretation of references in Pro/PDM and Pro/INTRALINK. After you set this option, it takes effect immediately in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER.

create_temp_interfaces
yes, no Allow creation of temporary component interfaces based on previous assembly instructions.

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

default_comp_geom_scope
all, pg, none Set the specified Shared Geometry reference control conditions to newly added components.

default_comp_invalid_refs
copy, prohibit Set the specified handling method of out-of-scope Accessible references to newly added components.

default_comp_scope_setting
all, none, subassemblies, skeleton_model Set the specified accessible reference control conditions to newly added components.

default_comp_skel_geom_scope
all, pg, none Set the specified Shared Geometry reference control conditions to newly added Skeleton components.

default_comp_skel_scope_setting
all, none, subassemblies, skeleton_model Set the specified Shared Geometry reference control conditions to newly added Skeleton components.

default_ext_ref_scope
all, none. skeleton, subassembly Set default scope for externally referenced models. allAny model. noneOnly current model and children. skeletonAny component in the model assembly and higher skeletons in the branch. subassemblyOnly components and children in the model assembly.

default_obj_constraints_scope
all, interfaces, none Set the specified Shared Placement reference control conditions to newly created models if template models were not used.

10

Assembly

default_object_geom_scope
all, pg, none Set the specified Shared Geometry reference control conditions to newly created models if template models were not used.

default_object_invalid_refs
prohibit, copy Sets default condition for reference handling. prohibitSystem aborts all attempts to create external references that violates the scope. copySystem issues a warning upon all attempts to create external references that violates the scope.

default_object_scope_setting
all, none, skeletons, subassemblies Selects the default condition for reference control in a new object. allReference any model. This is the way the system works today. The user may freely create external references to any component in an assembly. noneReference no other models. This will not allow any models other than the model being created, and those that exist below it on its branch, to be externally referenced. skeletonsA new component may reference the Skeleton model of the assembly that the component belongs to. If a Skeleton model is being created, it may reference the skeleton model of the Assembly above the one that it belongs to. subassemblyAllow external references to the model being created, the models which will exist below it, any peer models that the model being created might have, and models below them.

default_placement_scope
all, intrf_if_exists, intrf_only Default value for Component Placement Reference filter.

dim_inactive_components
yes, no Sets the display of inactive components in an assembly to grey and transparent.

dont_show_symbol_nodes
yes, no Show references derived from relations in the parent/child viewer. 11

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

enable_advance_collision
yes, no Enables using advanced collision detection.

enable_assembly_accuracy
yes, no Accuracy modification for assembly objects.

enable_implied_joints
yes, no Allow underconstrained components as mechanism connections.

erv_show_external_only
yes, no Controls the objects displayed in the Reference Viewer. yesDisplays only objects with external references. noDisplays all objects.

exec_prog_on_assem_retr
yes, no Execute Pro/PROGRAM for models during assembly retrieval.

fail_ref_copy_when_missing_orig
yes, no When using a copied geom feature or a backed-up external reference with the Design Manager, and the reference is missing in the original, then the copied geom feature will: yesfail nofreeze and not update

fast_highlight
yes, no Toggles fast highlight and standard highlight of selected assembly components during spin, pan, and zoom operations. Applies for models in the Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden Line, and Shaded modes. yes (default)Fast highlight. Selected components, annotation features, datum curves, and cables associated with the selected components are highlighted and

12

Assembly

displayed during spin, pan, and zoom operations. Datum planes of selected components are not automatically highlighted unless specifically selected. noStandard highlight. Datum planes of selected components are automatically highlighted.

fix_refs_to_intersections
yes, no Sets remnant removal ability for the ReIntersect command in the ASSY FEAT menu. yesYou can remove remnants. noYou cannot remove remnants.

force_upd_assem_mp_in_simp_rep
yes, no Toggles the update of top-level assembly mass properties according to simplified representation definitions. yesMass properties of top-level assembly reflect simplified representation definitions. For example, components that are excluded from the simplified representation are not included in mass properties calculations. noMass properties of top-level assembly do not reflect simplified representation definitions.

freeze_failed_assy_comp
yes, no Determines the treatment of assembly components that fail retrieval. By default, the system requires a specific action to fix the assembly or freeze the component. yesAutomatically freezes any component that fails retrieval into the assembly at its last known location. After deleting a component in an assembly, any child of that component has the status regenerated, even though its make datum reference was deleted. NoRequires an assembly fix or freeze of the component that fails retrieval. Missing refs using offsets or internal datums will not cause components to be frozen.

ignore_all_ref_scope_settings
yes, no Controls whether object-specific reference scope settings are ignored or not. Environment scope settings are still enforced.

13

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

ignore_export_geom_declaration
yes, no Ignore export geometry settings.

mass_property_calculate
by_request, automatic Calculate mass properties upon regeneration or by request.

model_allow_ref_scope_change
yes, no Change the scope settings of components.

mp_calc_level
assembly_only, all_models Specify the level of mass properties calculations.

multiple_skeletons_allowed
no, yes Allows or restricts multiple skeletons.

package_constraints
update, freeze, disallow Controls the behavior of partially constrained components. You cannot build children from them. updateupdates components if assembly changes freezedoes not move components if assembly changes disallowdoes not allow packaged components in the assembly

package_ref_alert
yes, no Controls whether the system displays a confirmation prompt whenever you select a placement reference to a packaged component.

placement_rep_by_default
Sets the simplified representation to be retrieved when assembling a component. Enter a user-defined simplified representation name or one of the Pro/ENGINEER default representations. The specified simplified representation is retrieved when the component is assembled. 14

Assembly

preserve_comp_color_in_preview
yes, no Defines the color of the component during placement. yesThe component retains its color during placement. noThe component displays in yellow preview color until fully constrained.

ref_scope_copy_color
[0255], [0255], [0255] Specifies the default color used by Pro/ENGINEER to display out-of-scope references that are allowed as local copies. The three decimal values in the range from 0 through 255 specify the level of red, green, and blue (in this order) in the resulting color. The models that are out-of-scope and available for copying are displayed in the user-specified color when geometry items are selected for reference. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to control the settings of external references when using top-down design tools such as skeletons, Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry.

ref_scope_copy_color_change
yes, no Enable or disable changing the color of prohibited external references that are allowed for backup. When set to yes, the color of out-of-scope prohibited references will change to the user-specified color during reference selection. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to control the settings of external references when using top-down design tools such as skeletons, Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry.

ref_scope_no_pick_to_copy
yes, no Disable or enable selection of external references not allowed for backup in the External References Control dialog box. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to control the settings of external references when using topdown design tools such as skeletons, Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry.

ref_scope_no_pick_to_prohibit
yes, no Disable selection of external references that were prohibited in the External References Control dialog box. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to control the settings of external references when using top-down design tools such as skeletons, Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry.

15

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

ref_scope_prohibit_color
[0-255], [0-255], [0-255] Set the default color of prohibited external references by providing three RGB values. The three decimal values in the range from 0 through 255 specify the level of red, green, and blue (in this order) in the resulting color. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to control the settings of external references when using top-down design tools such as skeletons, Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry.

ref_scope_prohibit_color_change
yes, no Enable changing color of prohibited external references during selection. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to control the settings of external references when using top-down design tools such as skeletons, Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry.

regen_int_mdls_on_retr
yes, no To specify if models that are intersected by assembly features are regenerated during assembly retrieval.

regen_layout_w_assem
yes, no Layout is automatically regenerated when the assembly is regenerated. After you set this option, it takes effect immediately in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER.

regen_simp_retrieve
yes, no Regenerates component placement definition when retrieving an assembly simplified representation. yesModel regeneration is available upon retrieval. noModel regeneration is not available upon retrieval. Note: When set to yes, this configuration option impacts retrieval performance.

replace_comp_name_method
transfer, remove, preserve Sets the naming convention used when replacing components.

16

Assembly

retrieve_data_sharing_ref_parts
no, yes, ignore_missing Retrieves the referenced parts for dependent features with shared data, such as Inheritance, External Copy Geometry, External Shrinkwrap, and External Merge. noIgnores referenced parts in the retrieval. yesPrompts the user to accept each referenced part during the retrieval. ignore_missingSkips any missing referenced part, sends a message to that effect, and continues the retrieval process.

retrieve_instance_dependencies
instance_req_generic, instance_deps_only, instance_and_generic_deps Determines the set of objects to be loaded into session when retrieving Family Table instances. instance_req_generic (default)Retrieves the Family Table instance, the generic model, and the generic model dependencies that are required for regeneration. Generic dependencies, such as components excluded from the instance, are not retrieved. instance_deps_onlyRetrieves only the selected instance and its dependencies. Additional models included in the generic assembly are not retrieved. instance_and_generic_depsRetrieves the instance and all the generic models, regardless of the instance definition. Note: When retrieving nested instances, intermediate generics are not retrieved. Any change in the configuration option values takes effect only when a new session is started.

retrieve_merge_ref_parts
yes, no Automatically retrieve referenced parts for dependent merge.

save_display_status_in_submodel
yes, no Controls the storage location of sub-model layer display status. yesThe display status of sub-model layers is stored in the sub models. noThe display status of sub-model layers is stored at the top-level assembly.

scope_invalid_refs
prohibit, copy

17

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Determines how the system treats external out of scope references. prohibitSystem aborts all attempts to create external references violating the scope. copyWarning appears. Abort reference creation or declare as an out-of-scope reference. If you declare, system performs a backup of copies to the part and assembly and the backup is referenced.

sel_insts_on_comp_retrieval
yes, no Determines the instance of a retrieved component. yesIf the component used in the assembly instances are generics, then Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to choose an instance when each component is retrieved. noThe generic model of the component is retrieved automatically.

shrinkwrap_alert
yes, no Display an alert the first time the Shrinkwrap quality level is increased.

simprep_ondemand_activation
yes, no Enables on-demand retrieval of the Master representation of an activated assembly component. When an assembly is activated, the Assembly Only representation is retrieved.

simprep_ondemand_cleanup
Disabled, Remove, Remove_Erase Determines whether a retrieved on-demand simplified representation is removed or erased when an operation is complete. DisabledThe model is not removed and remains in the assembly. RemovedThe model is removed from the assembly. Remove_EraseThe model is removed and erased from memory.

simprep_ondemand_editing
Automatic, Master, Master_and_Ancestors, Disabled Enables on-demand retrieval of edited assembly components and their parent references. AutomaticRetrieves the lowest level representation required to perform the operation. 18

Assembly

MasterRetrieves the Master representation of the edited component. Master_and_AncestorsRetrieves the Master representation of the edited component and its ancestors. DisabledDisables on-demand retrieval of edited components.

simprep_ondemand_regeneration
Automatic, Master, Disabled Enables on-demand retrieval of required models during regeneration. AutomaticRetrieves the lowest level representation required to perform the operation. MasterRetrieves the Master representation of the regenerated component. DisabledDisables on-demand retrieval of regenerated components. Note: When enabled, this configuration option can affect regeneration performance.

simprep_ondemand_selection
Automatic, Master, Disabled Sets the simplified representation type to retrieve when a reference is selected. AutomaticRetrieves the lowest level representation required to perform the operation. MasterRetrieves the Master representation of the selected component. DisabledDisables on-demand retrieval of selected components.

simprep_ondemand_settings
Prompt, Automatic, Disabled Sets on-demand simplified representation retrieval behavior. PromptAsks for confirmation before retrieving on-demand representations. Automatic (default)Retrieves models on-demand automatically with no confirmation. DisabledOn-demand simplified representation mode is disabled.

skeleton_model_default_color
[0-100,0-100,0-100], [0, 75, 100] Specifies the color used by Pro/ENGINEER to display new skeleton models. The three decimal values in the range from 0 through 100 specify the percentages of red, green, and blue (in this order) in the resulting color. For example, 0 0 49 specifies a medium blue color.

19

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

spin_with_part_entities
yes, no Controls whether datum planes, axes, and coordinate systems move with the components when you are placing or package moving components using the mouse.

start_model_dir
Specify a complete path to the directory where start parts and assemblies are stored. Then, when you browse the directory structure to select a start component to copy from, the File Open dialog box will look in this directory by default.

style_state_transparency
[0100] Sets the level of transparency for components in the Transparent display style.

update_rep_refs
yes, no Updates to top assembly simplified representations for replacements during regeneration and replacement.

use_new_intchg
yes, no Determines the use of consolidated interchange assembly functionality. yesPro/ENGINEER uses the consolidated interchange assembly functionality. noPro/ENGINEER uses the separate functional interchange assemblies and simplifies interchange assemblies.

visible_annotations_scope
active model only, all Sets the display of assembly component annotations when a new Pro/ENGINEER session is started. active model onlyDisplays only the annotations of the active model. allDisplays all assembly component annotations.

20

Assembly

Creating Components Creating Subassemblies

To Create a Subassembly by Copying an Assembly You can insert a component by creating a copy of it and placing it in the assembly. or Insert > Component > Create or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from a browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Subassembly, and then Standard. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click Copy From Existing. 5. Click Browse, select the name of a component to copy, and click Open. The name of the selected component appears in the Copy From text box. 6. You can select Leave Component Unplaced to include the new component in the assembly without defining placement constraints. 7. Click OK. The new subassembly is placed in the assembly, or it is included in the assembly as an unplaced component if you selected Leave Component Unplaced. To Create an Empty Subassembly You can create a subassembly with no initial geometry. or Insert > Component > Create or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from a browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Subassembly, and then Standard. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click Empty. 5. You can select Leave Component Unplaced to include the new subassembly in the assembly without defining placement constraints. 6. Click OK. The new subassembly is placed in the assembly, or it is included in the assembly as an unplaced component if you selected Leave Component Unplaced.

21

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

About Empty Components in an Assembly You can create a part or subassembly without any geometry and it appears in the Model Tree window. If you save the top-level assembly, the system saves this empty component also. When you create a feature in an empty component in an assembly, you are put directly into Sketcher mode and are not prompted for sketcher references (or external references, in the case of datum geometry). When you define empty components within the context of an assembly, the system places them in the default location of their parent assemblies (using the Default constraint type). Once you have created an empty component within an assembly, you can create default datum planes by retrieving the empty part or subassembly into a separate window and choosing Insert > Model Datum > Plane, or using the datum plane icon in the datum feature tool bar. You can also create features for the component. Note: When you create features that reference the assembly in an empty component, you can no longer redefine the placement of the component. For empty parts or assemblies with no geometry, the Model Size parameter has a value of zero. To Create a Subassembly and Set Default Datums You can create a subassembly and assemble it automatically to references in the assembly. The system creates constraints to locate the default datum planes of the new subassembly relative to the selected assembly references. or Insert > Component > Create or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from a browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Subassembly, and then Standard. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click Locate Default Datums. The Locate Datums Method area of the dialog box opens. 5. Select references from the assembly using one of the Locate Datums Method options: o o o Three Planes Axis Normal To Plane Align Csys To Csys

Click See Also for detailed information. The system creates a new subassembly with default datums and places you in feature creation mode.

22

Assembly

6. Define features for the new subassembly that will automatically use the default datum planes for their references. o o If you used either the Three Planes or the Axis Normal To Plane option, the sketching plane is the first plane that you selected. If you used the Align Csys To Csys option, you must select the sketching plane.

Once you create a feature or quit its creation, the system places the new component in the assembly in the way in which its default planes are mated (by Mate Offset with zero offsets) to the selected references in the assembly. In the case of Axis Normal To Plane, the system also aligns the component axis with the selected assembly axis. You can use the Mod Dim command on the ASSEM MOD menu to modify the value of the offsets in the placement constraints, or redefine the component placement constraints entirely. Locate Datums Methods Select references from the assembly using one of the following methods: Click Three Planes and OK, and select three orthogonal datum planes from the assembly to which the default datum planes of the newly created component will be assembled. Click Axis Normal To Plane and OK, and select a single datum plane and an axis that is normal to it. The system then creates a new component with a datum plane and an axis which it uses to place the new component with respect to the rest of the assembly. Click Align Csys To Csys and OK, and select a coordinate system in the toplevel assembly. The system then creates a new component with a default coordinate system and default datum planes which it uses to place the new component relative to the rest of the assembly.

Creating Solid Parts

To Create a Solid Part and Its Feature You can create the first feature of a new part. This initial feature is dependent on the assembly. 1. In an open assembly, click or Insert > Component > Create or drag a component from a browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Part, and then Solid. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens.

23

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Click Create Features, and click OK. You are now working as though the new model is the active model. 5. Create features using the Insert or Edit commands in the top menu or commands in the Feature toolbar. 6. Create the geometry of the new part either by referencing existing geometry within the assembly or without using references: o Specify a sketching plane and a sketching reference from the existing geometry of the assembly to create the geometry of the new part. Note: The newly created component will have external dependencies to the assembly, and therefore you will not be able to redefine its placement. o If no geometry exists in the assembly, you can create the geometry of the new part without using references.

7. When you have created the desired features in the new part, switch focus back to the top level assembly by selecting the top level node in the Model Tree and click Edit > Activate, or use Ctrl+A to activate the same window at the top level assembly. To Create a Solid Part and Set Default Datums $$$comp_create@DLG,crt_opt_prt@DLG$$ You can create a component and assemble it automatically to references in the assembly. The system creates constraints to locate the default datum planes of the new component relative to the selected assembly references. or Insert > Component > Create or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from a browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Part, and then Solid. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click Locate Default Datums. The Locate Datums Method area of the dialog box opens. 5. Select references from the assembly using one of the Locate Datums Method options: o o o Three Planes Axis Normal To Plane Align Csys To Csys

The system creates a new part with default datums and places you in feature creation mode. The new part will be the Active model in the assembly, and will

24

Assembly

remain active until the user changes the focus to another submodel or back to the top level assembly. 6. Define features for the new part that will automatically use the default datum planes for their references. o o If you used either the Three Planes or the Axis Normal To Plane option, the sketching plane is the first plane that you selected. If you used the Align Csys To Csys option, you must select the sketching plane.

Once you create a feature or quit its creation, the system places the new component in the assembly in the way in which its default planes are mated (by Mate Offset with zero offsets) to the selected references in the assembly. In the case of Axis Normal To Plane, the system also aligns the component axis with the selected assembly axis. You can use the Mod Dim command on the ASSEM MOD menu to modify the value of the offsets in the placement constraints, or redefine the component placement constraints entirely. To Create a Solid Part by Copying From an Existing Part You can insert a part by creating a copy of it and then placing it in the assembly. Note: A part that contains a Shrinkwrap feature is associative and, therefore, cannot be used as the source for creating a new part using Copy From Existing. or Insert > Component > Create or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from a browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Part, and then Solid. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click Copy From Existing. 5. Click Browse, select the name of a component to copy, and click Open. The name of the selected component appears in the Copy From text box. 6. You can select Leave Component Unplaced to include the new component in the assembly without defining placement constraints. 7. Click OK. The new part is placed in the assembly, or it is included in the assembly as an unplaced component if you selected Leave Component Unplaced. Copying Parts with Layouts or External References If you create a part by copying from another part that has a layout declared to it, you must confirm that you would like to declare that layout to the newly created 25

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

copied part as well. Otherwise, the system does not copy the layout declarations to the newly created part. If you try to create a part from an existing part with external references that are not locally backed up, the system aborts the copy. If you try to create a part from an existing part that has external references that are locally backed up, the system will notify you that those external references will be made permanently independent in the new component, and ask whether you wish to continue. To Create an Empty Part or Insert > Component > Create or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from a browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Part, and then Solid. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click Empty. 5. You can select Leave Component Unplaced to include the new part in the assembly without defining placement constraints. 6. Click OK. The new part is placed in the assembly, or it is included in the assembly as an unplaced component if you selected Leave Component Unplaced.

Creating Bulk Items

About Bulk Items Bulk items are nonsolid representations of components within an assembly. Bulk items represent objects that do not require solid models but must be represented in the Bill of Materials (BOM) or in Product Data Management programs. Examples of bulk items include glue, paint, or multiple component items such as rivets or screws. in the Model Tree. Bulk items can contain special Bulk items are identified with relationships to support the associative calculation of bulk quantities according to the assembly context. Parameters for bulk items can be predefined in the corresponding bulk model. The bulk model is a subtype of a part and is identified as a .prt file. You can manipulate (add, remove, and modify) bulk part-level parameters and relations. In addition, you can create family table instances of a bulk model. When you add bulk items into an assembly, the part-level parameters and relations are associatively copied to the bulk item component level. If you select User Input, you can define different values to parameters for every occurrence of a bulk item in any assembly. You can summarize parameters from multiple objects by using

26

Assembly

Parameter Sum. The representation of the bulk quantity in the BOM is controlled by the BOM_REPORT_QUANTITY parameter. Bulk Item Templates A bulk template is the start model used when a new bulk model is created. You can use bulk template parts to create new bulk model. In bulk templates, parameters and relations can be defined and used each time the bulk template is applied. You can create a bulk item template for commonly used parameters. To Create Bulk Items in an Assembly or Insert > Component > Create. The 1. In an open assembly, click Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Bulk Item. 3. Type a name for the bulk model or use the default name and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens with the following options: o o Copy from ExistingCopy parameters from an existing bulk model. EmptyCreate an empty bulk model.

4. Select Copy from Existing or Empty. If you select Copy from Existing, you must click Browse and select an existing bulk part to copy. You create a new bulk part with the same information as the copied part. The Bulk dialog box opens with the following options: o o o o RelationsCreate equations to calculate relations with bulk items. Local ParametersType parameter name, type, value, and user input status. Family TableDefine family table instances for the bulk part. PropertiesDefine properties for the selected parameters. Note: If you select Empty, the Bulk dialog box opens. 5. Add or modify bulk item parameters and relations or create a family table for the bulk item part. 6. Click OK. To Create a Bulk Item Template You can create a bulk item template consisting of commonly used parameter information. 1. Click File > New. The New dialog box opens with Part selected by default. 2. Click Bulk for the sub-type.

27

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Type a name for the bulk model or use the default name. Use Default Template is selected by default. The Bulk dialog box opens with the following options: o o o o RelationsCreate equations to calculate relations with bulk items. User InputSetup prompts requesting additional information. Family TableDefine family table instances for the bulk item. PropertiesDefine properties for the parameters.

4. Add or modify bulk item parameters and relations. 5. Click File > Save. 6. Click OK. To Assemble an Existing Bulk Item 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open

2. Select the bulk part from the Open dialog box. 3. Click Open. The Bulk Component dialog box opens if a parameter is defined as User Input. 4. Perform the required operations to define bulk item information. 5. Click .

About Defining Bulk Item Parameters You can create, modify, and delete parameters using the Bulk dialog box. The work flow for manipulating bulk item parameters is identical to other parameter operations within Part mode. However, the following additional functionality is added to bulk item parameters: In the Bulk dialog box, click the User Input checkbox to specify if a bulk item parameter requires user input. User Input requires you to provide data when bulk items are placed in an assembly. Parameter input is performed from the Bulk Component dialog box. Bulk template parts can have a parameter named BOM_REPORT_QUANTITY. The number value for this parameter is the quantity for the bulk item part in the Bill of Materials (BOM). You can define the following additional parameter types for bulk items: o Length MeasureSupplies the value of the parameter by calculating the length of the specified curve or edge. The curve is selected from the Bulk Component dialog when the value cell for the parameter is selected.. The User Input checkbox is automatically selected when the Length Measure parameter is used.

28

Assembly o

Distance MeasureSupplies the value of the parameter by calculating the distance between two specified entities. The two reference entities are selected from the Bulk Component dialog when the value cell for the parameter is selected. The User Input checkbox is automatically selected when the Distance Measure parameter is used. Diameter MeasureSupplies the value of the parameter by calculating the diameter of a specified circular curve or edge. The curve is selected from the Bulk Component dialog when the value cell for the parameter is selected.. The User Input checkbox is automatically selected when the Diameter Measure parameter is used. Area MeasureSupplies the value of the parameter by calculating the surface area of a specified surface or collection of surfaces. The surfaces are selected from the Bulk Component dialog when the value cell for the parameter is selected. The User Input checkbox is automatically selected when the Area Measure parameter is used. Angle MeasureSupplies the value of the parameter by calculating the angle between two entities. The two reference entities are selected from the Bulk Component dialog when the value cell for the parameter is selected. The User Input checkbox is automatically selected when the Angle Measure parameter is used. Parameter SumObtains values of the same named parameter from other objects in the assembly and sums up the total values of those parameters. The objects used to input values to this value are selected from the Bulk Component dialog when the value cell for the parameter is selected. The selected objects must have an existing parameter with the same name as the Parameter Sum parameter.

To Create a Length Measurement Parameter 1. In the Bulk dialog box, click .

2. Type a new parameter name or use the default name. 3. Click the cell in the Type column. In the Type drop-down box, click Length Measure. 4. Define the remaining bulk item parameters. Note that the User Input checkbox is automatically selected for the Length Measure type parameter. 5. Click File > Save and click OK. When you add the bulk item into an assembly, the Bulk Component dialog box opens listing only parameters requiring user input. 6. Click the cell in the Value column. The Measure dialog box opens. 7. In the assembly model, select the curve or edge used to calculate the length measurement. 8. Click Close. The Value cell is updated with the calculated length measurement.

29

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

9. Click

To Create a Distance Measurement Parameter 1. In the Bulk dialog box, click .

2. Type a new parameter name or use the default name. 3. Click the cell in the Type column. In the Type drop-down box, click Distance Measure. 4. Define the remaining bulk item parameters. Note that the User Input checkbox is automatically selected for the Distance Measure type parameter. 5. Click File > Save and click OK. The Bulk Component dialog box opens listing only parameters requiring user input. 6. Click the cell in the Value column. The Measure dialog box opens. 7. In the assembly model, select the two entities used to calculate the distance measurement. 8. Click Close. The Value cell is updated with the calculated distance measurement. 9. Click .

To Create a Diameter Measurement Parameter 1. In the Bulk dialog box, click .

2. Type a new parameter name or use the default name. 3. Click the cell in the Type column. In the Type drop-down box, click Diameter Measure. 4. Define the remaining bulk item parameters. Note that the User Input checkbox is automatically selected for the Diameter Measure type parameter. 5. Click File > Save and click OK. The Bulk Component dialog box opens listing only parameters requiring user input. 6. Click the cell in the Value column. The Measure dialog box opens. 7. In the assembly model, select the surface used to calculate the diameter measurement. 8. Click Close. The Value cell is updated with the calculated diameter measurement. 9. Click .

30

Assembly

To Create an Area Measurement Parameter 1. In the Bulk dialog box, click .

2. Type a new parameter name or use the default name. 3. Click the cell in the Type column. In the Type drop-down box, click Area Measure. 4. Define the remaining bulk item parameters. Note that the User Input checkbox is automatically selected for the Area Measure type parameter. 5. Click File > Save and click OK. The Bulk Component dialog box opens listing only parameters requiring user input. 6. Click the cell in the Value column. The Measure dialog box opens. 7. In the assembly model, select the surface used to calculate the area measurement. 8. Click Close. The Value cell is updated with the calculated area measurement. 9. Click .

To Create an Angle Measurement Parameter 1. In the Bulk dialog box, click .

2. Type a new parameter name or use the default name. 3. Click the cell in the Type column. In the Type drop-down box, click Angle Measure. 4. Define the remaining bulk item parameters. Note that the User Input checkbox is automatically selected for the Angle Measure type parameter. 5. Click File > Save and click OK. The Bulk Component dialog box opens listing only parameters requiring user input. 6. Click the cell in the Value column. The Measure dialog box opens. 7. In the assembly model, select the two entities used to calculate the angle measurement. 8. Click Close. The Value cell is updated with the calculated angle measurement. 9. Click .

To Create a Parameter Sum 1. In the Bulk dialog box, click .

31

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

2. Type a parameter name identical to the parameter names in the parts to sum up in this parameter. For example, if you want to sum up the values of the "Area" parameter in other parts, name the parameter "Area". 3. Click the cell in the Type column. In the Type drop-down box, click Parameter Sum. 4. Define the remaining bulk item parameters. Note that the User Input checkbox is automatically selected for the Parameter Sum type parameter. 5. Click File > Save and click OK. The Bulk Component dialog box opens listing only parameters requiring user input. 6. Click the cell in the Value column. The Refs Type dialog box opens. 7. Click the checkbox where the parameters to be summed exist. For example, Assembly, Part, Component, and so forth. 8. Click Done. The sum of the selected parameters is shown in the Value cell of Parameter Sum.

Bulk Item Workflows

To Create Bulk Items Containing Paint In this example, you can determine the amount of paint required for particular surfaces in an assembly model. Create and calculate different color instances for surfaces and see the final results in the Bill of Materials (BOM). Complete the following steps to create bulk items containing paint quantity information for your model: 1. Create a bulk model and define properties for the parameters. 2. Setup equations to calculate parameter relations with bulk items. 3. Setup parameters for different color instances for model surfaces: 4. View the results of bulk items in the BOM. To Define Bulk Model Properties 1. Click File > New. The New dialog box opens. 2. Click Part > Bulk and type PAINT for the .prt file name. Use Default Template is selected by default. 3. Click OK. The Bulk dialog box opens. 4. Click to add a new parameter.

5. Right-click the Type cell. In the drop-down box, click String. 6. In the Name cell, type COLOR.

32

Assembly

7. Click

to add another parameter.

8. Right-click the Type cell. In the drop-down box, click Area_Measure. 9. In the Name cell, type PAINT_AREA. To Measure Painted Model Surfaces 1. In the Bulk Item dialog box, click the Value cell in the PAINT_AREA column. 2. The Measure and Select dialog boxes open. 3. Select the area to measure on the assembly model. 4. Click Close. The area measurement is calculated and appears in the Value cell. 5. Click .

To Set Up Parameter Relations 1. In the Bulk dialog box, click Relations. 2. Type BOM_REPORT_QUANTITY=PAINT_AREA*0.125. Alternatively, in the Local Parameters box, you can right-click the parameter name. In the shortcut menu, click Insert to Relations. The parameter name appears in the Relations box. 3. Click File > Save and OK. Note: You can click to verify parameter relations.

To Set Up Parameters for Different Color Instances 1. Click Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Bulk Item and type RED for the bulk item name. 3. Click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click Copy From Existing and Browse to search for paint.prt that contains parameters and relations previously created. 5. Clear the Edit Parameters and Relations check box. 6. Click OK. The Bulk Component dialog box opens. 7. In the COLOR column, click the Value cell and type RED. 8. In the PAINT_AREA column, click the Value cell. The Measure and Select dialog boxes open. To View Bulk Items in the BOM 1. Click Info > Bill of Materials. The BOM dialog boxes with Top Level selected by default. 33

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

2. Click OK. The BOM appears listing bulk items and paint area quantity.

Placing Components About the Component Placement User Interface

The Component Placement user interface consists of the following items: Feature icon Slide-up panels Dialog bar Shortcut menus

Feature Icon The Component Placement dashboard displays the following icon: Indicates a component being placed in an assembly. The icon is displayed in the Insert > Component > Assemble menu and the feature toolbar.

Slide-up Panels Placement Slide-up Panel This panel enables and displays component placement and connection definition. It contains two areas: Navigation and Collection areaDisplays sets and constraints. Translation references and motion axes are displayed for predefined constraint sets. The first constraint in a set activates automatically. A new constraint activates automatically after a valid pair of references is selected, until the component is fully constrained. Constraint Attributes areaContext-sensitive to the constraint or motion axis selected in the navigation area. The Allow Assumptions check box determines the use of system constraint assumptions.

Move Slide-up Panel Use the Move panel to move the component being assembled for easier access. When the Move panel is active, all other component placement operations are paused. To move a component it must be packaged or configured with a predefined constraint set. The following options are available on the Move panel: Motion TypeSpecifies a motion type. The default is Translate. o o Orient ModeReorients the view. TranslateMoves the component.

34

Assembly o o

RotateRotates the component. AdjustAdjusts the component's position.

Relative to view plane(default) Moves the component relative to the viewing plane. Motion ReferenceMoves the component relative to a component or reference. This option activates the Motion Reference collector. Reference collectorCollects references for component motion. Motion is relative to the selected references. A maximum of two references can be collected. Choose a reference to activate the Normal Parallel options. o o NormalMoves the component normal to the selected reference. ParallelMoves the component parallel to the selected reference.

Translation / Rotation / Adjust Reference boxOptions for component motion for each motion type. RelativeDisplays the component's current position relative to its position before the move operation. For reference only.

Flexibility Slide-up Panel This panel is available only for components with defined flexibility. Click the Varied Items option to open the Varied Items dialog box. Component placement pauses when the Varied Items dialog box is open. Properties Slide-up Panel Name BoxDisplays the component name. Provides detailed component information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser.

Dialog Bar The Component Placement dialog bar options are context-sensitive to the set type and constraint selected. Places a component using an interface. Places a component manually. Converts a user-defined set to a predefined set or vice versa. Predefined Set listDisplays a list of predefined constraint sets: o o User DefinedCreates a user-defined constraint set. RigidAllows no movement in the assembly.

35

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

o o

PinContains a rotational movement axis and translation constraints. SliderContains a translational movement axis and rotation constraints. CylinderContains a 360 rotational movement axis and translational movement. PlanarContains a planar constraint to allow rotation and translation along the reference planes. BallContains a point alignment constraint for 360 movement. WeldContains a coordinate system and an offset value to "weld" the component in a fixed position to the assembly. BearingContains a point alignment constraint to allow rotation along a straight trajectory. GeneralCreates a user-defined set of two constraints. 6DOFContains a coordinate system and an offset value, to allow movement in all directions. SlotContains a point alignment to allow rotation along a nonstraight trajectory. Changes the orientation of a predefined constraint set.

o o

o o

Constraint listContains the constraints applicable for the selected set. When a user-defined set is selected, the default is Automatic but can be changed manually. The following options are available: o DefaultAligns the component coordinate system with the default assembly coordinate system. FixFixes the current location of a component that was moved or packaged. Edge on SurfacePositions an edge on a surface. Point on SurfacePositions a point on a surface. Point on LinePositions a point on a line. TangentPositions two references of different types so that they face each other. The point of contact is a tangent.

o o o o

36

Assembly

Coordinate SystemAligns the components coordinate system with an assembly coordinate system. InsertInserts a revolved component surface into an assembly revolved surface. MatePositions two references of the same type so that they face each other. AlignPositions two planes on the same plane (coincident and facing the same direction), two axes coaxial, or two points coincident.

Offset type fly-out input boxSpecifies the offset type for a Mate or Align constraint. o Makes component reference and assembly references coincident to each other. Makes component reference oriented on the same plane and parallel to the assembly reference. Offsets the component reference from the assembly reference by the value entered in the Offset Input box. Offsets the component reference from the assembly reference by the angle value entered in the Offset Input box.

Toggles between a Mate and an Align constraint or flips the orientation of a component. The following list boxes appear when interfaces are configured for the component:

Interface Placement optionsMatches the interface to an assembly reference by: o o Interface To InterfaceMatches the component interface to an assembly interface. Interface To GeomMatches the component interface to assembly geometry.

Configured Interfaces listDisplays a list of all interfaces configured for the component. StatusDisplays placement status: No Constraints, Partially Constrained, Fully Constrained, Constraints Invalid.

Tool Options: Displays the component in its own window as you define constraints.

37

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

(default) Displays the component in the graphics window and updates component placement as you define constraints. Both window options can be active at the same time.

Pauses component placement so you can use a tool. Resumes component placement following a pause. Applies component placement and quit the dashboard. Cancels component placement. This removes the component from the assembly and the window and closes the dashboard.

Shortcut Menus To access shortcut menus, right-click the Placement panel or graphics window. Navigation Area Shortcuts For a selected constraint: DisableDisables the selected constraint. EnableEnables the selected constraint. DeleteDeletes the selected constraint. Retrieve RefsRetrieves missing references from the master representation when a simplified representation is in session.

For a selected set: DisableDisables the entire constraint set. EnableEnables the entire constraint set. DeleteDeletes the entire constraint set. Save as interfaceSaves the constraint set as an interface. Retrieve RefsRetrieves missing references from the master representation when a simplified representation is in session.

For a selected collector: RemoveRemoves the selected reference. InformationOpens the Information dialog box to display reference information.

38

Assembly

Graphics Window Shortcuts As constraints are defined for a set, they appear in the graphics window. Mate or Align drag handles and offset values also appear. Use the handle to set the value or double-click the value to edit it. To define sets and constraints without using the dashboard, right-click in the graphics window. The following commands are on the shortcut menu: Both Collectors, Component Collector, Assembly CollectorProvides collectors. Move ComponentAllows movement of the component being placed. ClearClears the active collector. FlipToggles between a Mate and an Align constraint. Flip ConstraintFlips the orientation of a component. Flip ConnectionReverses the original orientation of all motion axes in the connection. New ConstraintAdds a new constraint. Default ConstraintConfigure a default constraint (only available for the first component in an assembly). Fix ConstraintMakes the constraint a fixed constraint. Retrieve RefsRetrieves missing references from the master representation when a simplified representation is in session. Save as InterfaceSaves the active constraint set as an interface. AssumptionsAllows or disallows the application of system rules about constraints.

To set properties for connections, drag the connection to the desired location and right-click it. The following commands are on the shortcut menu: Set Regen ValueSets the regeneration value to the current location of the drag handle. Disable Regen ValueDisables the regeneration value. Set Maximum LimitSets the maximum limit to the current location of the drag handle. Disable Maximum LimitDisables the maximum limit. Set Minimum LimitSets the minimum limit to the current location of the drag handle. Disable Minimum LimitDisables the minimum limit. Flip ConnectionReverses the original orientation of all motion axes in the connection.

39

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

About Placing Components

When you place a component relative to its neighbors (components or assembly features), its position is updated as its neighbors move or change, provided the assembly constraints are not violated. This is called parametric assembly. To add a component to an assembly, click or click Insert > Component > Assemble. Select the desired component from the File Open dialog box, or drag a component into the assembly from the file browser. Components can be placed in a number of ways: Using placement definition sets Automatically

Component placement is based on placement definition sets. These sets determine how and where the component relates to the assembly. The sets are either userdefined or predefined. A user-defined constraint set has 0 or more constraints (a packaged component may have no constraints). Predefined constraint sets have a predefined number of constraints. Placement of a component in an assembly is determined by the constraints in all sets defined. A single set of constraints can define placement of a component. If constraints from one set conflict with constraints from another set, the placement status becomes invalid. The constraints must be redefined or removed until placement status becomes valid. Constraints can be added or deleted at will in a user-defined constraint set, there are no predefined constraints. Each type of predefined constraint set (also called a connection) has a predefined number of constraints. Constraint sets are displayed in the Placement folder of the Model Tree. Display hierarchy follows the order in which they were defined. Constraint icons are the same as those in the Component Placement dashboard. If only one set is defined, only constraints appear. The Model Tree Placement filter must be activated to view the Placement folder.

To Display Constraint Sets in the Model Tree

1. Click Settings > Tree Filters. The Model Tree Items dialog box opens. 2. Click the Placement folder check box. 3. Click OK. The Placement folder (indicated by beneath the component in the Model Tree. ) appears as the first folder

To Place a Component
1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open

2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the selected component in the graphics window. A

40

Assembly

component can also be selected from a Pro/ENGINEER browser and dragged into the graphics window. to display the component in a separate window, or click to display 3. Click the component in the graphics window (default). Both options can be active at the same time and can be changed at will. 4. Select a constraint set type. User Defined is default. Then select a predefined set type to define a connection and select component references for each constraint, or configure a user-defined set. 5. If you selected a predefined set, its constraints appear automatically in the constraint list. If you selected User-Defined, the Automatic constraint is selected by default. Select a reference on the component and a reference on the assembly, in any order, to define a placement constraint. When a pair of valid references is selected an appropriate constraint type is automatically selected. You can also open the Placement panel. Choose a constraint type from the Constraint Type list. (Display the list by clicking Automatic or the adjacent arrow), and then select references. 6. Select an offset type from the Offset list. Coincident is the default offset. Enter any offset value or drag the offset handle in the graphics window to set an offset value. 7. Once a constraint in a user-defined set has been defined, a new constraint is automatically activated, until the component is fully constrained. You can define additional (up to 50) constraints by clicking New Constraint in the Placement panel or right-click in the graphics window and choose New Constraint from the shortcut menu. Each constraint is listed in the Constraints area as it is defined. The component's current status appears in the Placement Status area. Press and hold CTRL to reactivate the current constraint. Click a reference (component or assembly) in the graphics window to deselect it, and then select a new reference. Release CTRL to activate the next constraint. 8. Constraints in user-defined sets can be selected and edited. Change the constraint type, use the Flip option to toggle Mate and Align, modify the offset value, or allow and disallow system assumptions. 9. To delete a constraint, right-click and select Delete from the shortcut menu. 10. To configure another constraint set, click New Set. The previously configured set collapses and a new set appears with the first constraint displayed. Choose a predefined set type or configure a user-defined set. when component status is Fully Constrained, Partially Constrained, 11. Click or No Constraints. The system places the component with the current constraints. A component cannot be placed in the assembly if the status is Constraints Invalid. You must complete the constraint definition first. A component can be left as Packaged with incomplete constraints. A Packaged component is one that is included in the assembly but is not fully constrained.

41

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Packaged components follow the configuration file option package_constraints behavior. Remove or add additional constraints to resolve conflicts. Clear the Constraint or Set Enabled check box to disable a constraint or a set. System constraint orientation assumptions are enabled by default. Clear the Allow Assumptions check box to disable system placement assumptions.

To Place a Component Multiple Times

1. After assembling the component, select it in the Model Tree and click Edit > Repeat. The Repeat Component dialog box opens. 2. Select the assembly reference you want to vary from the Variable Assembly Refs list. 3. Click Add. 4. Select a new assembly reference. The reference appears in the Place Component list. 5. Follow the prompts in the message window to select the appropriate placement references. When you have defined all the references, a new component is automatically added. 6. Continue to define reference placements until you have placed all the instances of the component. 7. Click Confirm. 8. To remove an occurrence of a component, select its row in the Place Component list and click Remove.

About Editing Placement References

When you place a component or edit a placement definition, you can use the shortcut placement panel in the graphics window to edit placement references without opening the Placement panel. You can change placement references, change the constraint type, or flip between a Mate and Align constraint. To change the constraint type, you must first delete at least one reference. For predefined connection sets, you can edit the axis alignment, translation, or rotation references. When the shortcut placement panel overlaps or interferes with placement, click the top bar and drag it to a new location. The constraint tag background and font color provide information. The tag of an active constraint has a yellow background color. A red font color indicates missing references. The selected constraint has a blue frame. Note: When you edit the properties of a constraint from the edit placement shortcut it does not interfere with placement auto progression. You can edit a constraint in the Placement panel, but it will stop auto progression. To continue defining placement constraints you must click New Constraint in the Placement panel or the right mouse button shortcut menu. 42

Assembly

User-Defined Sets
About Using Placement Constraints A placement constraint specifies the relative position of a pair of references. Follow these general principles for placement constraints: The two references for Mate and Align constraints must be of the same type (plane-to-plane, revolved-to-revolved, point-to-point, axis-to-axis). When an offset value is entered for Mate and Align constraints, the system displays the offset direction. To select the opposite direction, enter a negative value, or drag the drag handle in the graphics window. Constraints are added one at a time. You cannot use a single Align constraint to align two different holes in one part with two different holes in another part. You must define two separate Align constraints. Placement constraint sets are used to completely define placement and orientation. For example, you can constrain one pair of surfaces to mate, another pair to insert, and a third pair to align. A revolved surface is a surface created by revolving a section or by extruding an arc or circle. The only surfaces that may be used in a placement constraint are planes, cylinders, cones, tori, and spheres. The term same-surface refers to a set of surfaces that includes a seed surface and all surfaces connected through artificial edges. For example, a cylindrical surface created through Extrude or Revolve is made of two surfaces connected through two artificial edges. Cylinders, cones, spheres, and tori are surfaces that can be used

Mate Constraint Use the Mate constraint to position two selected references to face each other. A mate constraint may mate two selected references as coincident, orient, or offset.

43

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

If datum planes or surfaces are mated, their yellow, normal direction arrows face each other. If datum planes or surfaces are mated with an offset value, an arrow appears in the assembly reference pointing in the positive offset direction. If components are mated coincident or with an offset value of zero, the planes are coincident with the normal positive directions facing each other. The normal direction is defined when a datum or surface is created.

1.

Mate

Mate Constraint With an Offset Value Use the Mate constraint to make two planar surfaces parallel and facing each other. The offset value determines the distance between the two surfaces. Use the offset drag handle to change the offset distance.

1. 2. 3.

Mate Mate offset Offset

Align Constraint Use the Align constraint to align two selected references and to face the same direction. An Align constraint may align two selected references as coincident, oriented, or offset. An Align constraint will make two planes coplanar (coincident and facing the same direction), two axes coaxial, or two points coincident. You can align revolved surfaces or edges. The offset value determines the distance between the two references. Use the offset handle to change the offset value. 44

Assembly

If two datum planes are mate-oriented, their yellow, normal direction arrows face each other so they can be offset at a value that is not fixed. They can be positioned in any location as long as their direction arrows face each other. Align-orient is similar, except that the direction arrows face the same direction. When using mateorient or align-orient, you must specify additional constraints in order to rigidly position the component.

1.

Align

You can also align two datum points, vertices, or curve ends. Selections on both parts must be of the same type, that is, if you select a point on one part, you must select a point on the other part. Align Constraint With an Offset Value Use the Align constraint to align two planar surfaces at an offset: parallel and facing the same direction. Use the offset drag handle to change the offset distance.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Align Mate Align offset Offset value

45

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Insert Constraint Use the Insert constraint to insert one revolved surface into another revolved surface, making their respective axes coaxial. This constraint is useful when axes are unavailable or inconvenient for selection.

1. 2.

Insert Mate

Coord Sys Constraint Use the Coord Sys constraint to place a component in an assembly by aligning its coordinate system with a coordinate system in the assembly (you can use both assembly and part coordinate systems). Select the coordinate systems by name using the Search tool, selecting coordinate systems from the assembly and component, or create them on the fly. The component will be assembled by aligning the corresponding axes of the selected coordinate systems.

1.

Coord sys alignment

Tangent Constraint Use the Tangent constraint to control the contact of two surfaces at their point of tangency. This placement constraint functions like Mate because it mates surfaces; it does not align them. An example of the use of this constraint is the contact surface or point between a cam and its actuator.

46

Assembly

1. 2.

Tangent Conical surface

Pnt On Line Constraint Use the Pnt On Line constraint to control the contact of an edge, axis, or datum curve with a point. In the example in the following figure, the point on line is aligned to an edge to an edge.

1. 2.

Point on Line Edge

Pnt On Srf Constraint Use the Pnt On Srf constraint to control the contact of a surface with a point. In the example shown in the following figure, the system constrained the surface of the block to a datum point on the triangle. You can use part or assembly datum points, surface features, or datum planes, or part solid surfaces for references.

47

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

1.

Point on surface

Edge On Srf Constraint Use the Edge on Srf constraint to control the contact of a surface with a planar edge. In the example shown in the following figure, the system constrained a linear edge to a planar surface. You can use datum planes, planar part or assembly surface features, or any planar part solid surfaces.

1.

Align edge with surface

48

Assembly

Default Constriant Use the Default constraint to align the default system-created coordinate system of the component to the default system-created coordinate system of the assembly. The system places the component at the assembly origin.

1. 2.

Part coordinate system Assembly coordinate system

Fix Constraint Use the Fix constraint to fix the current position of a component that was moved or packaged. To Define Mate or Align Offset Values 1. In an open assembly, select references for a Mate or Align constraint. 2. Select an Offset type: o o o CoincidentSets the component and assembly references coincident to each other. OrientOrients the component reference on the same plane and parallel to the assembly reference. OffsetOffsets the component reference from the assembly reference by the value entered in the Offset Input box.

3. Enter the value for the offset or drag the offset drag handle to set the offset value. Constraint Orientation Assumptions When Allow Assumptions is selected (the default) during component assembly, constraint orientation assumptions are automatically made. For example, only one Align and one Mate constraint are required to fully constrain a bolt to a hole in a plate. After an Align constraint has been defined between the axes of the hole and the bolt and a Mate constraint has been defined between the bottom face of the bolt 49

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

and the top face of the plate, the system assumes a third constraint. This constraint controls rotation about the axes, thereby fully constraining the component. When the Allow Assumptions check box is cleared, the third constraint must be defined before the component is considered fully constrained. You can leave the bolt packaged, or you can create another constraint that explicitly constrains the bolts rotational degree of freedom. When Allow Assumptions is disabled, you can use the Move panel options to move a component out of a previously assumed position, where it will remain. The component automatically snaps back to the assumed position if you select the Allow Assumptions check box again. Tip: Using Extra Constraints You can add more constraints than are necessary to place the component in an assembly. This is called overconstraining. Even when the position of a component is completely constrained mathematically, you may want to specify additional constraints to ensure that the assembly follows your design intent. Although you can specify up to 50 constraints, PTC recommends a limit of 10. To Create Datum Planes for Constraints When a new datum plane is required for a Mate or Align constraint, you can create it on the fly while placing the component. 1. Click 2. Click to pause component placement. . The Create Datum dialog box opens.

3. Create the datum plane with the offset required. 4. Click OK. 5. Click to resume component placement.

Assembling a Component to a Datum Plane (Translate and Rotate) You can assemble a component to a datum plane by using: An offset datum to translate a component An angle datum to rotate a component

The assembled components remain fixed relative to the datums, but you can move the datums relative to the assembly using their offset or angle parameters. The reference datums can belong to an assembly or to a part. If they are assembly datums, their driving parameters appear in the assembly drawings. If they are part datums, they appear only in part drawings.

50

Assembly

Example: Flipping a Mate and an Align Constraint You can switch between a mate and an align constraint during component placement. In the figure below, the bottom surface of the small solid is mated to the top surface of the large solid.

1.

Mate

To flip between a mate and align constraint: Click on the dialog bar.

Click Flip in the placement panel. Right-click in the graphics window and choose Flip from the shortcut menu.

The top surface of the small solid is aligned with the top surface of the large solid.

2.

Align

Predefined Sets
About Predefined Constraint Sets Predefined constraint sets define the movement of a component in an assembly. A predefined constraint set contains constraints that define a type of connection, with or without a motion axis. Connections define a particular type of motion. After you decide which connection allows the type of motion you want, select it from the list and appropriate constraints appear. These constraints cannot be deleted, changed, or removed. New constraints cannot be added.

51

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

The Rigid, Weld, User-Defined, and Ball predefined sets do not have motion axes. A Ball constraint set has motion, but it has no axis. All predefined constraint sets are editable in Mechanism Design. For more information search the Simulation functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Select the motion axis in the Navigation and Collection area. The Motion Settings Properties area appears for you to specify motion axis properties. Set Types Components placed with predefined constraint sets are underconstrained by intent to retain one or more degrees of freedom. After configuring a predefined constraint set, drag the component to ensure that it is placed correctly to allow the desired motion. RigidConnects two components so that they do not move relatively to each other. They are constrained with any valid set of constraints. Components so connected become a single body. Rigid connection set constraints are similar to a user-defined constraint set.

1. 2.

Mate Align

PinConnects a component to a referenced axis so that the component rotates or moves along this axis with one degree of freedom. Select an axis, edge, curve, or surface as an axis reference. Select a datum point, vertex, or surface as a translation reference. A Pin connection set has two constraints: axis alignment and planar mate or align or a point alignment.

52

Assembly

1. Axis Alignment 2. Translation

SliderConnects a component to a referenced axis so that the component moves along the axis with one degree of freedom. Select edges or aligning axes as alignment references. Choose surfaces as rotation references. A Slider connection set has two constraints: axis alignment and planar mate/align to restrict rotation along the axis.

1. Axis Alignment 2. Rotation

CylinderConnects a component so that it moves along and rotates about a specific axis with two degrees of freedom. Select axes, edges, or curves as axis alignment references. A Cylinder connection set has one constraint.

1. Axis Alignment

PlanarConnects components so that they move in a plane relatively to each other with two degrees of freedom in the plane and one degree of freedom around an axis perpendicular to it. Select Mate or Align surface references. A Planar connection set has a single planar mate or align constraint. The mate or align constraint may be flipped or offset.

53

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

1. Planar Mate

BallConnects a component so that it can rotate in any direction with three degrees of freedom (360 rotation). Select points, vertex, or curve ends for alignment references. A Ball connection set has one point-to-point alignment constraint.

1. Point Alignment

WeldConnects one component to another so that they do not move relatively to each other. The component is placed in the assembly by aligning the coordinate system of the component with a coordinate system in the assembly. The component can be adjusted using the open degrees of freedom in the assembly. A Weld connection has one coordinate system alignment constraint.

1. Coordinate System 2. Assembly Default Coordinate System

BearingA combination of Ball and Slider connections with four degrees of freedom. There are three degrees of freedom (for 360 rotation) and movement

54

Assembly

along a referenced axis. For the first reference choose a point on the component or the assembly. For the second reference choose an edge, axis, or curve on the assembly or the component. The point reference can rotate freely about the edge and move along its length. A Bearing connection has one point-on-edge alignment constraint.

1. Point Alignment 2. Point 3. Translation Axis

GeneralHas one or two configurable constraints that are identical to those in a user-defined set. Tangent, point on curve, and point on nonplanar surface cannot be used for a General connection. 6DOFDoes not affect the motion of the component in relation to the assembly because no constraints are applied. The coordinate system of the component is aligned to a coordinate system in the assembly. The X, Y, and Z assembly axes are motion axes allowing rotation and translation.

1. Part Coordinate System 2. Coordinate System Alignment

SlotA point on a nonstraight trajectory. This connection has four degrees of freedom, where the point follows the trajectory in three directions. Choose a point on the component or the assembly for the first reference. The referenced point follows the non-straight reference trajectory. The trajectory has endpoints that are set when the connection is configured. A Slot connection has a single point alignment to multiple edges or curves constraint.

55

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

1. Point Alignment 2. Point

About Bodies A body is a group of components that are rigidly controlled with no degrees of freedom within the group. The constraints used to place a component determine which parts belong to a body. The software automatically defines bodies based on these constraints. You create an assembly in Pro/ENGINEER by combining components, including parts and subassemblies. You use the Component Placement dashboard in Assembly to define the relationship of the component you are adding to your assembly. There are two types of constraint sets on the Component Placement dashboard. You can use user-defined constraint sets, such as mate and align, or you can use predefined constraint sets to define connections. If you assemble two components as partially constrained, a connection is assumed. The way that you define the bodies in your assembly impacts the way you create predefined constraint sets in the following ways: You can create predefined constraint sets only between distinct bodies. When specifying predefined constraint sets for a Mechanism Design connection on the Component Placement dashboard, you can only reference a single body in the assembly and a single body in the component being placed. When you select the first assembly entity for a predefined constraint set, you can select entities only from the same body for the remaining constraints of that connection. This is also true when selecting the component references.

Ground components (parts and subassemblies) in a mechanism do not move with respect to the assembly. You can include several parts or subassemblies in the ground body. To define a ground body, fully constrain a component with constraints that reference the default assembly datums or a part or assembly already in ground. If you underconstrain the component, it isl not placed in the ground body and is considered a new body. The best way to review bodies is by opening the Bodies folder in the Mechanism Model Tree. Click Show > Mechanism Tree in the Model Tree to open the Mechanism Model Tree in Assembly. For more information, search the Simulation functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.

56

Assembly

To Define a Body as Ground 1. Open an assembly. 2. Click opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The File Open dialog box

3. Select a component (part or subassembly). 4. Click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 5. Select Default from the constraint list. The Constraint Type becomes Default. 6. Click .

Note: Because of improved ground body functionality, Mechanism Design models created prior to Pro/ENGINEER 2001 can lose ground body associations for certain components. In this case, you must redefine the component placement. Tip: Creating Ground Bodies Keep the following principles in mind if you are creating a new assembly or adding new components (parts or bodies) to ground: When creating a new assembly, use the templates so that a default coordinate system and datum planes are automatically defined. The assembly and its features (coordinate system and datum planes) are ground. Fully constraining a component to the assembly with a default constraint places that component in ground. A component is considered ground only when it is fully constrained to a component or feature that is already in ground.

Note: A component can become part of ground when it is only partially constrained if the enable_implied_joints configuration option is set to no. Example: Flipping Connections Use the Flip command to flip pin, cylinder, slider, bearing, and slot connections and reverse the original orientation of the motion axes. Select the connection in the placement panel, and then choose one of the following actions: Click in the dialog bar.

Click Flip in the placement panel. Right-click in the graphics window and choose Flip Connection from the shortcut menu. Select the motion axis drag handle in the graphics window, right-click, and choose Flip Connection from the shortcut menu.

57

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

When a connection is flipped, the directions of the motion axes are flipped. The translational and rotational axis directions were flipped in the figure below. The regeneration value and motion limits are also flipped.

1. 2.

Axis alignment Translation

Example: Flipping the Orientation of a Component When you assemble a component with an axis alignment or insert constraint, you can reverse its location or orientation. To reverse the location or orientation of the component, choose one of the following actions: Click on the dialog bar.

Click Flip in the placement panel.

58

Assembly

Right-click in the graphics window and choose Flip constraint from the shortcut menu.

About the Mechanism Design Model Tree in Assembly Mechanism design and movement is based on connections between moving bodies. As you configure your assembly by using predefined constraint sets, Pro/ENGINEER automatically assigns components to bodies. Connections between bodies are not visible in the Assembly Model Tree. To view bodies in the Assembly Model Tree, add the Body # column to the tree. For more information about the Tree Columns dialog box, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. A simplified version of the Mechanism Design Model Tree is available in Assembly, although the mechanism entities are not displayed. Use it to view and edit the predefined constraint sets configured between the bodies. In the Model Tree click Show > Mechanism Tree. The Mechanism Design Tree appears in the bottom section of the Model Tree. Both panes will be affected if you change Tree Filters and Tree Columns. The Mechanism Design Model Tree displays your model's bodies in a separate Bodies folder. This folder contains the folders you selected in the Mechanism tab of the Model Tree Items dialog box including the Ground folder, Body folders and the Excluded Components folder. The Ground folder contains Incoming Connections and Body Contents folders. Each Body folder contains Incoming Connections, Outgoing Connections, and Body Contents folders. The Excluded Components folder contains components excluded from dragging operations, components excluded by simplified representations, and suppressed objects. Body contents and connections are not displayed in this folder. Envelopes and Motion Skeletons are displayed in the Mechanism Design Model Tree as well. Right-click a component in the Assembly Model Tree or in the Mechanism Design Model Tree to edit it. The selected component or entity in the Mechanism Design Model Tree is highlighted in the Assembly Model Tree and vice-versa. The entity is highlighted on the model in the graphics window as well.

59

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Tip: For large models with several connections, you can often find a specific connection in the Model Tree more easily than on the model. About Motion Axes in Predefined Constraint Sets In predefined constraint sets, motion axes: Determine which placement constraints are used to place the component in the assembly. The constraints restrict the motion of bodies relative to each other, reducing the assembly's total possible degrees of freedom (DOF) Define component motion limits

Before selecting a predefined constraint set with a motion axis, you must understand how the placement constraints and degrees of freedom are used to define movement. Each motion axis is associated with a unique set of geometric constraints that define specific Degrees of Freedom. DOF define allowable translational or rotational movement (or both) of a component in the assembly. Define properties for the motion axis in the Placement panel of the Component Placement dashboard: The default zero position is the initial placement position of a reference on the component relative to a reference on the assembly. The zero position is the current manually set zero position. The motion axis regeneration value determines the position of the component in the assembly when the model is regenerated. The regeneration value of a motion axis is a dimension that can be used in family tables, relations, and wherever dimensions are used. This value is ignored during dragging and analysis operations. A motion axis regeneration value can be set in the Component Placement dashboard when placing the component or while editing a motion axis in Assembly. In Mechanism Design, it can be set from the Motion Axis definition dialog box. Limits on the motion axis, friction, and restitution of the axis are constraint set parameters. Use the motion settings options of the Placement panel to set these parameters. Click Dynamic Properties to set friction and restitution parameters. To simulate impact forces for a motion axis, specify a value for the coefficient of restitution. The coefficient of restitution is defined as the ratio of the velocity of two entities before and after a collision.

Note: Although configured motion axes are visible in Assembly mode, it is easier to redefine them in Mechanism Design where conflicts between different motion axes are visible. In Assembly, each motion axis is configured independently and conflicting motion limits are not visible. For more information, search the Simulation functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Set Zero Position References 1. Open an assembly.

60

Assembly

2. Insert a new component, or select a component, right-click in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Open the Placement panel, or right click and choose Add Set from the shortcut menu. 4. Define a connection for a new component. 5. Select the motion axis in the Placement panel. The collectors below the motion axis activate and the motion settings options appear in the Properties area. 6. Select references on the component and assembly. This is the default zero position. The Current Position becomes 0.00 and the Motion Settings options activate. 7. To set a new zero position, move the offset drag handle to position the component in a new location and click Set Zero Position. The Current Position updates to 0.00. 8. Click the arrow adjacent to Set Zero Position and click Default Zero Position. The Current Position updates to be the distance between the default zero position and the current position of the component. Zero Positions The default zero position is the initial placement position of a motion axis component reference relative to an assembly reference. To use a different position as the zero position, move the position of the component and click Zero Position. This new zero position is now the reference for the current position offset, the regeneration value, and maximum, and minimum limits of component movement. To use the default zero position as the zero position reference, click Default Zero Position. The offset of the zero position from the default zero position is called the zero position offset. This is a motion axis parameter and can be used in relations and Family Tables. To Set the Motion Axis Regeneration Value 1. Open an assembly. 2. Insert a new component, or select a component and right-click in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Open the Placement panel. 4. Select an existing motion axis or define a new one. The Zero Position collectors below the motion axis activate and the Motion Settings options open in the properties area. 5. Select Zero Position references. The Current Position box lists the current positions of the chosen references displayed in relation to each other.

61

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

6. Set the regeneration value using one of the following operations: o o Enter a value in the text box and click .

Drag the component handle to the location for the regeneration value, right-click, and choose Set Regen Value from the shortcut menu. The value changes as the component is moved.

An invalid value cannot be entered. The new regeneration value appears in the Regen Value box Note: Valid regeneration values are: Regeneration value >= Minimum Limit Regeneration value <= Maximum Limit For a rotational axis the default minimum limit is -180 degrees and the default maximum limit is 180 degrees. The difference between the minimum and maximum limits cannot exceed 360 degrees, and must be greater than zero. 7. To enable the regeneration value, select the Enable regeneration value check box. To disable the regeneration value and leave the motion axis free of constraints, clear the check box, or right-click the connection drag handle and choose Disable Regen Value from the shortcut menu. Note: When a connection is flipped, the regeneration value is also flipped. Regeneration Values When you enter a regeneration value, a connectivity check is automatically performed. This ensures that only a valid value is entered in respect to regeneration values defined for other motion axes in the assembly. When the assembly fails to connect for the value entered, the component is made transparent and repositioned outside the assembly with dashed lines showing its place in the assembly. When this happens, undo the value entered or continue with the definition to ensure proper placement in the assembly. To Set Motion Limits 1. Open an assembly. 2. Insert a new component, or select a component, right-click in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Open the Placement panel. 4. Select an existing motion axis or define a new one. The Zero Position collectors activate and the Motion Settings options open in the properties area. 5. Select the Zero Position check box references. 6. Set a regeneration value if required.

62

Assembly

7. Click the Maximum Limit check box and enter a number or drag the connection handle, right-click it, and choose Set Maximum Limit from the shortcut menu. The maximum should be greater than or equal to the regeneration value (when set). For a rotational axis, the maximum value is automatically 180.00 (in degrees). 8. Click the Minimum Limit check box and enter a number in the text box, or drag the connection handle, right-click it and choose Set Minimum Limit from the shortcut menu. The minimum should be less than or equal to the regeneration value (when set). For a rotational axis, the minimum value is automatically 180.00 (in degrees). 9. To disable a motion limit, clear a motion limit check box, or right-click the connection handle and choose Disable Maximum Limit or Disable Minimum Limit from the shortcut menu. The motion limit is ignored in dragging and mechanism operations. Note: When a connection is flipped, the motion limits are also flipped. To Set Motion Axis Dynamic Properties 1. Open an assembly. 2. Insert a new component, or select a component and right-click in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Open the Placement panel. 4. Select an existing motion axis or define a new one. The Select component zero reference and Select assembly zero reference collectors below the motion axis activate and the motion settings options appear in the Properties area. 5. Select zero references. 6. Set motion settings. 7. Set the regeneration value. 8. Click Dynamic Properties. Select the Coefficient of Restitution check box and enter a value. 9. Select or clear the Enable Friction check box to enable or disable friction. 10. Enter values for: o The friction force that prevents the Static Coefficient of Friction surfaces of the connection from moving against each other until motion begins. Values allowed: between one and zero. The friction force that prevents the joint Kinetic Coefficient of Friction surfaces from moving freely against each other, slowing the motion. Values allowed: between one and zero.

63

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

The distance between the motion axis Contact Radius (Rotational axes) and the point of contact. The value should be greater than zero.

For more information, search the Simulation functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Using Motion Axis Parameters and Dimensions in Family Table Instances Defining Family Table instances for motion axis properties and dimensions in Assembly enables fast, efficient analysis in Mechanism Design. Only one analysis must be defined for all instances of the component, enabling easy comparison between different dynamic property values for the same component. Motion limits and dynamic properties can be used in Family Tables. These parameters are used to define different instances of the same component. A hinge, for example, can be used in several doors with different motion limits in each door. Select the Parameter option on the Family Items dialog box (Tools > Family Table). Select Connection from the Look In list. All motion parameters for the selected connection are in the list. The parameters for a disabled predefined constraint set or suppressed component are unavailable unless they were added before the component was suppressed or the predefined constraint set disabled. The Regeneration Value is a dimension in a Family Table to define different configurations of an assembly. It is available in the graphics window when you select the Dimension option on the Family Items dialog box. Note: For more information on Family Tables, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Convert User-Defined Constraint Sets to Predefined Constraint Sets 1. In the Model Tree, right-click the partially constrained component and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 2. Select the user-defined constraint set that will automatically convert to a predefined constraint set. 3. Right-click in the graphics window and choose Convert to Connections from the shortcut menu, or click in the dashboard.

Note: This option is for user-defined constraint sets with valid predefined constraint sets. The status area indicates whether the definitions are complete. About Editing Springs and Dampers in Assembly Springs and dampers created as features in Mechanism can be edited in Assembly. To edit a spring or damper in Assembly, select it from the Model Tree, right-click and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Mechanism spring icons are not visible in the Assembly graphics window.

64

Assembly

To Display Connections in the Graphics Window 1. Click View > Display Settings > Model Display. The Model Display dialog box opens. 2. Select Connections. Connections are now displayed in the graphics window.

Packaged Components
About Packaged or Partially Constrained Components and Mechanisms Packaged components are not fully constrained in an assembly. There are two reasons for leaving a component packaged or partially constrained in an assembly: When you add a component to an assembly, you may not know where it fits best, or you might not want to locate it relative to the geometry of other components. Use packaging as a temporary means of placing the component. To package a component, close the Component Placement dashboard before the component is fully constrained, or clear the Allow Assumptions check box. When you add a mechanism component to the assembly, a user-defined constraint set or a predefined constraint set (connection) determines the degrees of freedom the component has in the assembly.

Adding packaged components in an assembly Use the Add command in the PACKAGE menu to place components in an assembly without constraining them relative to neighboring parts. Components placed in this manner are nonparametric. When adding a packaged component, you can create placement references to fully constrained components or to packaged components. This defines an assembly design before all placements constraints are known for all parent components. When you place a component by referencing a packaged parent it is called a Child of Packaged component. A unique Child of Packaged icon , similar to the Packaged Component icon , is used in the Model Tree to indicate a component that is placed with references to a packaged parent. The component is shown as Child of Packaged in the Model Tree Status column. The icon is used only for firstlevel children of a packaged component. Packaged components follow the behavior dictated by the package_constraints configuration file option. As a design grows, the placement of children of packaged components may not remain as you intended because of the extra degrees of freedom. You can use the Fix constraint to fix, or fully constrain, a packaged component in its current location, in relation to its parent assembly. Note: Place a subassembly independently if you want a more immediate coordinate system, closer to the active packaged components. You can reposition a packaged component using the Insert > Component > Packaged > Move dialog box or the Drag dialog box.

65

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

You can change the placement of a component, regardless of how it was assembled, without having to redefine it. When you add a component as a packaged component, the Move dialog box opens. Choose a Move option and move the pointer to position the packaged component, then click to drop the part at the required position. When a component is positioned in this manner, positioning is absolute, not relative to other components. Mechanism assemblies You can assemble a component using a user-defined or predefined constraint set (connection) to retain degrees of freedom for component movement in the assembly. These components are packaged and are marked as packaged in the Model Tree. Connections define a specific type of movement in the assembly. Use the Drag dialog box to move the component and check for interference with other components in the assembly. Components placed using predefined constraint sets that reference more than one packaged components are themselves packaged components. They have degrees of freedom that allow them to move independently of any one component. Configuration File Options for Moving Packaged Components The following configuration file options control the behavior of package moved components: comp_assemble_startControls where the component is initially shown. The values are package (the default) and constrain_in_window. package_constraintsControls the behavior of partially constrained components. You cannot build children from them. The values are update, freeze, and disallow. o o o If the configuration option is set to update, the component continues to follow the assembly constraints you have specified. If the option is set to freeze, the component behaves the same as a packaged component; that is, it does not follow the specified constraints. If you set it to disallow, the component must be fully constrained before you can leave the package interface.

comp_rollback_on_redefControls whether the system rolls back the assembly when you redefine a component. The values are yes (the default) and no. allow_package_childrenControls the ability to reference packaged components. If it is set to feature, you can only make feature references to packaged components. The all setting (the default) allows both feature and placement references to packaged components. The none setting disallows both feature and placement referencing. Use the Ref Control dialog box to toggle between allowing and disallowing referencing packaged components.

66

Assembly

package_ref_alertControls whether the system displays a confirmation prompt whenever you select a placement reference to a packaged component. Referencing packaged components can result in loose, or unfixed, placements that can cause unexpected placement behavior after minor geometric modifications. Therefore, whenever you select a placement reference to a packaged component, the system alerts you and requests confirmation to use the reference. The values are yes (the default) and no.

spin_with_part_entitiesControls whether datum planes, axes, and coordinate systems move with the components when you place or package moving components using the mouse. The values are yes (the default) and no. While dragging components, obtain visible feedback about their position based on datum references, especially for components that contain only datum features and no solid geometry.

To Package a New Component in an Assembly 1. In an open assembly, click Insert > Component > Package > Add. The GET MODEL menu displays the following options: o o o OpenOpens the File Open dialog box to select a component Sel On ModelAllows you to select any component in the graphics window and adds a new occurrence of it to the assembly. Sel LastAdds the last component assembled or packaged.

2. Choose the required option and select a component. The Move dialog box opens. 3. Adjust the position of the packaged component. 4. Click Done/Return. Note: The first component of an assembly cannot be a packaged component. However, you can package additional occurrences of the first component. Moving Packaged Components Use the Insert > Component > Packaged > Move dialog box to translate or rotate packaged components that you positioned using the Add option, as well as components that were left with incomplete constraints. Keep in mind the following: After you add a component to an assembly, it is not removed when you choose Cancel on the Move dialog box. As you move a component, the system records each movement until it completes the placement. You can use the Undo command until the component reaches its initial position. You can use Redo in the same way. When using Adjust and View Plane to move a component, the system reorients the component so that the desired surface is perpendicular to the view direction.

67

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

The Move dialog box is similar to the Move panel on the Component Placement dashboard and has the following options: Motion Type areaDetermines the type of motion: o Orient ModeOrients the component with respect to specific geometry. Select the packaged component, then right-click in the graphics window to access the Orient Mode shortcut menu. TranslateMoves the packaged component by dragging it parallel to an edge, axis, plane, or the viewing plane; perpendicular to a plane; or until a face or axis on that component becomes coincident with another. RotateRotates the packaged component about an edge, axis, or point on the view plane; or until a face or axis on that component becomes aligned with another. AdjustAligns the packaged component to a reference entity on the assembly.

Motion Reference areaSelect the direction reference: o o o o o o View PlaneUses the viewing plane as the reference plane (repositions the component in a parallel plane). Sel PlaneUses a plane other than the viewing plane as the reference plane (repositions the component in a plane that is parallel to it). Entity/EdgeUses an axis, straight edge, or datum curve (repositions the component in a line parallel to it). Plane NormalUses a plane as the reference plane and repositions the component in a line that is normal to it. 2 PointsUses two points or vertices (repositions the component in a line that connects them). CsysUses a coordinate system axis (repositions the component according to the coordinate system direction).

Motion Increments areaSelect Translate or Rotate, and then set the increment by selecting a value from the list or entering a value. To drag the component without apparent incrementing, choose Smooth. Position areaEnter the relative distance from the start point to the new component origin. UndoUndoes the last motion. RedoRedoes the last motion. PreferencesDisplays the Preferences dialog box with the following options: o Dynamic DragSnaps the component to placement constraints while dragging (default).

68

Assembly o o o o

Modify OffsetsModifies the offset dimensions while dragging the component. Add OffsetsAdds offset dimensions to Mate and Align constraints initially created without offsets. Snap OptionsSets the tolerance distance and angle for active snapping. Drag CenterSelects a new drag origin point.

To Fix the Location of a Packaged Component 1. In an open assembly, click Insert > Component > Package. The PACKAGE menu appears. 2. Select Fix Location. 3. Select the packaged component to be placed from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. The system fully constrains the packaged component in its current location. Note: Alternatively, you can select the component in the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click and choose Fix Location from the shortcut menu. To Finalize Packaged Components Packaged components are not parametrically positioned in the assembly. That is, changes made to neighboring parts do not drive their location. This makes packaging useful when you are experimenting with different configurations in your assembly. However, once you know where components go, you should finalize their position. Select Insert > Component > Package > Finalize, and then select the packaged component. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Configure the placement definition. After you finalize a packaged component, you can no longer move it with the Package Move functionality. Its placement can, however, be modified or redefined using the Component Placement dashboard. About Packaged or Partially Constrained Components and Mechanisms Packaged components are not fully constrained in an assembly. There are two reasons for leaving a component packaged or partially constrained in an assembly: When you add a component to an assembly, you may not know where it fits best, or you might not want to locate it relative to the geometry of other components. Use packaging as a temporary means of placing the component. To package a component, close the Component Placement dashboard before the component is fully constrained, or clear the Allow Assumptions check box. When you add a mechanism component to the assembly, a user-defined constraint set or a predefined constraint set (connection) determines the degrees of freedom the component has in the assembly.

69

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Adding packaged components in an assembly Use the Add command in the PACKAGE menu to place components in an assembly without constraining them relative to neighboring parts. Components placed in this manner are nonparametric. When adding a packaged component, you can create placement references to fully constrained components or to packaged components. This defines an assembly design before all placements constraints are known for all parent components. When you place a component by referencing a packaged parent it is called a Child of Packaged component. A unique Child of Packaged icon , similar to the Packaged Component icon , is used in the Model Tree to indicate a component that is placed with references to a packaged parent. The component is shown as Child of Packaged in the Model Tree Status column. The icon is used only for firstlevel children of a packaged component. Packaged components follow the behavior dictated by the package_constraints configuration file option. As a design grows, the placement of children of packaged components may not remain as you intended because of the extra degrees of freedom. You can use the Fix constraint to fix, or fully constrain, a packaged component in its current location, in relation to its parent assembly. Note: Place a subassembly independently if you want a more immediate coordinate system, closer to the active packaged components. You can reposition a packaged component using the Insert > Component > Packaged > Move dialog box or the Drag dialog box. You can change the placement of a component, regardless of how it was assembled, without having to redefine it. When you add a component as a packaged component, the Move dialog box opens. Choose a Move option and move the pointer to position the packaged component, then click to drop the part at the required position. When a component is positioned in this manner, positioning is absolute, not relative to other components. Mechanism assemblies You can assemble a component using a user-defined or predefined constraint set (connection) to retain degrees of freedom for component movement in the assembly. These components are packaged and are marked as packaged in the Model Tree. Connections define a specific type of movement in the assembly. Use the Drag dialog box to move the component and check for interference with other components in the assembly. Components placed using predefined constraint sets that reference more than one packaged components are themselves packaged components. They have degrees of freedom that allow them to move independently of any one component.

70

Assembly

Unplaced Components
About Unplaced Components Unplaced components belong to an assembly without being assembled or packaged. These components appear in the Model Tree but not in the graphics window, as they are not placed geometrically in the assembly. Unplaced components are indicated by in the Model Tree. Constrain or package unplaced components by selecting them from the Model Tree, and then right-click and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. After a component is constrained or packaged, it cannot be reverted to unplaced. Unplaced components can be included or excluded when creating a bill of material and are not accounted for in mass properties calculations. When its parent assembly is retrieved into memory, an unplaced component is also retrieved. You can perform actions on unplaced components that do not involve any knowledge of either the placement in the assembly or its geometry. For instance, you can associate an unplaced component with a layer, but you cannot create a feature on an unplaced component. Note: When a component is declared to belong to an assembly by modifying its relationship in a PDM system or Pro/INTRALINK, that component is left unplaced in the assembly until it is either explicitly constrained or packaged. To Create an Unplaced Component or Insert > Component > Create. The 1. In an open assembly, click Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Select Part and enter a name in the Name box or leave the default name. 3. Click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Create a component either by copying from an existing component or leaving the component empty. 5. Check the Leave Component Unplaced check box in the placement box. 6. Click OK. The component is added to the Model Tree but does not appear in the graphics window. To Place an Unplaced Component To place an unplaced component, redefine the component and establish placement constraints. 1. Right-click the component and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu or click Edit > Definition. 2. The Component Placement dashboard appears. The component appears in a separate window. 3. Place the component in the normal way. 71

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Include an Unplaced Component 1. In an open assembly, click Insert > Component > Include. The Open dialog box opens. 2. Select the component to be included in the assembly. 3. Click Open. The component is added to the Model Tree but does not appear in the graphics window.

Assembling Components to a Pattern

About Assembling Components to a Pattern Use a pattern to quickly assemble multiple instances of a component. Place the first component (pattern leader) in the assembly, and then select it from the Model Tree and pattern multiple placement definitions. You can assemble multiple instances of a component to a pattern in the following ways: ReferenceAssembles the first component to the leader of an existing component or feature pattern, then use Reference to pattern it. This option is only available when a pattern already exists. FillAssembles the first component on a surface, and then use a sketch on the same surface to generate a component fill pattern. Dimension (Nontable)Assembles the first component on a surface with Mate or Align offset constraints. Use the offset values of the constraints applied as dimensions to create a nontable standalone pattern. AxisAssembles the component to the center of the pattern. Select a datum axis to define and enter the angle between pattern members and the number of members in the pattern. DirectionAssembles component in a specified direction. Select a plane, flat surface, linear curve, coordinate system, or axis to define the first direction. Select a similar reference type to define the second direction. CurveAssembles components to a referenced curve in the assembly. Open Sketcher from the Reference panel to sketch a curve if there are no existing curves in the assembly. TableAssemble the first component on a surface with Mate or Align offset constraints. Use the offset values of the constraints applied as dimensions. Click Edit to create a table, or click Table and select an existing table pattern from the list.

, and the pattern members are indicated by . A pattern leader is indicated by To exclude a pattern member, click the corresponding black dot. The dot changes , and the pattern member is excluded. Click the dot again to include the pattern member. Use the same method to pattern groups as you would use to pattern components.

72

Assembly

Note: A component created in the context of an assembly with the Create First Feature option cannot be patterned. For detailed information on patterns, search the Part functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Example: Assembling a Component to a Pattern The figure below shows how a component is assembled to a pattern.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Mate Insert Pattern of four holes Components assembled to the pattern

The number of instances (holes) of the pattern determines the number of components (bolts) to be assembled. Therefore, if you modify the number of instances (holes) in the pattern, the number of required components (bolts) is updated.

73

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

The figure below shows how the number of assembled components automatically updates when a pattern is modified. The number of instances has been changed to 6. After regeneration, the number of bolts automatically updates to the number of holes.

To Assemble Components to a Reference Pattern or Insert > Component > Assemble or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from the browser into the assembly session. 2. Place the component. The placement references you select from the assembly must be from the pattern leader of a previously patterned assembled component or assembly feature. 3. Select the component in the Model Tree and do one of the following to open the Pattern dashboard: o o o Click .

Right-click in the graphics window and select Pattern from the shortcut menu. Click Edit > Pattern.

4. In the first box select Reference. Reference appears only when the component is assembled relative to an existing pattern. 5. If the existing pattern is part of a group that is patterned, choose one of the following options: o o o FeatureReference the feature pattern. GroupReference the group pattern. BothReference both patterns.

to approve and complete the pattern feature. The component assembles 6. Click to every member of the pattern. Placement constraints that do not belong to the 74

Assembly

pattern are common to all components. If you modify one component, every other component is automatically modified as with a feature pattern. Assembling Components to a Reference Pattern A component assembled to references of a pattern in an assembly can be patterned by referencing this pattern. The Reference option is automatically selected when the pattern dashboard appears. For example, to place bolts into a pattern of holes, you must specify the assembly constraints only once, between the bolt and the first, or leader, hole. When assembling components to a reference pattern, keep in mind the following rules: You can select references from two patterns in a set of placement constraints, but the system uses only the first pattern for subsequent components. If you assemble a component to an assembly feature that is the leader of the pattern, you cannot reference this pattern. Components placed in the assembly and used as a reference pattern can be used to assemble another pattern of components. For example, if you have bolts assembled in a pattern of holes using the Reference option, you can use Reference again to assemble a pattern of nuts directly to the bolts. If the existing pattern is part of a group and that group is patterned, the new pattern can reference the feature pattern, the group pattern, or both patterns.

75

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Example: Assembling to Group Patterns In the figure below, the pattern of holes was created as a feature pattern that was grouped and patterned. The bolts are assembled as a pattern that references the feature pattern, the group pattern, and both patterns.

1. 2. 3.

Component assembled to feature pattern Component assembled to group pattern Component assembled to both patterns

About Dimension Patterns You can create a dimension-driven pattern to specify multiple occurrences of a component in an assembly. The dimension-driven pattern uses assembly constraint dimensions such as Mate or Align offset values. The rules for creating a dimensiondriven pattern are the same as those for feature patterning in Part mode. Note: If you must redefine a dimension pattern, redefine the component placement first, and then redefine the pattern.

76

Assembly

To Assemble Components to a Dimension Pattern or Insert > Component > Assemble or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from the browser into the active assembly session. 2. Place the component with at least one offset type constraint. To create the pattern, you must specify the offset values that you want to use as references. 3. Select the component in the Model Tree and do one of the following operations to open the Patten dashboard: o o o Click .

Right-click in the graphics window and choose Pattern from the shortcut menu. Click Edit > Pattern.

4. In the first box select Dimension. 5. Click the Dimensions tab, select a dimension in the assembly, and enter an incremental value, or drag the handle to the required location. 6. Click the Direction 2 box or right-click the graphics window and select Direction 2 Dimensions from the shortcut menu to enter a second dimension, or drag the handle to the required location. 7. Select the second dimension in the assembly and enter an incremental value. 8. Enter the number of members in each dimension in the respective boxes. 9. Click .

77

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Example: Assembling a Component to a Dimension Pattern In the figure below, a component assembled with an align offset value is patterned using the offset values as the driving dimensions. The part in the figure assembled once and patterned.

1. 2.

Component assembled with align offsets of 3 Bidirectional dimension pattern

About Assembling Components to a Table Pattern With a table pattern, you can create a complex pattern easily. All selected dimensions and Family Table instances of the component in the table pattern are controlled for each member of the table pattern. Each pattern member is a row in the table pattern. The dimensions chosen and Family Table instances are variables in the table columns. Variable dimensions can be any or all dimensions, the distance between members of the pattern, and component dimensions.

78

Assembly

To Assemble Components to a Table Pattern or Insert > Component > Assemble or drag a 1. In an open assembly, click component from the browser into the active assembly. 2. Place the component with at least one offset type constraint. To create the pattern, you must specify the offset values that you want to use as references. 3. Select the component in the Model Tree and do one of the following operations to open the Patten dashboard: o o o Click .

Right-click in the graphics window and choose Pattern from the shortcut menu. Click Edit > Pattern.

4. In the first box select Table. 5. Select the pattern dimensions. 6. Click Edit. The Pro/Table dialog box opens. If the component has Family Table members, the Model and the selected dimensions appear with their values. You can set or add models as pattern members, and you can edit new dimensional values and model names in this column. Assembly Intersections in Table Patterns All intersected pattern members are shown on visible assembly features with correct assembly cuts. Each pattern member has its own intersection that is visible only in the top assembly. Assembly cuts appear in each occurrence at the part level, as they do in regular assemblies with multiple occurrences of the same models. To Replace All Pattern Members Using Family Tables 1. Expand the pattern feature in the Model Tree. 2. Right-click the pattern leader in the Model Tree or select a pattern member in the graphics window and choose Replace from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Replace. The Replace dialog box opens. 3. Select the Family Table option in the Replace list. 4. Click . The Family Tree dialog box opens.

5. Select a different instance and click OK. You return to the Replace dialog box. 6. Click OK. All pattern members are replaced by the new family table instance. To Replace Individual Pattern Members Using Family Tables 1. Right-click the pattern feature in the Model Tree and select Edit Definition from the shortcut menu.

79

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

2. Click Edit. The Pro/Table dialog box opens. 3. Enter the name of the new instance member in the Model column. 4. Click File > Exit. 5. Click .

About Replacing Pattern Members by a Family Table Instance You can replace one instance of a Family Table with another in a pattern when you use a reference common to all Family Table members for the initial placement of the component. If any of the components instances do not contain all the placement references used by the pattern leader, the instances cannot be placed in the pattern, and the pattern fails. You must redefine the pattern leader placement references so that the references are common to all pattern instances, or make the necessary references available by editing the Family Table. Individual members of a pattern can be replaced in a table pattern. Edit the pattern table file, specify a Family Table instance name, and then replace individual occurrences of the patterned component with members of its Family Table.

Manipulating Components About Kinematic Movement of Components

Kinematic movement is the motion of a body or a system of bodies without consideration to its mass or the forces acting on it. Partially constrained components can be moved kinematically in the assembly. The system uses implied connections derived from existing assembly placement constraints to move packaged components. Components configured with motion axis connections are moved kinematically using existing constraints and motion axes. The following constraints display limited kinematic behavior: Tangent Point on curve Point on nonplanar surface

Set the enable_implied_joints configuration option to yes to allow kinematic movement of components. Excluding Flexible Components A flexible component in an assembly will lock the assembly's kinematic movement. To allow kinematic movement in the assembly, flexible parts can be excluded from an assembly for the duration of the drag operation. A flexible component is excluded automatically from the assembly drag operation when it is fully constrained with the flexibility defined by distance dimensions. This definition allows the two assembly entities to move separately. When the drag operation ends, the excluded component is regenerated and updated to its new position and dimensions in the assembly. A 80

Assembly

flexible component placed with connections will prevent drag operations in the assembly. The shape of the component does not change dynamically and the assembly will not move. A component that blocks kinematic movement of an assembly can be excluded manually from the assembly by selecting it and choosing Exclude from Mechanism from the shortcut menu. Using Mirrored Subassemblies All components of mirrored assemblies are fixed and cannot be moved kinematically. Existing referenced subassembly mechanism connections are not copied to the mirrored components. You can redefine the mirrored components so that they are independent of the referenced subassembly. They can then be partially constrained and dragged kinematically without regard to the referenced subassembly.

Moving Components Being Placed

About Moving Components You can adjust the position of a component as it is being placed in the assembly using one of the following methods: Set the comp_assemble_start configuration option to move_then_place. The component attaches to the pointer. Drag the mouse to move the component. To stop movement, click in the graphics window. Right-click and choose Move Component from the shortcut menu. Click and release the mouse button in the graphics window and drag the mouse. To stop movement, click in the graphics window. Choose a different option from the shortcut menu to quit. Use keyboard shortcuts. Use the Move panel options.

To Move Components Using Keyboard Shortcuts 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open

2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. To move the component, use any of the following mouse and key combinations: o o Press and hold CTRL+ALT+ left mouse button and move the pointer to drag the component. Press and hold CTRL+ALT+ middle mouse button and move the pointer to spin the component.

81

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o

Press and hold CTRL+ALT+ right mouse button and move the pointer to pan the component. Press CTRL+SHIFT+ middle mouse button or click .

To Move Components Using Orient Mode Whenever you use the Component Placement dashboard to place a component or redefine placement constraints, a spin center for the active component is visible. You can manipulate the active component or the entire model by activating Orient Mode from the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar or from the Move panel of the Component Placement dashboard. 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open

2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Click Move on the Component Placement dashboard. The Move panel opens. 4. Do one of the following: o or View > Orientation > Orient Mode. The red spin center Click appears. Middle-click in the graphics window and drag to spin the assembly and the component. Right-click in the graphics window and choose Orient Object from the shortcut menu. The spin center changes to blue.

Middle-click in the graphics window and drag to spin the component being assembled. o Click Move. The Move panel opens. Select Orient Mode from the Motion Type list. Click the graphics window. The blue spin center Spin the component being placed. Right-click the graphics window to open the Orient mode shortcut menu. Note: For more information on Orient Mode, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Move Components Using Translate or Rotate 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open appears.

82

Assembly

2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Click Move on the Component Placement dashboard. The Move panel opens. 4. Select Translate or Rotate from the Motion Type list. 5. Click one of the following options and then follow the appropriate steps: Relative in view planeMoves the component parallel to the view plane. a. b. Type or select an incremental value in the Translation or Rotation box. You can also select Smooth to move the component smoothly. Click the graphics window. The component moves by the chosen increment each time you click. When you select Smooth, the component moves when you drag the pointer. Click again to place the component at the current location.

c.

Motion ReferenceMoves the component according to a selected motion reference in the assembly. Reference types allowed are: o o o o Two datum points or two vertices to create an imaginary line. An axis or an edge. The component can then be moved along the selected axis or edge. A coordinate system reference X, Y, or Z. A datum plane or surface to display Parallel and Normal options for component motion. a. Click Normal to move the component normal to the datum plane or surface. Click Parallel to move the component parallel to the datum plane or surface. Type or select an incremental value in the Translation or Rotation box. You can also select Smooth to move the component smoothly. Click the graphics window. The component moves by the chosen increment each time you click in the graphics window. When you select Smooth, the component moves when you drag the pointer. Click again to place the component at the current location. Middle-click to return the component to the position it was before being moved.

b. c.

d. e.

6. Continue to adjust placement as required. 7. To stop movement, click in the graphics window. To Move Components Using Adjust 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open

83

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Click Move on the Component Placement dashboard. The Move panel opens. 4. Select Adjust from the Motion Type list. 5. Click one of the following options and then follow the appropriate steps: Relative in view planeAdjusts the component position normal to the view plane. Select a surface on the component. The component automatically adjusts with the selected surface normal to the view plane. Motion ReferenceAdjusts the component position to a selected reference in the assembly. Reference types allowed are: o o o A datum point or vertex. An axis, edge, surface, or datum plane. A coordinate system direction X, Y, or Z. a. b. c. d. Select Parallel or Normal. Select Mate or Align as the constraint. Enter an Offset value if required. Select an Adjust Reference on the component. The component position adjusts automatically.

6. To stop movement, click in the graphics window.

About Assembling Components by Proximity Snapping

Finding the correct set of constraints to assemble a component can sometimes be tricky, even for an experienced user. The Snap function enables you to drag a component to its approximate location in the assembly. When you move the component in the assembly, a suggested placement appears as and highlighted for both references as long as the pointer remains within a specific proximity. Accept the placement by releasing the component, or refuse it by dragging the component beyond the region. By using the Snap functionality together with automatic constraint selection, you can define constraints easily. For example, when you assemble a bolt to a plate with many holes, snap and autoselection allow you to align and then mate or align the bolt to the plate with the mouse. You can select the axis of the bolt, slide it close to the axis of one of the holes on the plate, and then release the mouse button. The bolt snaps to the axis of the hole, and the constraint is established. Now that the bolt is aligned, position it for the next constraint. Select a surface on the bolt and slide the bolt along the axis of the first constraint until it is close to a reference to which it can mate or align. When you release the mouse button, the new constraint is established automatically.

84

Assembly

The snap reference table shows how the system defines best-guess constraint types to match the selected reference with another reference. User-Selected Reference Type Plane/Surface Axis Coordinate system Revolved surface Cylinder System-Matched Reference Type

Plane or surface for Mate or Align Axis (possibly linear edges) for Align Coordinate system for Align Revolved surface for Insert Revolved surface for Insert: cylinder, sphere, or plane for Tangent Revolved surface for Insert, cone for Mate No match No match

Cone Other edges/curves Other surfaces

Note: Snap is not available for: TangentFor surfaces other than planar, cylindrical, or spherical Point on surfaceFor nonplanar surfaces

To Set Proximity Tolerance Allowances

To adjust the proximity sensitivity for the snap function when assembling components, set the following configuration file options: Set comp_snap_dist_tolerance [0 to 1]. The snap tolerance is based on a fraction of the camera view. This maintains a consistent snap distance based on camera zoom. Set comp_snap_angle_tolerance to a value from 0 through 90. This sets the allowed angle between the normals of two planes or between two axes. The angle will be from 0 through 90, allowing for an almost completely orthogonal snap.

To Set Drag Preferences

1. Select Tools > Assembly Settings > Drag Preferences. The Drag Preferences dialog box opens. 2. In the Drag area, select any or all of the options: o o Dynamic Drag (default)Drags the component while maintaining existing constraints. Modify OffsetsModifies offset dimensions while dragging.

85

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o

Add OffsetsAdds offset dimensions to Mate or Align constraints initially created without offsets.

3. Use the following options to control snapping: o o o Select the Activate Snapping check box to enable snap during freeform movement. In the Distance text box, change the default value to 0.100000 (units are a fraction of the screen size). In the Angle text box, change the default value to 30.000000 (units are degrees).

4. Select an option in the Drag Center area to control the spin center or origin of movement: o o Model Center (default) Default Csys

Dragging Assembly Entities and Taking Snapshots

About Dragging and Taking Snapshots Use the Drag command to move assembly entities through an allowable range of motion to see how your assembly works in a specific configuration. The following entities can be selected to initiate a dragging movement: Edge Point Axis Datum plane Surface of a body that is not defined as ground

The selected entity is positioned as close as possible to the current pointer location while the rest of the assembly components stay connected to each other. Controlling the Assembly Movement To control how the assembly moves during the dragging operation, specify the following: Drag entity (point or body) Drag constraints Lock and unlock bodies Enable and disable connections

Note: Placement definitions and constraints affect the range of motion. 86

Assembly

Using Snapshots Use the Snapshots tab on the Drag dialog box to display a list of saved snapshots of the assembly in varied configurations. After you move the components to the desired location, you can save snapshots of your assembly in different positions and orientations. Snapshots capture the existing locked bodies, disabled connections, and geometric constraints. Note: You can use the Drag command and take snapshots while placing a component. Using Constraints Use the Constraints tab on the Drag dialog box to apply or remove constraints. After you apply a constraint, its name is added to the constraints list. You can turn the constraints on and off by selecting or clearing the check box next to the constraint. Use the shortcut menu to copy, cut, paste, or delete the constraint. Locking Assembly Bodies Assembly bodies can be fixed relative to a single lead body. The locked bodies will behave as if glued together, with no movement between them. The bodies do not need to be touching or adjacent to be locked together. To Drag Assembly Entities: Points and Bodies You can drag points and bodies. To Drag a Point 1. Click 2. Click . The Drag dialog box opens. and select a point to drag on a body within the current model. An

appears. During the dragging operation, the point you selected indicator follows the pointer's movement while maintaining connections. Note: You cannot select ground for point dragging. 3. Move the pointer. The selected point follows the pointer's location. 4. To complete the operation, take one of the following actions: o o o Click to accept the current body positions and begin dragging another body. Middle-click to end the current dragging operation (the body returns to the initial position) and start a new one. Right-click to end the dragging operation (the body returns to the initial position).

87

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Drag a Body When you drag a body, its position in the graphics window changes but its orientation remains fixed. If the assembly requires that a body be reoriented in conjunction with a change in position, the body will not move at all, since the model cannot reassemble in the new position. Should this happen, try using point dragging instead. 1. Click 2. Click . The Drag dialog box opens. and select a body from the current model.

3. Move the pointer. The selected body follows the pointer's location. 4. To complete the operation, take one of the following actions: o o o Click to accept the current body positions and begin dragging another body. Middle-click to quit the current dragging operation (the body returns to the initial position) and start a new one. Right-click to quit the dragging operation (the body returns to the initial position).

To Apply Constraints During a Dragging Operation 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens.

2. Click Snapshots and select a snapshot from the snapshots list. The name appears in the Current Snapshot text box. 3. Click the Constraints tab and then click one of the following options to create a temporary constraint: o Select two points, two lines, or two planes. The entities remain aligned during the dragging operation. Select two planes. The planes remain mated during the dragging operation. Select two planes to orient at an angle to each other. Select a motion axis to specify motion axis position. You can define multiple constraints for the same motion axis. However, only one can be enabled at any given time. Select bodies to be locked together. Select a connection. The connection is disabled.

o o

o o

4. Click or clear a constraint check box. This enables or disables the constraint.

88

Assembly

to assemble the model using your temporary constraints. Enter the 5. Click offset value for any mate or align constraints. Enter a value for angle or distance, if you have chosen an orientation constraint. 6. Drag a point or body. The specified constraints are applied. Note: To delete a selected constraint from the list, click .

To Specify the Position of a Motion Axis While Dragging 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens. .

2. On the Constraints tab of the Drag dialog box, click

3. Select a motion axis. The new constraint is added to the constraints list. The Value box displays the current value of the motion axis for the configuration in the graphics window. To edit the value, select the constraint, enter the desired position value, and press ENTER. You can specify a positive or negative value. 4. Take a snapshot of the assembly with the specified constraint to save the configuration. Note: Constraints are defined in the context of the snapshot. The snapshot contains all existing constraints. If a snapshot is not saved, the constraints are not saved. To Copy Constraints from One Snapshot to Another Note: The snapshot to be copied from and the snapshot to be pasted into must be on the Snapshot list in the Drag dialog box. 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens.

2. On the Snapshots tab, click the snapshot from which the constraint definition will be copied. 3. Click the Constraints tab and select the constraints to be copied. 4. Right-click and select Copy from the shortcut menu. 5. On the Snapshots tab, select the snapshot to which the constraints will be pasted. 6. On the Constraints tab, click Paste. Duplicate constraints are ignored from the paste operation. Therefore, if you paste constraints from snapshot A to snapshot A, nothing changes. To Orient Planes and Surfaces During a Dragging Operation 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens. . 89

2. On the Constraints tab, click

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Select two planes or surfaces in the assembly. 4. Enter an Offset value. To Lock a Body Prior to a Dragging Operation 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens. .

2. On the Constraints tab, click

3. Select the lead body, then select a set of follower bodies to be locked during the dragging operation. The follower bodies remain fixed relative to the lead body. Note: When the Drag dialog box is closed, all locks are removed. No bodies or connections will be locked when a new dragging session begins. To Capture a Snapshot 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens.

2. Click Snapshots and position the assembly entities as desired. 3. Click the Constraints tab to constrain the assembly entities. 4. Click to save the current configuration to the snapshot list.

5. Enter a new name in the Current Snapshot text box to replace the default snapshot name. To Make Snapshots Available as Exploded Views This procedure makes snapshots available as exploded views in Drawing mode. 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens. .A

2. To make the snapshots available, select one or more snapshots and click appears next to the snapshot name. visual indicator

3. To turn off snapshot availability at a later time, highlight the snapshot and click . Snapshots and Exploded Views The snapshot and the exploded state are linked. If you change the snapshot, the exploded state changes. When editing or deleting a snapshot in which the exploded state is in use, be aware of the following considerations: Any changes to the snapshot are reflected in the exploded state. The exploded state becomes unlinked when the snapshot is deleted. The exploded state is still available but is independent of the snapshot. If you then

90

Assembly

create a snapshot with the same name as the deleted snapshot, the exploded state associates itself with the new snapshot. To Use Snapshot Construction Use snapshot construction to create a snapshot that uses part positions from previously saved snapshots. 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens.

2. Select a target snapshot into which you want to paste a part position. 3. Click . The Snapshot Construction dialog box opens.

4. Select the snapshot from which to borrow part positions. The selected snapshot's configuration appears. 5. Select those parts to be copied. 6. Click OK. The position of the selected parts merges into the original snapshot. Note: Click on the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar to undo the position.

To Edit a Snapshot 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens.

2. On the Snapshot tab, select a saved snapshot. 3. Click . The snapshot configuration appears in the main window.

4. Enter a new name in the Current Snapshot text box to rename the snapshot. 5. Edit the assembly configuration by dragging it to a new configuration. 6. Click .

To Remove a Snapshot 1. Click . The Drag dialog box opens.

2. On the Snapshot tab, select a snapshot from the list. 3. Click .

To Exclude a Flexible Component from a Dragging Operation 1. In the Model Tree, right-click the flexible component to be excluded from the dragging operation. The shortcut menu appears. 2. Choose Edit Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears.

91

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Click Flexibility > Add Var Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. 4. To automatically exclude the component from dragging operations, create, or use an existing varied dimension that connects two bodies using the Distance method. a. b. Select Distance from the Methods list. The Measure dialog opens. Select two entities in the assembly that drive the value. Defining the dimensions varied item as the distance between two bodies, allows the flexible component to be updated to a new location during regeneration following a dragging operation.

. The flexible component is now excluded from the assembly during 5. Click dragging operations. 6. Click OK. Note: To include an excluded flexible component in the assembly click Varied Items dialog box. About Excluding Components from Dragging Operations A moveable or flexible component, such as springs, hinges, skeleton parts, or datums lock the referenced components to form one body during dragging operations. This eliminates the degrees of freedom required to move the assembly. Locked components can be excluded from the assembly for the duration of the dragging operation, enabling kinematic movement of the assembly. Regeneration of the assembly updates these components to the new position. Components can be reincluded after dragging operations. Components excluded form mechanism operations are moved to the Excluded Components folder in the Mechanism Design Tree. This folder contains all components excluded from the assembly, suppressed components, and those specifically excluded. To Exclude or Include a Component During Dragging Operations 1. Click Show > Mechanism Tree in the Model Tree. The Mechanism Tree appears. 2. In the Model Tree or the Mechanism Tree, right-click the component to be excluded or included during the dragging operation. The shortcut menu appears. 1. To exclude a component during a dragging operation, choose Exclude from Mechanism. The component is moved to the Excluded Components folder and will now be exclude from the assembly during dragging operations. Note: The excluded component is removed from the appropriate Body Contents folder in the Mechanism Tree. 2. To include a component during a dragging operation, choose Include to Mechanism. The component is returned to the appropriate Body Contents folder in the Mechanism Tree. in the

92

Assembly

Collision Detection About Collision Detection Settings Collision detection settings provide dynamic collision detection during the assembly process and during dragging operations. While you are placing a component, you can verify that its movement is not affected by an assembled component. Use collision detection in dragging operations to ensure that no components interfere with the movement of a selected component. Stop movement when a collision is detected, or continue moving the component and get a continuous collision view. Set the configuration option enable_advance_collision to yes to enable advanced options. To Set Collision Detection Settings Collision detection settings can be set in Assembly and Mechanism Design. 1. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Collision Detection Settings. The Collision Detection Settings dialog box opens. 2. Select General Settings to set the collision detection during drag operations. o o o No Collision DetectionPerforms no collision detection and enables a smooth dragging even in case of collision. Global Collision DetectionChecks for any kind of collision in the entire assembly and indicates it according to the option chosen. Partial Collision DetectionSpecifies the parts between which to check for collision. You are prompted you to select parts. Press and hold CTRL to select more than one part.

3. Select Include Quilts to include surfaces as a part of the collision check only during global or partial collision detection. 4. Select Optional Settings. These settings are only active for Partial or Global Collision when the enable_advance_collision configuration option is set to yes. o o o Stop When CollidingStops movement if there is a collision. Highlight Interfering VolumesHighlights the interfering entities. The default when the configuration option is set to no. Push Objects on CollisionShows the effect of the collision.

Note: In large assemblies with many bodies, the advanced collision detection options can cause very slow movement of the assembly. 5. Select Ring Message Bell When Colliding to sound a warning bell upon collision. This box is available only for the Stop When Colliding and Push Objects on Collision options. 6. Click OK.

93

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Using Component Interfaces About Automatic Placement of Components

Components are often assembled using the same constraint types and references. Automatic placement allows faster constraining of components and simultaneous placement of multiple instances of one component. Components can be placed in an assembly by automatically matching component interfaces to interfaces or geometry in the assembly. You can set a default interface to be used when assembling components or select one manually. Use the following methods to automatically place components in your model: Drag-and-Drop Automatic Placement You can drag components into your assembly from the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Preselect references before assembling a component or select a drop location within Pro/ENGINEER to help find the closest matching geometry. The autoplace_single_comp configuration option must be set to yes to enable automatic drag-and-drop placement of components: Automatic Placement Using Interfaces Define component interfaces to automate component placement. A component interface can be matched to an interface or to geometry in the assembly. Interfaces can be defined during component placement. Use assembly conditions or rules to ensure that the component is placed according to design intent.

About Component Interfaces

Component interfaces contain stored constraints or connections that are used to quickly place a component. After an interface is defined, it can be used whenever the component is placed in an assembly. Additional interface information, such as assembly conditions, can also be specified. Predefined component interface templates can be used to define connections (predefined constraint sets). The assembly references are then selected from a predefined list. Constraints of a predefined interface cannot be removed, disabled, or added, and the types cannot be changed, however, selected references can be replaced. You can create component interfaces in both Part mode and Assembly as features that appear in the Model Tree. There are three types of interfaces: PlacingInterfaces created in components used to place the component. They in the Model Tree Footer Interfaces folder. Placement are identified by constraints are visible whenever sets and constraints are displayed in the Model Tree. To move a placing interface from the Footer folder and make it a feature in the component, right-click the interface name and select Move From Footer from the shortcut menu. The interface is removed from the Footer folder and can be dragged to a different location in the Model Tree. To return the interface

94

Assembly

to the footer, right-click and choose Move To Footer. When a component has one or more placing interface, it will have a default interface. ReceivingInterfaces created in assemblies used to receive a component in the Model Tree. To move the assembly interface. They are identified by interface to the Footer folder, right-click and select Move to Footer from the shortcut menu. A receiving interface cannot be set as a default interface. EitherInterfaces created in components that can be used as placing or receiving interfaces. A component with this type of interface will have a default placement interface.

Component interfaces can be defined as follows: Configure a placement set using the Component Placement dashboard, right-click in the graphics window, and choose Save as Interface. Click Insert > Model Datum > Component Interface to open the Interface Definition dialog box. Define conditions or rules to specify an assembly reference.

You cannot use Interface to Geometry placement to automatically place components if the interface contains the following constraints: Edge on Srf Align constraint with an edge reference Pnt on Srf Pnt on Line Tangent

Configured interfaces are not visible in the graphics window. It is recommended to name interfaces that will be propagated to other places in the assembly. To set a feature note, right-click the interface in the Model Tree and choose Setup Note > Feature from the shortcut menu. The Note dialog box opens. For more information on Notes, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Note: You can place components with predefined flexibility using interfaces. Define flexibility in the Varied Items dialog box before using the interface to place the component.

To Define a Component Interface

1. In an open assembly, click Insert > Model Datum > Component Interface. The Component Interface dialog box opens. 2. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Interface Name box or the Properties tab Name box. 3. Accept the User Defined Interface Template.

95

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Choose a type from the Placement/Receiving Interface list: o o o EitherA receiving or placing interface ReceivingA receiving assembly interface PlacingA placing component interface

5. Select the reference surface, axis, or datum plane of the component for the first constraint. 6. Select additional component references. Each selected reference is added as a new constraint. 7. Use the tabs to define the current interface Properties and Criteria. 8. Click OK. The interface is displayed in the Model Tree footer in the Interfaces folder, or the receiving interface appears in the Model Tree.

To Define a Component Interface Template

1. In an open assembly, click Insert > Model Datum > Component Interface. The Component Interface Definition dialog box opens. 2. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Interface Name box. 3. Choose an Interface Template from the list to use a predefined placement set. 4. Choose a type from the Placement/Receiving Interface list: o o o EitherA receiving or placing interface ReceivingA receiving assembly interface PlacingA placing component interface

5. Select references for each of the predefined constraints. 6. Use the tabs to define the current interface Properties and Criteria. 7. Click OK. The interface is displayed in the Model Tree footer in the Interfaces folder, or the receiving interface appears in the Model Tree.

To Edit a Component Interface

Right-click the component interface in the Model Tree footer, and select one of the following options: DeleteDeletes the interface. GroupGroups the selected interfaces. RenameRenames the interface. Edit DefinitionOpens the Interface dialog box to edit the interface definition. Edit ReferencesOpens the Menu Manager to edit the interface references.

96

Assembly

PatternPatterns the interface. Setup Note > FeatureOpens the Note dialog box and insert a graphic feature note. InfoOpens the browser or the Reference Information window. Choose Feature or Model to display information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Choose Parent/Child to open the Reference Information Window. Move From/To FooterMoves the interface in the Model Tree to or from the footer. Edit ParametersEdits interface parameters.

Note: Both Copy and Paste commands are available for interfaces, although Paste Special is not.

To Place a Component Using Interface Matching

1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open

2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. To use an interface other than the default interface, select it from the Configured Interfaces list. 4. Click Options. The Options panel opens. Select all required options: o o o o Include temporary interfacesUse temporary interfaces. Include sub model interfacesUse interfaces in all submodels. Enable criteria mismatchPlace even when criteria do not match. Check interference of matchesMatch interfaces that do not interfere with other components.

5. Select an Interface Placement option and continue placement using Interface to Interface or Interface to Geometry. Interface-to-Interface Matching 1. By default Interface to Interface is selected from the Interface Placement list. 2. Click each interface occurrence in the assembly (identified by of the component is automatically placed in this location. ). An occurrence

3. To add an additional instance of the component, right-click in the graphics window and select New Location from the shortcut menu, or click New Location in the Placement panel.

97

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. To automatically place multiple occurrences of the component, follow the steps below: 5. Click Auto Place. The Auto Place dialog box opens. 6. Select an automatic placement option: o o Search for locations within the active assemblySearches for placement locations in the assembly using interface-to-interface matching. Select items to define the search scopeSearches for components or interfaces in the assembly placement search area. Define the area.

7. Click Find Now. The locations found appear in the locations found list. to move it to the 8. Select a location from the locations found list and click locations selected list. The component is placed in this location in the assembly. 9. Click Preferences to change the Max number of locations to show additional placement locations in the list. Interface-to-Geometry Matching 1. Select Interface to Geom from the Interface Placement list. 2. Select assembly geometry placement references. 3. To add an additional instance of the component, right-click the graphics window and select New Location from the shortcut menu, or select New Location in the Placement panel. 4. To automatically place multiple occurrences of the component, follow the steps below: 5. Click Auto Place. The Auto Place dialog box opens. 6. Select an automatic placement option: o o Screen PointSearches for the nearest available location. Click in the assembly. Select items to define the search scopeSearches for components or features in the assembly placement search area. Define the area.

7. Click Find Now. The locations found appear in the locations found list. to move it to the 8. Select a location from the locations found list and click locations selected list. The component is placed in this location in the assembly. 9. Click Preferences to change the Max number of locations to show additional placement locations in the list.

98

Assembly

For Both Interface Matching Options 1. Click Close to accept the placement definitions. 2. Click .

To Redefine Component Placement Using Interfaces

1. In the Model Tree, right-click the component to be redefined and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 2. Click .

3. Select a component interface from the Configured Interfaces dashboard list or double-click the interface name in the graphics window and select the interface name from the list. 4. Select an Interface Placement option. 5. Place the component using the selected interface. Click the See Also link To Place a Component Using Interface Matching. 6. Click .

To Save a Component Interface When Placing a Component

1. Click or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open dialog box opens.

2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Select required constraints and references. 4. Right-click in the graphics window and choose Save as Interface from the shortcut menu. The Save as Interface dialog box opens. 5. Accept the default name or enter a new one. Enter a description of the interface if desired. 6. Click OK. A new component interface is saved. Note: You can also right-click a component in the Model Tree and select Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. Select the required placement set in the Placement panel and proceed from step 4.

About Setting Rules for a Component Interface

An interface-to-interface match consists of two interfaces, that of the component and that of the assembly. Criteria, or match conditions, are set to reduce the number of possible matches and to capture design intent.

99

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Criteria are defined for: A specific placement referenceCriteria applies to the matching reference in the receiving component interface For the entire component interfaceCriteria applies to the entire receiving component interface.

Use the Rule Editor dialog box to set criteria for component and assembly interface match conditions: Look ForSearches for surfaces, datum planes, points, coordinate systems, axes, edges and vertices. Look BySearches for items that belong to components and features. AttributesSearches for items based on their name and criteria. HistorySearches for all items based on their creation order or ID. StatusSearches for items based on their layer status.

Use the Query Builder to combine rules when searching. Click Add New to add the newly defined rule to the Query Builder.

To Set Rules for Assembly Conditions

1. Click Insert > Model Datum > Component Interface, or right-click an interface in the Model Tree and select Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Interface dialog box opens. 2. Configure an interface, or select an existing interface and click Criteria > Edit Rules. The Rule Editor dialog box opens. 3. Specify rules for component interface conditions and click OK.

About Placement Preferences

Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Placement Preferences to set preferences for automatic component placement. The preferences you set apply to all models in the Pro/ENGINEER session. Your preferences also determine the options in the Component Placement dashboard, the search sequence for interfaces, and the maximum number of matches listed. Some of these options appear in the Options panel as well. A change made in the Placement Preference dialog box during the current session, overrides set configuration options. Select InterfaceSelect an option for placing components using interfaces: o DefaultUses the default interface. Select a Placement option: MultipleThe Component dashboard appears and the Auto Place dialog box is open.

100

Assembly

SingleThe Component Placement dashboard appears. o o From ListUses the interface selected from the list. The Component Placement dashboard appears. NoneDoes not use an interface for placement.

Note: When you select Default or From List, you can also select Use Temporary Interfaces. Temporary interfaces are automatically created based on previous assembly instructions. Auto Place SettingsSets the maximum number of matches listed. Enter a value for the Max Matches Number. Drag and DropSelect Auto Assemble Single Component to automatically use the closest placement to the drag-and-drop location. Advance Interface SearchClick to display and select all Advanced Search Options needed: o o o o o Check interference of matchesShows only matches that do not interfere with other components. Check criteria mismatchPlaces the component even when criteria do not match. Include sub model interfacesUses interfaces in all sub models. Ignore non-displayed ItemsIgnores all items that are not displayed in the graphics window. Default Search AreaSets the default search area as a percentage of the graphics window.

To Edit Placement References

1. In an open assembly, select the component to edit in the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. 2. Double-click a constraint tag, or right-click the active constraint tag and choose Edit References in the graphics window. The shortcut placement panel appears. 3. To change references, select a new reference on the assembly, the component, or both. The references automatically update. 4. To change the constraint type, select a reference, right-click, and choose Remove from the shortcut menu. Then select a different constraint from the list and select references as required. 5. Click 6. Click or press ESC to close the shortcut placement panel. to accept the new placement references.

101

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Placement Preference Configuration Options

Some placement preferences can be controlled by setting the following configuration options: autoplace_single_compPlace the component at the first position satisfying the interface definition. create_temp_interfacesCreate a temporary component interface and automatically place a component. comp_assesmble_with_interfaceAssemble a component multiple times using an interface.

About Placing a Component Using Temporary Interfaces

Whenever a component is placed in an assembly, the system "remembers" the placement set definition. When the same component is again placed in the assembly, you can place it using the temporary interface. To create a new temporary interface, activate temporary interface placement and place the component without using a previously defined interface. The number of temporary interfaces available is equal to the number of placement definitions for the component in the assembly. Temporary interfaces are saved with the assembly and are only available for component placement in the assembly in which they were defined. Temporary interface names cannot be changed. Note: Best practice dictates the configuration of interfaces in the component before component placement. Placement definition criteria can then be more rigidly controlled and a more efficient workflow created. Temporary interfaces do not convey design intent.

To Activate Temporary Interface Placement

1. In an open assembly, click Tools > Assembly Settings > Placement Preferences. The Placement Preferences dialog box opens. 2. Choose From List as the Select Interface option. 3. Select Use Temporary Interfaces. 4. Click OK.

102

Assembly

Nested Interfaces
About Nested Interfaces A nested interface uses previously defined interfaces as references. This allows the propagation of engineering intent and criteria to more than one level of the assembly. Use nested interfaces to: Customize placement optionsA nested interface can contain connections. Each subinterface is a set that the user can enable or disable at will. Use interfaces designed in submodelsNested interfaces at the assembly level can contain subinterfaces from different, lower levels in the assembly. Define criteria to propagate engineering senseCriteria defined for an interface are propagated up in to the assembly hierarchy when the interface is included in a nested interface.

An interface cannot be selected twice as a reference for a nested interface, although it can be selected for more than one nested interface. Conflicting criteria from subinterfaces is ignored. Assembly-level nested interfaces can include subinterfaces from any assembly level. Interface hierarchy is presented in the Model Tree when placement sets are displayed. To Define a Nested Interface 1. In an open assembly, click Insert > Model Datum > Component Interface. The Component Interface dialog box opens. 2. Select Nested from the Constraint Type list. A table appears on the Placement tab. The name of the constraint changes to Nested followed by a number. 3. Select an interface from the Model Tree footer. The reference table displays the geometric references for the selected interface. 4. Add additional references to the nested interface. Only interfaces can be selected as references. 5. Click .

About Placing a Component with a Nested Interface Component placement using a nested interface is similar to placing a component using a regular interface. Each subinterface with matching assembly geometry is considered a set. The nested interface is placed in the assembly by selecting a reference type: Interface to geometry matchingGeometry references in subinterfaces are matched to geometry references in the assembly.

103

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Interface to interface matchingGeometry references in the subinterfaces are matched to geometry references in the assembly interface. When a connection is defined, the subinterfaces must match the assembly interface for a connection to be configured.

Note: A subinterface placement constraint set inherits the name of the subinterface. When the component subinterface and the assembly interface have names, the set inherits the component subinterface name.

Working with Assembly Components About Working with Assembly Components

Pro/ENGINEER treats components in an assembly as it treats features in a part. Therefore, you can use the component operations commands in Assembly Design the way you use feature operations commands in Part mode. Some component operations are accessed through the Edit > Component Operations command while others are accessed by right-clicking the component on the Model Tree and making a selection from the shortcut menu. Component operations include the following tasks: Copying Grouping Deleting Suppressing, freezing, and resuming Rerouting references Reordering Redefining placement constraints Defining flexibility Patterning Replacing

To Create a Group of Components and Features

1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Select components and features from the Model Tree or graphics window, rightclick, and choose Group from the shortcut menu. The selected components and features are grouped. Note: The Group command can also be accessed by clicking Edit > Component Operations > Group.

104

Assembly

To Place an Assembly User-Defined Feature

Note: UDFs created in Assembly cannot be used in Part mode and vice versa. 1. Create a UDF in an assembly. 2. Click Insert > User-Defined Feature. The Open dialog box opens. 3. Select the created UDF group file and click Open. The Insert User-Defined Feature dialog box opens. Select UDF settings as follows: o Make features dependent on dimensions of UDFToggles the dependency of the copied group on changes to feature dimensions specified in the UDF file. Advanced reference configurationPlaces the UDF group by mapping references. Clear this check box to manually define feature placement using the feature redefinition interface. Features included in the group are redefined one by one. View source modelRetrieves and display the UDF source (reference) model in a separate window.

4. Click OK. The User Defined Feature Placement dialog box opens to the Placement tab. 5. Select a reference from the References of Original Features list. The reference is highlighted in the reference model window. 6. Select a matching reference for the user-defined feature from the Model Tree or graphics window. The selected item appears in the reference collector. 7. Repeat the previous two steps for all the references on the References of Original Features list. 5. Depending on the features in the UDF, specify datum plane directions, silhouette edges, and hole location. . The GRP PLACE menu appears. Select one of the following 8. Click commands: o o o o RedefineChange UDF references. Show ResultPreview created geometry. InfoView UDF information window. DoneConfirm group placement.

To Delete a Component from an Assembly

1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Select a component from the Model Tree or the model itself.

105

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Click Edit > Delete and choose one of the following options: o o o DeleteDeletes the component and its children from the assembly. Delete to End of ModelRemoves the component and all the components that follow it in the active assembly. Delete Unrelated ItemsRemoves all components in the active assembly except the selected component and its parents.

Note: You can also right-click the component in the Model Tree and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

To Delete Pattern Member Components

Right-click a pattern feature on the Model Tree and select Delete Pattern from the shortcut menu. All instances of a patterned component except the pattern leader and the pattern definition are removed.

To Insert a Component in the Regeneration List

To insert a component before another component in the active assembly, drag Insert Here in the Model Tree to the desired location and add the new component.

To Reorder Components in an Assembly

You can reorder components in two ways: Select a component in the Model Tree and drag it into another place in the Model Tree. Click Edit > Component Operations > Reorder and follow the instructions in the message area.

To Reroute Placement References

1. Retrieve an assembly and select a component from the graphics window or Model Tree. 2. Click Edit > Reference. Alternatively, select the component in the Model Tree, right-click, and choose Edit References from the shortcut menu. The REROUTE REFS menu appears. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to roll back the model. 3. Click YES or NO. The REROUTE menu appears. Alternate reference to reroute is the default. o o If you accept Alternate, select an alternate reference to reroute. If you click Same Ref, you are allowed to retain the original references.

4. Click Done on the REROUTE menu. The model regenerates automatically.

106

Assembly

About Suppressed Components

Suppressing a component temporarily removes it from the model, both physically and visually. When you retrieve an assembly, any suppressed component is not retrieved. This process saves time and memory when working with large assemblies. Suppressed components do not appear in mass properties and cross sections, and you cannot store them (using the Save As or Backup commands). Unlike deleted components, suppressed components can be restored by using the Resume command.

About Handling Children of Suppressed Components

Children of suppressed components can be: Suppressed and resumed when the parent component is resumed. Suspended temporarily until you assign new references when you quit the Children Handling dialog box. Frozen in their original location until they can be regenerated successfully, either by resuming the parent, redefining the placement, or rerouting the child.

When a child of a suppressed component is a member of a group, the entire group, or only the group members affected, can be suppressed or frozen.

To Suppress Components and Assembly Features

1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Select a component from the Model Tree or graphics window. 3. Click Edit > Suppress and choose one of the following commands from the menu: o o o SuppressSuppresses the selected component and its children. Suppress to End of ModelSuppresses the selected component and all the components that follow it in the active assembly. Suppress Unrelated ItemsSuppresses all components in the active assembly except the selected component and its parents.

Note: You can also select the component in the Model Tree, right-click, and choose Suppress from the shortcut menu. 4. Click OK to confirm the action.

To Handle Children of Suppressed Components

1. Retrieve an assembly and select a component that has children. 2. Right-click and choose Suppress from the shortcut menu. The Suppress dialog box opens. 3. Click Options. The Children Handling dialog box opens. 107

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Click Local or External to view the list of local and external children. 5. Clear the Suppress entire groups check box to select an operation for individual group members affected by suppressing the parent. 6. Select a child object, then select an option from the Status list: o o o Suppress Suspend Freeze

7. Repeat step 6 for all the objects. 8. Click OK. Note: Frozen components are identified by in the Model Tree.

To Resume Components and Assembly Features

1. Suppress a component in an assembly. 2. Select a suppressed component from the Model Tree. 3. Click Edit > Resume and choose one of the following commands: o o o ResumeResumes the selected component in the assembly. Resume Last SetResumes the last suppressed component. Resume AllResumes all suppressed components and features.

Note: You can also select the component in the Model Tree, right-click, and choose Resume from the shortcut menu.

Displaying Component Annotations

Use the Tools > Assembly Settings > Display All Annotations command to set the display of component annotations in the assembly. When the command is activated, all annotations are displayed. Note: By default the system displays the annotations of the active assembly component only. The command setting is applicable only for the current session. To display all component annotations when a new Pro/ENGINEER session is started, set the visible_annotations_scope configuration option to all. The configuration option setting does not impact the command setting and vice versa.

108

Assembly

Redefining Component Placement Constraints

About Redefining Placement Constraint Sets After you place a component, you can redefine its placement constraints. Using the Component Placement dashboard, you can add or remove constraints for the active component, and redefine any of its constraints in the following ways: Change the following constraint types to the others in this list: o o o Align Mate Orient

Reset an Align constraint to forced or unforced Flip sides Modify the offset value Specify new assembly references Specify new component references Switch between allowing and disallowing system assumptions

When redefining component placement, you can select datums or make them on the fly, as is the case when you are placing a component. When you use the Default constraint, the system places the component at the assembly origin. Use the Fix constraint to fix the current location of the component that was moved or packaged. The system fully constrains the packaged component in its current location. You can redefine components in a simplified representation that have not been substituted or excluded in the current representation. To Redefine Component Constraint Sets 1. Select the desired component from the Model Tree or main window and click Edit > Definition or right-click the assembly or component in the Model Tree and click Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 2. Select one of the constraints listed in the Navigation and Collection area of the Placement panel. For each constraint, you can redefine any of the following options: o Constraint TypeChanges the constraint type to any reasonable type for the assembly. Note: You can only change the type for Align or Mate.

109

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o

Assembly ReferenceSpecifies a new assembly reference (for example, changes the surface on the assembly to which you are going to align the component). Component ReferenceSpecifies a new component reference for a placed component (for example, changes which surface on the component you are going to align with the assembly).

3. You can select Remove or Add at any time: o To delete a placement constraint for the component, select one of the constraints listed and click Remove. The system deletes the selected constraint from the current list and updates the message in the Placement Status area. You may need to add a new constraint. o The Retr Refs option appears when you redefine a component in a simplified representation, and that component depends on components that are not in the simplified representation. Click Retr Refs to retrieve any other components that define the location of the component. To add a new constraint to the current list, click Add. Select a type of constraint from the Constraint Type list. Select a reference on the component and a reference on the assembly, in either order, to define a placement constraint. Click See Also for detailed information. .

4. After you redefine the constraints for the active component, click

NOTE: You can also use the Move options, but if the component has children, you must fully constrain the component before exiting the interface.

Assembly Operations
Working with Assembly Features About Assembly Features Creating assembly features is like creating part features with certain differences and restrictions. You can create assembly features such as datum planes, axes and points, curves, and coordinate systems, or assembly features that remove material such as holes, cuts, and slots. These features belong to the assembly and not to a part. Assembly features display when the assembly is retrieved. You cannot create a feature that adds material to the assembly. Assembly datums are particularly useful for the following: Creating assembly cross-sectional views Creating assembly zones Placing components at an offset or angle

110

Assembly

Creating a reference datum plane that intersects more than one component

Pro/ENGINEER labels assembly datum features as ADTM# (for example, ADTM1, ADTM2, ADTM3), ACSYS#, APNT#, and so on. When you write relations using an assembly datum plane, the system stores them with the assembly. You can create assembly datum features at any time before assembling the first part. You can also create a new coordinate system and a set of three orthogonal datum planes for the assembly. You can create assembly features other than datum features, such as: Features that remove material (hole, cut, slot) Pipe features Sketched cosmetic features User-defined features

Perform feature and component operations using the Edit or shortcut menu. Additional commands are in the Edit > Feature Operations and Edit > Component Operations menu. Note: The Copy From command is not available. To Create an Assembly Feature 1. Open or activate an assembly. 2. Select a feature from the Insert or Edit menus or use the feature toolbar. 3. Define the feature. These may be: o o o Pipe and cosmetic features Features that remove material Datum features Note: When you create assembly datum curves at the intersection of surfaces, you must select assembly surfaces or features. You cannot reference part surfaces. o User-defined features that do not add material

To Edit an Assembly Feature 1. Select the feature in the in the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The feature dialog box opens or the dashboard appears. 2. Edit the feature and click OK or .

111

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Copy an Assembly Feature 1. Click Edit > Feature Operations > Copy. The COPY FEATURE menu appears. 2. Choose an option: o o o o New RefsSelects new references to copy the feature. Same RefsUses the same references to copy the feature. MirrorMirrors the feature. MoveSpecifies whether you want to translate or rotate the new copy of the feature relative to the original.

3. Choose a feature selection method: o o o SelectCopies the selected feature. FromDifModelCopies the feature from a different model. FromDifVersCopies the feature from a different version.

4. Choose the type of copy: o o IndependentSection and dimensions of the copied feature are independent. DependentSection and dimensions of the copied feature are dependent.

5. Click Done. The Select Feature menu appears. Choose an option: o o o SelectSelects a feature in the graphics window. LayerSelects features by layer. RangeSelects features by specifying a range of feature numbers.

6. Click Done. The Group Elements dialog box opens. 7. Select the Group Varied Item to be changed from the Menu Manager. 8. Click Done. You are prompted to enter a new varied item value. 9. Enter the value and click o o o o . You are prompted to choose a reference type:

AlternateReplaces the reference with an alternate reference. SameUses the original reference. The Intersected Comps dialog box opens. Select the components the copied feature will intersect. SkipSkips the selection of a reference. Ref InfoOpens the user defined feature INFORMATION WINDOW.

10. Click OK.

112

Assembly

About Copying Assembly Features You can copy features in Assembly in the same way as in Part mode, with the following exceptions: The All Feat option is not available. You can create a dependent or independent copy of an assembly feature. The copied feature is defined as a group.

Note: For more information, search for Copy in the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. About Skeleton Model Geometry and Assembly Features Skeleton model geometry is different from regular assembly geometry and is not affected by assembly-level features. Assembly features such as cuts and holes do not intersect skeleton model geometry. To intersect a skeleton model with a cut, select the skeleton model and click Edit > Activate or right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Activate from the shortcut menu, then create the cut in the skeleton model. Using Intersected Components About Intersected Components When you create an assembly feature that removes material, it intersects at least one assembly component. The intersecting feature is visible in the Model Tree as an assembly feature and as a feature of each of the intersected components. Intersected component instances are invisible in Family Tables, the BOM, and in Integrate Difference tables when you use the system-generated names. They are, however, visible in Family Tables, the BOM, and Integrate Difference tables when you give them a specific name. Both the original and new instance models are in memory while the assembly feature is present. Use commands in the Intersected Comps dialog box to manipulate component instance assignments: Auto Update IntrsctsAutomatically updates the intersections. AutoAddAutomatically selects components to intersect. RemoveRemoves the selected intersected components. InfoDisplays the model information for the current assembly level. LevelSelects the visibility level for feature intersections from the list. Show Feature Properties in Sub-ModelsCopies features to the sub-model (read only).

113

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Right-click in the Intersected Comps dialog box to access the shortcut menu commands: Remove Information Add Instance Part Level or Top Level

About the Intersect Panel User Interface Creating a feature in an assembly is similar to creating one in a part. Note that the Remove Material button in the feature dashboard is depressed and grayed out, you cannot add material in an assembly. Click the Intersect panel on the feature dashboard to set visibility options when creating the feature. The Automatic Update box is checked by default. This means that: Intersections are automatically updated on regeneration. All components added to the assembly before the assembly feature will automatically be intersected on regeneration as well. No components are removed from the list of intersected components and components assembled after the intersecting feature are not added.

By default, all components appear in the Intersected Models list. Clear the Automatic Update box to manually remove components from the list, or change the display level of a component. The Default Display Level options allow you to set the visibility level of parts intersected by the feature when you add them to the Intersected Models list: Part LevelMakes the new feature visible wherever this version of the part is used, even outside the current assembly. This is similar to creating a feature in an active part in an assembly. Top LevelDisplays the feature only at the top-level assembly and creates instances of intersected parts. Does not create external references.

Click Add Intersected Models to automatically add components with the same visibility level to the list. The visibility level is displayed in the Intersected Models List. If you rename intersected component instances in the Model Tree, you cannot use Add Intersected Models and Automatic Update when you edit the definition of the feature.

114

Assembly

About Intersection Visibility Using the default options to create a feature that removes material, stores all feature information in the top-level assembly. You can specify the level at which the intersection is visible. The information used to create assembly feature intersection geometry is stored at whichever level the assembly feature intersection appears as follows: When you display the intersection at the assembly level, the assembly feature is only visible when you are in that assembly (the component is not affected). When you display the intersection at the component level, the assembly feature is visible at that level and all levels above it.

The visibility level and intersected components list can be edited after the feature is created by selecting the feature in the Model Tree, right-clicking and choosing Intersect from the shortcut menu, or clicking Edit > Feature Operations > Intersect. When you display the assembly feature in a lower-level assembly, the system creates an external reference in the lower-level assembly to the top-level assembly. To Add an Intersected Component 1. In an open assembly with intersected components, right-click the feature that removes material in the Model Tree and choose Intersect from the shortcut menu. You can also activate an intersected component and click Edit > Feature Operations > Intersect. The Intersected Comps dialog box opens. 2. Manually select components from the Model Tree or the graphics window to add to the Model List. Note: Use the Remove command to remove components from the Intersected Comps dialog box.

115

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Example: Selecting Parts to Intersect The following figure is an example of a feature that intersects all parts in the assembly and selected parts in the same assembly.

1. 2.

The feature intersects all parts of the assembly. The feature intersects selected parts.

To Display Intersected Components 1. Click Edit > Feature Operations > Intersect and select an assembly feature, or select the feature in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Intersect from the shortcut menu. The Intersected Comps dialog box opens. 2. Click a component from the Model List to highlight it in the graphics window. To Specify Feature Visibility Levels 1. Open an assembly with an assembly feature. 2. Right-click the assembly feature that removes material in the Model Tree and choose Intersect from the shortcut menu or click Edit > Feature Operations > Intersect. The Intersected Comps dialog box opens. 3. Clear the Auto Update Intrscts box. Note: When Auto Update Intrscts is selected, all components added to the assembly before the feature are automatically intersected. Intersections are automatically updated upon regeneration, and you must regenerate the assembly to view results. A component added to the assembly after the feature will not be intersected by the feature even when Auto Update Interscts is selected.

116

Assembly

4. Choose a visibility Level: o o Part LevelMakes the new feature visible wherever this version of the part is used, even outside the current assembly. Top LevelDisplays the feature only at the top-level assembly and creates instances of intersected parts. Does not create external references.

Note: The visibility level is shown as parts are added to the Model List. to manually add parts to the Model List. Each model is added with the 5. Click current visibility level. o o o o To change the level of display, right-click the component in the Model List and choose the level from the shortcut menu. Click AutoAdd to automatically add all components intersected by the feature. All automatically added components have the same visibility level. Click Remove to remove a selected component from the Model List. Click Info to display the browser information window.

To Retrieve and Reintersect Assemblies Created before Pro/ENGINEER 2001 Assemblies with intersected components created before Pro/ENGINEER 2001 may require updates when retrieved. 1. Set the configuration file option allow_redo_intersections to yes. 2. Click Edit > Feature Operations > ReIntersect. The RE INTR menu opens. 3. Choose one of the following options: o o o AllUpdates intersections of all assembly features in the assembly. Sel PartUpdates intersections of all assembly features intersecting selected parts. InfoDisplays an information window listing all assembly features in the assembly.

4. Choose All or Sel Part to update the assembly. 5. Select the assembly or a component. Before reintersecting assemblies, the system warns you that children not in session will fail regeneration. It prompts you to retrieve all models that reference the geometry created by the assembly feature into session. 6. If all children are not in session, choose Cancel from the CONFIRMATION menu, retrieve the children that are not in session, and return to Step 1. If all children are in session, choose Confirm. All intersections are updated. If remnants of assembly feature intersections exist, the system displays another information window, advising that they exist. The message describes possible 117

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

causes and lists the particular assemblies that have intersection remnants. If you choose Cancel, the system does not remove remnants. Some of the intersections may not be updated to the current style. Choose Confirm to remove the remnants. 7. Once the intersections have been updated, save the assembly. To Remove Intersected Components 1. Click Edit > Feature Operations > Intersect and then select an assembly feature. You can also select the feature in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Intersect from the shortcut menu. The Intersected Comps dialog box opens. 2. Select a model in the Model List, right-click, and choose Remove from the shortcut menu or click Remove. Multiple models can be selected for removal from the list. o o selects all models in the list. clears the selection of all models in the list.

About Assembly Features in Part Assembly features that intersect parts can be set as visible at the part level. When set such, the feature is considered to be a part feature as well. Suppressing an assembly feature in Part mode, does not affect it in the parent assembly. Deleting the feature in Part mode removes the intersection in the part at the assembly level. You can modify the dimensions of the parent feature in Part mode provided the parent assembly is in session. Regeneration only updates the current part. To update other parts intersected by the feature, regenerate them individually or regenerate the assembly. Features in an intersected part should not directly or indirectly reference an assembly cut. Modifying Assemblies About Activating a Component in an Assembly New features or other model data can be created for a component in an assembly. Select the component from the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click and choose Activate from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Activate. In the Model Tree an active component is indicated by: Activated part Activated subassembly

In an active component you can add or redefine features, edit relations and Family Tables, and perform some setup actions. Operations that can be performed on other

118

Assembly

components in the assembly are limited to Edit, Hide, Unhide, and Info. The inactive assembly components become grey and transparent. After you have modified the component, you must activate the main assembly to continue working. To Activate a Component 1. In an open assembly, select a component in the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click and choose Activate from the shortcut menu. 2. Use the shortcut menu or Edit Feature toolbar to edit the active component. To Set Transparency of Inactive Assembly Components When an assembly component is active, other shaded assembly components appear transparent grey to indicate that they are inactive. 1. Set a value between 0 and 100 for the style_state_transparency configuration option. 2. Click View > Display Settings > Model Display. The Model Display dialog box opens. 3. Click Shade. 4. Click the Transparency check box. Note: When you clear the check box, the inactive components are grey. 5. Select the type of transparency Stippled or Blended. 6. Click OK. To Edit Dimensions in an Assembly 1. In an open assembly, select the component or feature in the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click, and choose Edit from the shortcut menu. The dimensions appear. For an active component, you can also double-click a feature to edit dimensions. 2. Right-click the dimension to edit and choose Value from the shortcut menu, or double-click the dimension. The Value box opens. 3. Change the value and press ENTER. To Display Default Dimensional Tolerances 1. In an open assembly, do one of the following operations: o o Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens. Set the tol_display configuration file option to yes. Click View > Display Settings > Model Display. The Model Display dialog box opens. On the General tab, select Dimension Tolerances.

119

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o

Click Tools > Environment. The Environment dialog box opens. Select Dimension Tolerances.

2. Click OK. To Edit Default Dimensional Tolerances To modify assembly tolerance values: 1. In an open assembly, display default dimension tolerances for the top-level assembly. 2. Right-click a feature in the Model Tree and choose Edit from the shortcut menu. The feature dimensions are displayed, including tolerances. 3. Select a tolerance from the lower-right corner of the graphics window and enter a new value. To modify component tolerance values: 1. In an open assembly, select a component in the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click and choose Activate from the shortcut menu. The tolerance values displayed are for the selected component. 2. Right-click a feature in the Model Tree and choose Edit from the shortcut menu, or double-click a feature in the graphics window. Feature dimensions display including tolerances. 3. Select a tolerance from the display of tolerance values in the lower right corner of the graphics window and enter a new value. When you exit from this menu, or when accessed form other operations such as Redefine, Suppress, or Resume, the tolerance values switch back to those of the assembly level. The modified values exist, but the values displayed are those of the assembly level. About Assembly and Component Default Dimensional Tolerances You can display and modify default dimensional tolerances for an assembly or for a component in Assembly. The default dimensional tolerances are displayed below the model in the graphics window. All configuration file options for default values for tolerances apply to a part, an assembly, or a component being modified in the context of an assembly. To Set Relative Accuracy in an Assembly 1. In an open assembly, click Edit > Setup. The ASSEM SETUP menu appears. 2. Click Accuracy. When the configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy is set to no, the system displays the current relative accuracy of the active model and prompts you to change it. When the configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy is set to yes, the ACCURACY menu appears. Choose Relative. 120

Assembly

3. The system displays the current relative accuracy of the active model and prompts you to change it. 4. Enter a value for relative accuracy. The system informs you that changing accuracy causes full regeneration and prompts you to continue. 5. Click Yes (the default). If you click No, the modification does not take effect. Accept the current value, or press ESC to return to the ACCURACY menu without changing the value. Choose Quit to return to the ASSEM SETUP menu whenever the system prompt is inactive. To Set Absolute Accuracy in an Assembly 1. In an open assembly, click Edit > Setup. The ASSEM SETUP menu appears. Note: The configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy must be set to yes to enable modification of absolute accuracy in Assembly. 2. Click Accuracy. Relative is active by default the first time you access the ACCURACY menu for a model. Otherwise, the accuracy type you used last is active. If Relative is active, press ESC. 3. Choose Absolute. The ABS ACCURACY menu appears. Set the value in one of two ways: Set absolute accuracy for the assembly by assigning a value: o Choose Enter Value. The system displays the current absolute accuracy value and default units [nnnn units] and prompts you to enter a value. If absolute accuracy has not been defined, the system displays the current relative accuracy. o Enter a value for absolute assembly accuracy in default units. The system informs you that changing accuracy causes full regeneration and asks if you want to continue. Click Yes (default). If you click No, the modification does not take effect.

o Or

Set absolute accuracy for the assembly or to a specified component by assigning a value: o o o Choose Select Model. The Open dialog box opens. The top assembly and all components in the assembly are displayed. Select the assembly or a component. The system displays the current accuracy value of the specified component and prompts you to accept it. Click Yes (default). The system informs you that changing accuracy causes full regeneration and prompts you to continue. If you click No, the modification does not take effect.

121

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Accept the current value or press ESC to return to the ACCURACY menu without changing the value. Choose Quit to return to the ASSEM SETUP menu whenever the system prompt is inactive. Note: Selecting a part or assembly as a source for the absolute accuracy setting does not create dependency between the two models. About Modifying Accuracy Settings in Assembly In Pro/ENGINEER you can modify accuracy settings in Assembly, Part, and Manufacturing modes. When geometry is copied from one part to another with different absolute accuracy, the source geometry can be invalid for the destination part. For more information about modifying part accuracy settings, search the Part functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. An assembly can have an accuracy setting that is incompatible with that of a part. For example, an assembly hole or cut feature may not display because the accuracy settings of intersected parts are too high. When assembly accuracy and part accuracy differ, you can easily reset accuracy settings at the assembly level. The configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy must be set to yes to enable modification of absolute accuracy in Assembly mode. When the configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy is set to no, you can only modify relative accuracy. The system displays the current relative accuracy of the active model and prompts you to change it. The default setting is 0.0012. When the configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy is set to yes, the ACCURACY menu appears, containing the Relative and Absolute commands. To Edit a Part Feature 1. In an open assembly, select the part in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Activate from the shortcut menu or click Edit > Activate to edit, create, delete, and suppress part features. The Copy From command is not available. 2. Perform one or more of the following operations: o o Click Insert and choose a feature from the menu or use the feature toolbar to add a feature to the part. Right-click a part feature in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to modify the feature dimensions. You can also double-click a feature in the active part to display its dimensions. Right-click the part in the Model Tree and choose Regenerate from the shortcut menu, or click Regenerate. o o , select a part feature, and click Edit >

Tools > Reference ControlControls creation of external references (displays the Reference Control dialog box). Info > Global Reference ViewerOpens the Global Reference Viewer dialog box and displays references and dependencies.

122

Assembly

Note: When you create part features at the assembly level, be careful not to create unwanted parent/child relationships between the part and the assembly. To Edit a Skeleton Model 1. Open an assembly with a skeleton model. 2. Select the skeleton model in the Model Tree or graphics window and click Edit > Activate or choose Activate from the shortcut menu. 3. To open the skeleton model in a separate window, right-click it in the Model Tree and choose Open from the shortcut menu. Note: Several commonly used part commands are not available for skeleton models. You cannot copy a skeleton model, create a group or user-defined feature with a skeleton as one of its members, or perform merge and cut operations. 4. Perform one or more of the following procedures and proceed as you would for any component: o o To add a featureChoose a feature from the Insert menu, or click a feature toolbar button. To edit dimensionsRight-click a skeleton feature in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Edit from the shortcut menu, or double-click a feature of the active skeleton model. To regenerateSelect the skeleton model in the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click and choose Regenerate from the shortcut menu, click , or click Edit > Regenerate. o o To create referencesClick Tools > Relations. The Reference Control dialog box opens. To display the SKEL SETUP menuClick Edit > Setup. Choose one of the following commands: MaterialCreates or modifies material data (opens the Material dialog box). UnitsOpens the Units Manager dialog box. Change the System of Units for the skeleton model. NameDisplays the NAME SETUP menu to specify a name for the skeleton model. NotesDisplays the MDL NOTES menu to manage notes associated with the skeleton model. SymbolDisplays a symbol or set a custom symbol for a feature. Mass PropsOpens the Setup Mass Properties dialog box. DimensionCreates or deletes dimensions. 123

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Ref DimCreates, deletes, sets the view, or shows reference dimensions by edge or surface. Geom TolSpecifies a geometric tolerance for a surface or feature. DeclareOpens the menu to declare or undeclare layers, tables, or names or to list those declared. Tol SetupSpecifies tolerances. Ref ControlOpens the Reference Control dialog box for creation and control of external references. DesignateOpens the Designate dialog box to designate parameter tables, attributes, and objects for mass properties. o o Tools > ProgramAccesses Pro/PROGRAM. Tools > ParametersOpens the Parameters dialog box.

Restructuring Components To Restructure a Component 1. Click Edit > Restructure. The RESTRUCTURE menu appears. When you choose Restructure, the Model Tree displays the assembly hierarchical tree structure, enabling you to restructure the assembly in the Model Tree without changing the appearance of the assembly in the main window. 2. Click Move Comp and select a component or subassembly to move. The system tags the selected member as MOVING in the Restructure Status column of the Model Tree. 3. Choose Select Target. In the Model Tree, select an assembly to which you want to move the selected component. The selected component moves to the designated assembly. You can choose Undo Last to undo the last move. 4. Click OK, and Done. About Restructuring Assembly Components Use the Edit > Restructure command to modify assembly groupings and add flexibility to the assembly design process. Restructure an assembly to reorganize components from one subassembly to another or to create a new assembly entity. You can move components from one subassembly to another, or from the top-level assembly to a subassembly, or vice versa. However, the top-level assembly must be in session to properly regenerate a restructured subassembly, otherwise components may have to be frozen. After you restructure a subassembly, you can add to it and modify it.

124

Assembly

A new, empty subassembly can be created and components restructured to this subassembly. You can then create a drawing of the subassembly and list the components in a table for a BOM. However, the first time you retrieve the subassembly without the top-level assembly, you must freeze all the components. The following restrictions apply to restructuring assembly components: You cannot select the first component of a subassembly or an assembly to restructure. When restructuring, if both the original component and the target assembly are members of the same level assembly, you must move the children of the original component as well. You cannot restructure components that are part of a pattern. If an assembly contains multiple copies of the same subassembly, you cannot restructure the components of that subassembly. You cannot restructure an assembly if multiple occurrences of the original assembly exist.

Regenerating Parts and Assemblies About Regenerating Parts Modified in Assembly Parts that are modified in an assembly must be regenerated. In large assemblies, it is faster to select individual parts to regenerate rather than to search for and regenerate all modified parts in the assembly. A part intersected by an assembly feature and modified in a separate Pro/ENGINEER session must be regenerated in the assembly for the modifications to be visible in the assembly. Before regenerating a part with external references, the system regenerates the external references and then uses the updated values for the part. To Regenerate Selected Parts 1. Right-click the assembly in the Model Tree and choose Custom Regenerate from the shortcut menu or click opens. 2. Select an option: o o o RegenerateRegenerates the selected features or components. Skip RegenDoes not regenerate the selected features or components. HighlightHighlights the selected features or components in the graphics window. This option facilitates selecting features and components for regeneration, but it must be selected for regeneration. . The Regeneration Manager dialog box

125

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Select the components and features to regenerate. When you select a component to regenerate, all features added or modified also are automatically selected for regeneration and vice versa. 4. Click OK. To Regenerate All Changed Parts 1. Right-click the assembly in the Model Tree and choose Regenerate from the . If assembly features have been added, the Confirm shortcut menu or click Update dialog box opens. 2. Click an option: o o o YesRegenerates the assembly and update the intersected parts. NoRegenerates the assembly without updating the intersected parts. CancelDo not regenerate the assembly.

To Customize Regeneration Follow this procedure after making a change to a feature in your assembly. 1. To initiate custom regeneration do one of the following operations: o o Click .

Right-click the assembly in the Model Tree and choose Custom Regenerate from the shortcut menu. Click (located in the lower-right corner of main window).

The Regeneration Manager dialog box opens. By default, the Regeneration list is expanded and includes all components and features in the assembly. Note: The following indicators in the lower-right corner of the main window show whether an assembly or part needs regeneration: o o o Regeneration is not required. A change has been made and regeneration is necessary. Regeneration has failed. The RESOLVE FEAT menu appears so you can fix the problem.

2. Click commands in the Show and View menus as required. o o Use the Show commands to filter the components that must be regenerated. Use the View commands to expand each regeneration node to display part features or assembly components.

126

Assembly

3. Specify the components and features in the assembly to be regenerated. o o o Click Regenerate and select the features to be regenerated. To regenerate all features, click Select All. Click Skip Regen and select the features you do not want to regenerate. To skip all features for regeneration, click Select All. Click Highlight and select the features to highlight during regeneration. When you highlight a feature, the system displays the reason for regeneration in a message window below the Regeneration list.

If you select a subassembly, all parts and features within that subassembly are selected. 4. Click OK. Resolving Retrieval or Regeneration Failures About Resolving Assembly Retrieval Failures When a component is missing during regeneration or retrieval, the regeneration fails. An error messages displays the component identification number as well as the model name. A component may be missing for the following reasons: It was misplaced in the directory tree. It was renamed. It was deleted from the disk.

If a component is missing when an assembly is retrieved, Pro/ENGINEER assembles all components until it requires the one that is missing. When this happens, the RESOLVE FEAT menu displays. The system temporarily stops regeneration until it recovers the missing component. After you replace or suppress the missing component, regeneration continues. The assembly may fail retrieval due to one of the following placement problems: A missing referenced feature A violated placement constraint

To Resolve a Missing Component Problem When a missing component cannot be retrieved, do one of the following: Click Quick Fix > Find Component. The File Open dialog box opens. Browse to locate the missing component. Click Open. You can locate multiple missing components in this way. When the missing component is retrieved, the assembly completes regeneration. Click Quick Fix > Quit Retr or Fix Model > Quit Retr. This quits assembly retrieval. All components that have been retrieved are erased from memory. 127

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Objects in session before initiation of the retrieval remain in session. You can rename the part or correct the path so the system can find it. To open the assembly you must retrieve it again. Click Fix Model > Component > Adv Utils > Replace. Choose an option: o SelectSelect a component in the assembly to replace the failed component. The Replace With menu appears. Choose an option: Family TableReplace with a Family Table member. Intrch GroupReplace with an Interchange Group member. LayoutReplace with a declared layout. UnrelatedReplace with an unrelated component. By Reference ModelReplace the model using a Shrinkwrap, Inheritance, or Merge feature. o Failed FeatOpens the Open dialog box. Browse for the component to replace and click Open. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the component in the graphics window for you to place it in the assembly. Place the component and click .

Click Quick Fix > Suppress, Quick Fix > Redefine, or Quick Fix > Delete to suppress, redefine, or delete the failed component. These commands only apply to the failed component. To suppress, redefine, or delete another component in the assembly, use the commands in the Fix Model menu. Use other commands in the Fix Model menu and follow the prompts to recover from the failure.

Note: After recovering from an error, save the new version of the assembly before exiting Pro/ENGINEER. To Recover a Failed Assembly with a Renamed Component If you rename a component on disk but do not save the assembly before you exit, retrieval of the assembly in the next session fails. In this case, you can retrieve the renamed component and reconstruct the assembly: 1. In the Resolve Feat menu, choose Fix Model > Component > Adv Utils > Replace > Failed Feat. The Open dialog box opens. 2. Select the component with the new name. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the component in the graphics window. 3. Specify the placement constraints and assemble the component to complete reconstruction of the assembly manually. Note: Save the assembly with the new name of the component before exiting Pro/ENGINEER.

128

Assembly

To Resolve a Component Placement Retrieval Failure When a component cannot be placed because references are missing, the system displays an error message, the RESOLVE FEAT menu, and the Failure Diagnostics window. When the system cannot place a component, you can do the following: Click Quick Fix > Find Component to open the File Open browser. Browse your directories to locate the missing component. Select and open the missing component. You can locate multiple missing components in this way. Click Quick Fix > Freeze. The system then places the component (nonparametrically) in its last known placement. You can redefine it or change it later. Click Quick Fix > Redefine. Use the Model Tree to redefine the location of the component. Click Quick Fix > Suppress or Quick Fix > Delete to suppress or delete the failed component. Use commands in the FIX MODEL menu, which is a subset of the ASSEMBLY menu. Note: The commands in the QUICK FIX menu apply only to the failed component. To suppress, redefine, or delete another component in the assembly, use the commands in the FIX MODEL menu. Note: After recovering from an error, save the new version of the assembly before exiting Pro/ENGINEER. To Resolve a Failure to Retrieve an Assembly Feature When retrieving an assembly, you may not be able to regenerate a feature such as a datum or hole because the part or a part feature that it references is deleted, or the part feature is suppressed. Whenever the system cannot place datums, they appear in the locations of the last successful regeneration. If a component references any of these datums, an error message and the RESOLVE FEAT menu appear. The Component Placement dashboard appears for you to specify a new placement definition. Choose Quick Fix and Freeze to place it nonparametrically. If the datum references were suppressed, unfreeze the datums by resuming them. The assembly will successfully regenerate and the components placed using the Freeze command will be placed parametrically. Note: After recovering from an error, save the new version of the assembly before exiting Pro/ENGINEER.

129

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Replacing Components in an Assembly

About Replacing Assembly Components When one assembly component is replaced by another, the new component is placed in the same geometric location and in the Model Tree. If the replacement model has the same constraints and references as the original model, placement is done automatically. If references are missing, the Component Placement dashboard appears, and you must define placement constraints. More than one component at a time can be replaced in an assembly. Multiple occurrences of a single component can be replaced by a single component, or multiple components can be replaced by multiple unique components. Note: Replacing and substituting components are two different actions. Substitution exchanges one component in a simplified representation for another and is performed in the context of a simplified representation. Replacing Components Automatically Automatic replacement of components can be performed only if the replaced model is one of the following types: A Shrinkwrap feature An Inheritance feature A Merge feature A member of a Family Table A functional interchange assembly A model that is declared to a layout

Positioning a Replaced Component Manually When you replace a component with one that is unrelated by Family Table, interchange assembly, or layout, you must manually reposition the replacement component and any components that were assembled to the original part. The system always tries to assemble the component automatically. If it cannot, it keeps as many constraints as possible. Use the Unrelated Component option to manually replace the model with a selected component. While similar to deleting and assembling a new component, with this method you can automatically place the newly replaced component in the same regeneration position. To Replace a Component with a Family Table Member 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced, and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. If the selected components have family tables, Family Table is selected by default in the Replace By list. 130

Assembly

, select the replacement model, and click OK. The name of the selected 2. Click component appears in the reference collector. 3. Click Apply. The name of the replacement model appears in the Replace column in the Model Tree next to the name of the component being replaced. 4. Click OK. The original component is replaced and automatically assembled. Note: If you select Copy as Skeleton, the newly created component will be a skeleton model. To Replace a Component with a Shrinkwrap Model With this method of replacement, you replace a master model with a Shrinkwrap model and vice versa while maintaining all valid references. One Shrinkwrap model can be replaced by another and maintain references. 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Click Reference Model. , and then select a replacement model that is either a Shrinkwrap part 3. Click (a part with an external Shrinkwrap feature of the model you are replacing) or a master model of the Shrinkwrap part you are replacing. Click OK. 4. Note: Only parametric Shrinkwrap objects with source reference information can be used for the purpose of replacement. Create these objects by using the Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap command. 5. Click Apply. The name of the replacement model appears in the Model Tree next to the name of the component to be replaced. 6. Click OK. The system places the new component in the assembly and in the Model Tree. To Replace a Component with an Interchange Assembly When you replace a component with an interchange assembly, the parent/child relationships between the components is maintained. 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Click Interchange. , select and expand the interchange assembly, select the replacement 3. Click model, and click OK. The name of the selected component appears in the New Component box.

131

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Click Apply. The name of the replacement model appears in the Component Replace column in the Model Tree next to the name of the component being replaced. 5. Click OK. To Replace a Component Using a Layout 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components that were assembled by layout and click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Click Layout. , select the replacement model, and click OK. You can only select a 3. Click component that was declared to the same layout as the original component and has placement references declared. The name of the selected component appears in the New Component box. Note: Click Clear to remove the selected component and browse again for the replacement model. 4. Click Apply. The name of the replacement model appears in the Replace column in the Model Tree next to the name of the component being replaced. 5. Click OK. Using Layouts to Replace Components You can use layouts to replace components in an assembly and to place the replacement models automatically. To place components automatically using a layout, you must first define global placement references in the layout, and then declare the corresponding placement references to the components themselves. The system assembles the replacement model to the same position as the original component using the same constraints as the original component. When you assign the same global placement reference to multiple components (parts or assemblies), you can automatically assemble any one of these components that have been declared to the layout. You can then automatically replace an assembled component with another component that has the same global placement references. Note: When you replace a component with children through a layout, the children are not automatically reassembled. To Replace a Component with an Unrelated Component Note: Family Table instances cannot be replaced with unrelated components. Children are not highlighted when you replace a component with an unrelated component. Investigate the parent/child references of a component before you replace it.

132

Assembly

1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Click Unrelated Component. , browse for the replacement model, and then click Open. The name of 3. Click the selected component appears in the New Component box. 4. Click OK. The system replaces the original component. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 5. Constrain the replacement model, and click To Replace a Component with a New Copy With this method of replacement, you replace a component with a copy by creating a new component based on the existing model. 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Click By Copy. 3. Click Copy as Skeleton (the option cannot be changed) to create a skeleton model. This option is available only if the skeleton model can be placed at the selected location, that is, if the component being replaced is the first component with no assembly features before it. Note: To create a skeleton model as the replacement model, the following conditions must be met: o o o A skeleton component is allowed at this location in the assembly structure. The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration option is set to yes. The component being replaced comes just after an existing skeleton component in the Model Tree. .

4. Accept the default name, or enter a name for the new model in the Name box, and click Apply. The name of the replacement model appears in the Replace column in the Model Tree next to the name of the component being replaced. 5. Click OK. Rules and Restrictions for Copied Replacement Components Rules for components created using the By Copy option: You can replace a single part, not a subassembly. The copy is completely independent; that is, no dependencies back to the replaced model. The operation is analogous to performing a Save As or Copy From operation. 133

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

If the part that is copied is declared to a layout, the newly created part is also declared to the layout. If the part that is copied has relations, the new part has relations. The following models can be copied: o o Models with external copy geometry features. The newly created model has the same external references as the original model. Models that reference assembly features.

All attributes of the part being copied are copied into the new component, including: o o o All features, including suppressed features. Colors set at the part level. Layers, and layer settings and assignments.

Restrictions for components created using the By Copy option: You cannot replace multiple models. When you replace a family member (generic or instance) with a new copy, the system does not copy Family Table information from the replaced model.

Rules for copied skeleton models: A skeleton model can be copied only as a skeleton model, not as a regular part. A component can become a skeleton model only if it does not violate any accepted skeleton model behavior; for example, it cannot have simplified representations. In addition, the component must be either the first component in the assembly, or the first non-skeleton component in the assembly. You can copy a part model component into a new skeleton model. You can generate a native skeleton model, based on a native part model, and have it replace the part model in an assembly, with all references remapped to the new skeleton model. This effectively allows a part to be designated as a native skeleton model through the use of a new model file.

Allowing Multiple Skeleton Replacement Copies The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration file option determines whether multiple skeletons can be created as replacement parts: When set to no, only the first component (not a pattern leader) can become a skeleton model. When set to yes, the first component after the existing skeleton group can be replaced by a copy of itself. The copy will be a skeleton model (pattern leader allowed).

134

Assembly

To Replace a Flexible Component with a New Copy 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Click By Copy. 3. Accept the default name or enter a name for the new component in the Name text box. 4. Select or clear the Maintain Flexibility check box. Note: If the Maintain Flexibility check box is cleared, the new copy contains the same geometry as the flexible component without the flexibility factor. 5. Click OK. To Add or Remove Components from the Component Replace List 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. To add a component to the list, press and hold CTRL and select additional components from the Model Tree or graphics window. 3. To remove a component from the list, perform one of the following actions: o o Click Reset and select a component from the Model Tree. Select a component from the list, right-click, and select Remove from the shortcut menu.

4. To cancel the previous component addition or removal, click Undo. To Replace Additional Components 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Replace the selected component, and click Apply. 3. Select additional components from the Model Tree or graphics window, replace the selected components, and click Apply after each replacement. 4. Click OK. Note: If the previously selected replacement model can be reused, it will be applied by default. Accept the default or specify a new replacement model. Tip: Successful Component Replacement When you replace a component, you must make sure that all references are paired. Consider the following situations: 135

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

When you replace a component in an assembly declared to a layout, you must replace it using the layout declarations. When references are missing for the replacing component, the Component Placement dashboard opens. You must specify the component reference, (assembly references are already defined). When you replace a pattern member, all pattern members are automatically updated, either immediately or after references are selected in the Component Placement dashboard. Packaged components are replaced in the same way as fully constrained components. The same functionality and restrictions apply to all component replacement options: o o Select the component in the assembly or Model Tree. Right-click and choose Replace from the shortcut menu or click Edit > Replace. In Pro/Program, click Tools > Program> Edit Design. Select From Model or From File. A text file opens. Replace the component file name with another component in the text file. When a feature or component fails, you can replace the component in Resolve Mode. Only applicable replacement methods are available. When the assembly has a family table and one of the table columns is a component, click Tools > Replace Using in the Family Table dialog box to replace it with another. Only applicable replacement methods are available.

o o

About Component Replacement and Legacy Designs Legacy designs with family table replacement functionality must be manually updated to Wildfire 3 replacement functionality. Because packaged components will be automatically replaced when a legacy design is updated, all instances will also be updated, including those in which the component being replaced is a packaged component. To update to Wildfire 3 functionality proceed as follows: 1. Set the convert_to_wf3_replace configuration option to yes. 2. Update the generic design to use Wildfire 3 replace functionality: a. b. Select the component in the Model Tree. Right-click and choose Update replace method from the shortcut menu.

About Replacing Unrelated Components with Reference Pairing You can replace an assembly component with an unrelated component, by creating a pairing table. The table contains the placement references from both components. These references can be established manually or using auto-pairing rules. The

136

Assembly

pairing table pairs each current component placement reference with the incoming , must be component placement reference. Required references, indicated by paired, while optional references can be left unpaired. The pairing table is saved and can be used to return the original component to the assembly. Sometimes you know that one component will be replaced by another, for example, a simplified representation of components will be replaced with an updated, more complex component. You can ensure the design intent by consistent naming of features and interfaces during their creation. The use of identical references ensures that connected child models are not affected by component replacement. To Replace an Unrelated Component Using Reference Pairing 1. In an open assembly, select one or more components to be replaced and then click Edit > Replace or right-click and select Replace from the shortcut menu. The Replace dialog box opens. 2. Select Unrelated Component from the Replace By list. 3. Select the component to replace. to browse for the incoming component. The Open dialog box opens. 4. Click Choose the part and click Open. 5. Click Edit Ref Table. The Reference Pairing Table dialog box opens. An active window with both components opens. or Options > Columns Setup to change the table column display. The 6. Click Models and Columns display dialog box opens. Change column width, add or remove columns and click OK. 7. Select a cell in the reference pairing table to activate the row. The reference on the outgoing component highlights and a tag handle appears. 8. Select the corresponding reference on the incoming component by clicking it or dragging the tag handle to select it. 9. Continue selecting references until all required references are satisfied. 10. Click the Show Optional Pairing Tags check box to display optional pairing tags. 11. Add or delete optional references using the or options.

12. Click OK in the Replace dialog box. The outgoing component is replaced by the incoming component. Note: Pairing references in the outgoing and incoming components ensures successful regeneration of all child components. When placement does not succeed, the Component Placement dashboard appears, allowing you to select new assembly references for the incoming component references.

137

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Pair References Automatically 1. Click Evaluation Rules. 2. Click or clear the check box to the right of a rule to enable or disable it. 3. Click Evaluate. The system evaluates the rules and populates the table accordingly. 4. Click the arrow adjacent to Evaluate and click Evaluate and Create Tags. Required tags are created first. 5. Click the Show Optional Pairing Tags check box to display optional pairing tags. 6. Click File > Save as External Interchange to save the reference pairing table as an external interchange assembly. 7. Click OK. Note: When you click the Save as External Interchange option, the Save Interchange Assembly dialog box opens. Accept the New Name or enter one. Enter an optional Common Name if required. 8. Click OK in the Replace dialog box. The outgoing component is replaced by the incoming component. Using Evaluation Rules to Replace Components The following evaluation rules appear: Follow Component InterfacesCompares component interfaces from two components. Every pair of interfaces with the same name is taken as a referenced pair. The new model is automatically placed in the same position using the interface constraints. This option is efficient when the same name is given to similar interfaces configured in each component. Follow Same Names (and Type)Extracts references that have the same name and type to use as pairing criteria. This is the most powerful autopairing rule. Intent is clearly defined and each reference is replaced by a reference of the same name and geometry. Component replacement is automatic and unambiguous. This option depends on careful planning since geometric features must be consistently named throughout your projects. Follow Same HistoryLooks for copied data sharing features from the existing component in the incoming component. Such features are then automatically used as pairs. When a feature is copied more than once, you are notified and must choose the correct reference. Follow Same ParametersDefines the type of reference and parameter name, type and value (use of wildcards is allowed). The system searches all references with the given parameter name, type, and value, and automatically pairs those that match.

138

Assembly

Interchange Assemblies
About Interchange Assemblies Interchange assemblies are used to create references for components that replace other components in an assembly. Functional interchange components replace functional components in an assembly, while simplify interchange components substitute components in a simplified representation. Note the following when creating and using interchange assemblies: The first component in an interchange assembly is, by default, a functional component. Subsequent components can be functional or simplify. You can assemble simplify components to packaged functional components. You cannot assemble functional components to packaged functional components. You can only reference a functional component when creating or assembling a simplify component. You cannot reference a simplify component when creating or assembling another simplify component. Simplify components can substitute components in a simplified representation, not other simplify components. The same component can be used twice in an interchange assembly, once as a functional component, and once as a simplify component. You cannot add another instance of a component if the generic instance is already in the interchange. You cannot add the generic instance of a component if an instance is already in the interchange. Interchange assemblies are identified by the .asm extension; however, you cannot assemble an interchange assembly into a regular design assembly. If you copy and rename an interchange assembly member using the Save As command in the File menu, you cannot substitute the newly-created part for the original one.

Functional Components Functional components can be replaced by other functional components in a design assembly. Although these components usually have the same function as the other components they are not members of a Family Table. Reference tags are used to match the references of two functional components. The tags can be created individually for each reference or in a reference pairing table. When the reference tags do not specify exact references in the target assembly, the Component Placement dashboard appears and you can replace the component manually. You can use this functionality in the following ways: To replace old or obsolete members in an assembly to reflect changes in the design or availability of components.

139

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To switch different models of two different components. To design an assembly using concept blocks or part envelopes that will then be replaced with fully detailed parts or subassemblies.

Note: The parent/child relationships are preserved whenever one component is interchanged with another. Simplify Components Simplify components are interchangeable visual representations of components in a simplified representation. You can assign mass properties to simplify components. When you create a simplified representation, you can set the mass properties of the simplified representation to be the same as those for the master assembly. Because you place a simplify component in the simplified representation using the same placement references as in the interchange assembly, when you assemble or create a simplify component, you must place it in the interchange assembly using the same placement constraints. You can use simplify components in the following ways: As a placeholder in an assembly while you design the functional component. To calculate the mass properties of an entire assembly without have it in session.

To Create an Interchange Assembly 1. Click File > New. The New dialog box opens. 2. Click Assembly, Interchange, and OK. Use the default assembly name or type a new one. 3. Insert a functional component. 4. Continue to insert functional, simplify, or both types of components in the interchange assembly. To Insert a Functional Component in an Interchange Assembly 1. Open an interchange assembly. or Insert > Component > Assemble > Functional. The Open dialog 2. Click box opens. 3. Choose the component to insert and click Open. 4. Set reference tags to use when this component is replacing a component in an assembly. To Create Reference Tags 1. Open an interchange assembly. 2. Click 140 or Insert > Reference Tag. The Reference Tag dialog box opens.

Assembly

3. Select a reference on a functional component. Drag handles appear. 4. Drag the green handle to a reference on another functional component. The references appear in the References box. 5. Click Properties to change the Name of the reference tag. 6. Click 7. Click to display the reference tag feature information. .

About Reference Pairing in an Interchange Assembly Reference tags in each of the components of the interchange assembly identify placement references in the target assembly. The reference paring table is an efficient way to pair reference tags from the active component (the one that will be replaced in the target assembly) to reference tags of one or more components in the ) must be paired, while interchange assembly. Required references (indicated by optional references can be left unpaired. The reference tags from the pairing table are used to replace the active component in the target assembly. The reference tags created are visible in the Model Tree Footer folder. To Pair Reference Tags 1. Create or open an interchange assembly. 2. Click or Insert > Ref Pairing Table. The Reference Pairing Table dialog box opens. 3. Select the active component. 4. Click to select the assembly to be used to set the context for the tag creation. The File Open dialog box opens. 5. Select an assembly and click Open. 6. Click the Components to Pair collector and select one or more functional components to pair with the active component in the interchange assembly. 7. Click Create Required Tags. The Auto Tag Creation dialog box opens. When there is more than one occurrence of the component in the assembly, a. b. Use the arrows to select the occurrence from the Select Occurrence list. It highlights in the graphics area. Click Accept.

8. When more than one component in the interchange assembly can be used to replace the active component in the selected assembly, click Select items to activate the Components to Pair box. Note: Select the required component and right-click in the graphics window to access the following shortcut menu: 141

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o o o o o o

Active ComponentActivates the Active Component collector. Components to PairActivates the Components to Pair collector. Context AssemblyActivates the Context Assembly collector. ClearClears the selected reference collector. Next tagSelects the next row of the reference pairing table. Previous tagSelects the previous row of the reference pairing table.

or Options > Columns Setup to change the table column display. The 9. Click Models and Columns display dialog box opens. Change the column width, add or remove columns, and click OK. 10. Select the interchange assembly component to replace the active component. The reference pairing table updates. 11. Select a cell in the reference pairing table to activate the row. The reference on the active component highlights and a tag handle appears. 12. Select the reference on the replacing component by clicking it or dragging the tag handle to select it in the graphics window. 13. Continue selecting references until all required references are satisfied. 14. Click the Show Optional Pairing Tags check box to display optional pairing tags. 15. Use or to add or delete optional tags.

16. Click OK. To Pair Reference Tags Automatically 1. Create or open an interchange assembly. 2. Click or Insert > Ref Pairing Table. The Reference Pairing Table dialog box opens. 3. Select the active component. 4. Click to select the assembly to be used to set the context for the tag creation. The File Open dialog box opens. 5. Select an assembly and click Open. 6. Click the Components to Pair collector and select one or more functional components to pair with the active component in the interchange assembly. 7. Click Evaluation Rules. 8. Click or clear the check box to the right of a rule to enable or disable it.

142

Assembly

9. Click Evaluate. The system evaluates the rules and populates the table accordingly. 10. Click the arrow adjacent to Evaluate and click Evaluate and Create Tags. Required tags are automatically created and populated according to the settings for the evaluation rule order. New tags for subsequent rules and optional tags are also created. 11. Make sure all required references are satisfied. or Options > Columns Setup to change the table column display. The 12. Click Models and Columns display dialog box opens. Change the column width, add or remove columns, and click OK. 13. Click the Show Optional Pairing Tags check box to display optional pairing tags. 14. Use or to add or delete optional tags.

15. Click OK. Using Evaluation Rules in Interchange Assemblies The following evaluation rules can be used to create reference pairing tags: Follow Component InterfacesCompares component interfaces from two components. Every pair of interfaces with the same name is taken as a referenced pair. The new model is automatically placed in the same position using the interface constraints. This option is efficient when the same name is given to similar interfaces configured in each component. Follow Same Names (and Type)Extracts references that have the same name and type to use as pairing criteria. This is the most powerful autopairing rule. Intent is clearly defined and each reference is replaced by a reference of the same name and geometry. Component replacement is automatic and unambiguous. This option depends on careful planning since geometric features must be consistently named throughout your projects. Follow Same HistoryLooks for copied data sharing features from the existing component in the incoming component. Such features are then automatically used as pairs. When a feature is copied more than once, you are notified and must choose the correct reference. Follow Same ParametersDefines the type of reference and parameter name, type and value (use of wildcards is allowed). The system searches all references with the given parameter name, type, and value, and automatically pairs those that match.

To Insert a Simplify Component in an Interchange Assembly 1. Open an interchange assembly.

143

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

or Insert > Component > Assemble > Simplify. The Open dialog 2. Click box opens. 3. Choose the component to insert and click Open. The Simplify Component dialog box opens. 4. Select a functional component in the interchange assembly that will be replaced by the selected simplify component. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 5. Place the component. 6. Set mass properties for the simplify component. 7. Click Add to add another simplify component. 8. Select the component in the dialog box. Click Remove to remove it or click Placement to open the Component Placement dashboard and redefine the component's placement in the interchange assembly. 9. Click OK. To Create a Simplify Part in an Interchange Assembly 1. Open an interchange assembly. or Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create dialog 2. Click box opens. 3. Accept the default Name or type a new one and click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 4. Click one of the following options to create a simplify part: o Copy from ExistingCopies the simplify part geometry from an existing part. Click Browse to select the part to copy. Click OK. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Define the part placement and click o Locate Default DatumsUse one of the following methods to locate datum planes for a new simplify part: Three PlanesSelect three orthogonal datum planes to which the default new simplify part datum planes will be assembled. Axis Normal To PlaneSelect a single datum plane and an axis that is normal to it. The new simplify part is created with a datum plane and an axis is used to place the new component. Align Csys To CsysSelect a coordinate system in the interchange assembly. A new simplify part is created with a default coordinate system and default datum planes that is used to place the new component. .

144

Assembly o

EmptyCreate a simplify part with no geometry. Geometry can be added after part creation by right-clicking the envelope part in the Model Tree and selecting Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. Create FeaturesCreate features for a new part. It appears as the active part in the Model Tree.

5. Click OK. The Simplify Component dialog box opens. 6. Select a functional component in the interchange assembly to be replaced by the selected simplify component. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 7. Define the part placement and click 8. Set mass properties. To Set Mass Properties for a Simplify Component 1. Open an Interchange assembly. 2. Click or Insert > Component > Assemble > Simplify. The Open dialog box opens. 3. Choose the component to insert and click Open. The Simplify Component dialog box opens. 4. Click Mass Properties. 5. Select one of the following options to set the mass properties for the simplify component you are creating: o Assigned properties of simplify componentAssigns mass properties defined for the component. Available only when mass properties are defined. Properties of original model if it is in sessionAssigns mass properties of the original model when it is in session. Properties of a specified functional componentAssigns mass properties of a selected functional component in the interchange assembly: a. b. Select the component from the list and click Compute. Type the relative accuracy and press ENTER or click . .

o o

SelectPrompts to choose a coordinate system in the assembly. DefaultSelects the simplify component default coordinate system. QuitQuits mass properties computation. c. d. e. Select the type of coordinate system and select a coordinate system. Type the density of the part and press ENTER or click Click Update to change the mass property settings. 145 .

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

f.

Click OK.

To Substitute a Simplify Component in a Simplified Representation There are three ways to substitute simplify components in a simplified representation. You can create a new simplify representation, edit an existing one, or create a temporary one. Creating a New Simplified Representation 1. Open the assembly. 2. Click . The View Manager dialog box opens.

3. Click New. Accept the name of the new representation or type a new one and press ENTER. 4. Click Substitute. 5. Click By Model and select the component to substitute in the graphics window or Model Tree. The Select Model options activate. 6. Click Interchange and then Browse. The Family Tree dialog box opens. 7. Select the part and click OK. 8. Click .

9. Save the new simplified representation. Editing a Simplified Representation 1. Open the assembly. 2. Click . The View Manager dialog box opens.

3. Select a simplified representation from the list. 4. Click Properties. 5. Select the component to substitute from the graphics window or Model Tree. 6. Click . The Family Tree dialog box opens.

7. Select the part and click OK. 8. Save the new simplified representation. Creating a Temporary Simplified Representation 1. Open an assembly. 2. Select the component to substitute with a simplify component.

146

Assembly

3. Click View > Substitute > Interchange. The Family Tree dialog box opens. 4. Select the part and click OK. The master representation changes. To save the changes as a new simplified representation, open the View Manager. About Displaying and Removing Interchange Components A component (part or subassembly) can be a member of one or more interchange assemblies. You can display a list of the interchange assemblies, or remove it from one or more interchange assemblies when the component is open in a separate window. To Remove Interchange Components 1. Open the component. 2. Click Edit > Setup. The SETUP menu appears. 3. Click Interchange. The SETUP INTER menu appears. 4. Click Show. The INFORMATION WINDOW opens. All interchange assemblies that contain the component are listed. 5. Click Remove. The SEL MENU appears, listing the interchange assemblies. 6. Select the interchange assembly to remove the component, or click Select All to remove the component from all interchange assemblies. 7. Click Done Sel. 8. Click Done.

147

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Example: Substituting Interchangeable Components in a Simplified Representation

1. 2. 3. 4.

A complex subassembly. The complex component is assembled into an interchange assembly. A substitute part for the complex subassembly. The simple model is assembled into the interchange assembly.

Copying Components
About Copying Components You can create multiple, independent instances of components in an assembly. You must modify, replace, or delete the copied components one at a time. Note: When a component is modified, all dimensions used to place the component appear for modification. When you copy a component, its placement is based on the coordinate system of the assembly. The coordinate system is used as reference for translating or rotating components. For example, for a rotational copy of a component, Pro/ENGINEER will rotate it around the coordinate system of the assembly. In general, copied members use the same dimensioning references as the source component (leader). Rotate the component (leader and all members) around the coordinate system of the assembly first, and then translate (move) it. To Copy a Component 1. In an open assembly, click Edit > Component Operations. The Menu Manager appears. 2. Click Copy and then create or select an assembly coordinate system.

148

Assembly

3. Select one or more components to copy and click OK in the Select dialog box. The EXIT menu and TRANS DIR menus become active. 4. Specify the moves using the Translate or Rotate options from the EXIT menu to create the additional components. As in patterns, specify any number of incremental changes for a move in different directions. You can use any number of instructions per direction, but only a maximum of three directions can be defined. o o TranslatePatterns the component in the direction of the specified axis. RotatePatterns the component about the specified axis.

5. Choose X Axis, Y Axis, or Z Axis from the TRANS DIR menu or the ROTATE DIR menu. The system prompts you to enter a value for the translation distance or the angle of rotation. Enter a value and click to confirm.

6. As you finish each set of moves, click Done Move from the EXIT menu. The system prompts you to enter a value for the number of instances you wish to create. 7. Specify the number of instances along the current direction and repeat steps 4 and 5 to define the next direction for the copy. Continue this process until you have placed all copies. 5. Click Done from the EXIT menu to execute all the moves. Example: Copying a Component
1. 2. Assemble the component. Add an assembly coordinate system.

149

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3.

The first move:

4.

The completed copy:

Mirroring Components Inside an Assembly

About Mirroring Components Inside an Assembly With Pro/ENGINEER you can create dependent and independent copies of parts and subassemblies. These copies are mirrored about a planar surface. You can save time by mirroring assembly components instead of creating duplicate instances. You can create three types of mirrored copies of parts: Mirror Geometry OnlyMirrors geometry without the structure of the original feature. Include All Feature DataMirrors geometry with the original feature structure. The geometry of the target component will not be dependent on the geometry of the source component. Mirror PlacementCopies the selected component to a mirrored location.

When mirroring parts and subassemblies, you can control the dependency of the target component on the source component. There are two dependency toggles on the geometry of the source component: Geometry DependentMakes the geometry of the target component depend on the geometry of the source component. Placement DependentMakes the placement of the target component depend on the placement of the source component.

150

Assembly

To Create a Mirrored Copy of a Part Inside an Assembly 1. Retrieve an assembly. or click Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create 2. Click dialog box opens. 3. Click Part and Mirror. 4. Enter a name for the new part and then click OK. The MIRROR PART menu appears. 5. Select one of the following as a Mirror Type: o o o Mirror Geometry Only Include All Feature Data Mirror Placement

6. Set Dependency Control parameters: o o Geometry Dependent Placement Dependent

Note: When you use Include All Feature Data, the geometry of the target part is never dependent on the geometry of the source part. When you use Mirror Placement, the source part is used and therefore no new geometry is created. 7. In the assembly, select a Part Reference to mirror. 8. Select or create a Planar Reference as the mirror plane. Note: It is good practice to mirror about a plane belonging to the part to be mirrored. 9. Click OK or middle-click to exit the tool. Example: Creating a Mirrored Copy of a Part Inside an Assembly The following figure illustrates the mirroring process. First the source part is selected, then a mirroring plane is selected, and finally a new target part is created.

151

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Note: In this example the placement of the target part is dependent on that of the source part. Therefore, the Align Offset and Insert constraints of the source part are applied to the target part.

1. 2. 3.

Source part Mirroring plane New target part

About Opening Mirrored Parts in Part Mirrored parts that were created using Mirror Geometry Only or Include All Feature Data can be opened in Part mode and placed in assemblies other than the one in which they were initially created, regardless of the location of the source part. By default, when you open a newly created mirrored part in Part mode, the source part is not loaded into session. Modify this default setting by changing the configuration option retrieve_merge_ref_parts to yes. Note: The configuration option retrieve_data_sharing_ref_parts controls the general settings of all types of referenced parts. When leaving this configuration option in the default state (no) and changing the retrieve_merge_ref_parts configuration option to yes, only source parts of mirrored target parts are loaded into session. To Edit the Merge Feature Definitions Only Merge feature definitions created by the Mirror Geometry Only option can be edited. 1. Retrieve an assembly and create a mirror of a component. 2. Right-click the merge feature in Model Tree and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Mirrored Merge Edit Definition dashboard appears. 3. Click References and then click the Copy Datums check box to toggle datum copying from the source model.

152

Assembly

4. Click Options and edit the following options: o o DependentToggles the source model geometry dependency. Refit DatumsChanges the size or reference of a copied datum. The Refit Datums dialog box opens. Select a datum and then choose Size to edit the width and height of the selected datum. If the Lock aspect ratio check box is selected, the original width and height ratio is maintained when one of these values change. Alternatively, choose Reference to change the reference of the selected datum. Note: When changing references, you must select a feature that precedes the merge feature in the Model Tree. 5. Click Properties and enter a new name for the Merge feature in the Name text box. to change the reference model of the mirrored part. A warning message 6. Click appears. 7. Click Yes to confirm the change, and then select an alternative instance as reference from the Family Tree dialog box. 8. Click OK to accept your selection. Notice that the new reference model is updated in the reference collector. Note: This option is available only for parts that have a Family Table. 9. Click . The merge feature is regenerated with the defined changes.

About Mirrored Copies of Subassemblies The Mirror option, available when creating subassemblies using the Component Create dialog box, automates the creation of a mirrored copy of a subassembly. Mirrored subassemblies are useful for assemblies with a symmetric, mirrored design. You can create subassembly mirrors for both symmetric and asymmetric components. The mirrored components are generated like a mirrored reference, as when individual parts are mirrored manually. To create a mirrored subassembly, you specify the plane of symmetry by selecting an existing datum plane or by creating a new one. Characteristics of Mirrored Subassemblies When a subassembly is mirrored, the assembly features that belong to the subassembly are mirrored as well. All layer information from the source model is copied to the new layers. These layers are independent after they are copied. When a component is mirrored individually, or when a subassembly is mirrored, the new component is placed with a default constraint. You can mirror packaged and unplaced components and redefine placement (making the mirrors independent of changes to source components). Mirrored copies of packaged components are frozen in their default placement location.

153

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Any substituted or graphically represented components (due to simplified representation settings) must be excluded from the mirrored subassembly. Only components of the source subassembly that are in a Master or Geometry Rep state will be mirrored. Results of Redefining Mirrored Subassemblies You can redefine the newly created subassembly as a whole or select individual components to redefine within the subassembly. Redefining has the following results: The placement of the newly created mirrored subassembly (or the newly created components) becomes independent of any changes to the placement of the source components. The new mirrored subassembly updates according to any subsequent geometric changes to the source components.

To Create a Mirrored Copy of a Subassembly 1. Retrieve an assembly that contains a subassembly to be mirrored, and click or Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Subassembly and Mirror. 3. Enter a name for the new subassembly, and click OK. The Mirror Subassembly dialog box opens. 4. Select a subassembly to mirror. The name of the selected subassembly appears in the Subassembly Reference area of the dialog box. Note: You can select any fully placed subassembly of the current assembly to mirror, including a previously mirrored subassembly, or an empty or packaged subassembly. 5. Select or create a planar reference as the mirror plane. The name of the selected plane is displayed in the Planar Reference area of the dialog box. Any planer reference can be used. Note: A good practice is to mirror about a plane belonging to the subassembly to be mirrored. 6. Click OK. The Mirror Subassembly Components dialog box opens with a treelike view showing the hierarchy of the mirrored subassembly. Use this dialog box to define the target components to be renamed: o o Select components to exclude during mirroring. Select components to leave unmirrored, thus reusing the source model.

7. Click OK.

154

Assembly

Rules for Mirrored Subassemblies After a subcomponent has been mirrored, the mirrored copy is used for later copies (for performance). Mirrored assemblies can be reused in other parent assemblies. Mirrored assembly explosion can be controlled. A mirrored copy of a mirrored subassembly behaves as a mirrored copy of a mirrored part. You can mirror packaged components and redefine placement (making the mirrored copies independent of changes to source placement). Skeleton models are renamed but are still recognized as skeletons. Bulk items are copied. Layers are copied. Patterned components create a mirrored pattern set in the mirrored assembly. Assembly features outside the subassembly are ignored. Assembly features within the subassembly being mirrored are copied and the new assembly cut features of the component intersections may be modified.

Using Intersections to Create Parts

To Create a Part from an Intersection You can create a part in Assembly by intersecting several existing components. These parts do not need to have the same units of measure. You can also modify existing parts in an assembly by intersecting them with another part. or Insert > Component > Create or drag a component from a 1. Click browser into the active assembly session. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Click Part, and then Intersect. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new name, and click OK. 4. Select parts to intersect. The new part represents the common volume of selected components. Parts Created from an Intersection When working with a part created from an intersection, keep in mind the following: You cannot move the resulting part. You cannot use harness parts to create a part by intersection.

155

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

You cannot retrieve the part until the assembly to which it belongs is in memory.

Using Flexible Components

About Flexible Components A flexible component readily adapts to new, different, or changing requirements. It can be included in an assembly in various states. A spring, for example, can have various compression conditions in different places in an assembly. Values for flexibility are defined at the following times: Before placement (predefined) During placement After placement

Flexibility can be defined for any part or subassembly and can be used for every placement instance of the component. To make the component flexible in the assembly, set values or define the following items that will vary to allow the component to become flexible: Dimensions, tolerances, and parameters Suppress or resume feature and component (for subassemblies) states

Flexible components do not move and will lock the assembly's movement. To allow kinematic movement, exclude flexible parts from an assembly for the duration of the dragging operation. Flexible components have the following properties: The component name is the same as the original component, even if the shape or structure is different. All instances of the flexible component refer to the original model. The original model must be present in the Pro/ENGINEER session. Common properties are associatively shared between the original component and all related flexible components and cannot be selected as varied items. When you modify a common property of a flexible component, you modify the original model. The creation or modification of a varied item affects the flexible instance of the component, not the original model. Varied dimensions can be associated with a measurement in the assembly. Varied items can be driven by an assembly relation, program or a Family Table using corresponding associated parameters. A flexible subassembly can directly affect components at any level of the subassembly. Such components are labeled Affected by Flexible. Children of flexible components and Affected by Flexible components are labeled Driven by Flexible.

156

Assembly

Components with predefined flexibility can be placed automatically. Note: In the Model Tree Identifies flexible parts Identifies flexible subassemblies

For more information, search for flexible parts in the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Place a Flexible Component 1. In an assembly click , Insert > Component > Assemble, or Insert > Component > Flexible. The Open dialog box opens. 2. Select the component to be placed and click Open. The Confirm dialog box opens. 3. Click No to assemble the component without a flexible definition and continue from step five. Click Yes to assemble the component with a flexible definition. The Varied Items dialog box opens. Note: You can change, delete, or create new varied items. 4. Assign values to the varied items for flexibility and click OK. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 5. Define placement constraints and click .

To Define a Flexible Component in an Assembly 1. Open an assembly. 2. Select the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open. 3. Define any of the following varied items: o o o o o Dimensions and Dimension Tolerances Features Components (for flexible subassemblies) Geometric Tolerances Parameters

Note: Multiple varied items of multiple types can be defined. 4. Click OK. The Component Placement dashboard appears.

157

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

5. Accept the placement definition, or use the dashboard to edit it. 6. Click .

To Predefine a Flexible Component in an Assembly To place the component as flexible in the assembly, follow the See Also link To Define a Flexible Component in an Assembly. 1. Open an assembly. 2. Select the component and click Edit > Setup > Flexibility. The Flexibility: Prepare Varied Items dialog box opens. 3. Configure varied items to define flexibility for the component. 4. Click OK. Note: For more information on flexible parts, search the Part functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Using Varied Items for Flexible Components About Varied Items for Flexible Components Varied items define component flexibility. You define these dimensions or features in the original part. The following varied items can be defined: Components (for flexible subassemblies) Dimensions Dimension boundaries Features Geometric tolerances Parameters References Surface finishes

The Varied Items dialog box opens when you: Add a flexible component to an assembly Add flexibility to a component Redefine an existing flexible component

Select the appropriate tabs in the Varied Items dialog box to define or redefine varied items. You can redefine, add new, or remove existing varied items. Assign values to the varied items to define component flexibility in the assembly.

158

Assembly

Use the following filter options to control the presentation of varied items in the dialog box: All Modified Unchanged Locked

The presentation of varied items properties in the dialog box can be customized. Click to add or customize varied item columns.

To Define a Flexible Component in a Subassembly 1. Open an assembly. 2. In the Model Tree, right-click the subassembly with the component you want to make flexible, and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu. The subassembly becomes active in the graphics window, and the Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open. 3. Click Components. You are prompted to select the component to be made flexible. 4. Select the component and click list. . The component is added to the components

5. Select Resumed or Suppressed from the New Status list to define the status of the newly flexible component in the assembly. 6. Scroll to the Mechanism exclude column, click in the table cell, and select Included or Excluded from the list to include or exclude the component from the assembly during dragging operations. 7. Click a tab to define any of the following varied items: o o o o o Dimensions Features Geometric Tolerances Parameters Surface Finish

8. Click OK to apply the changes. 9. Click to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard. in the Model

Note: The subassembly with the flexible component is identified by Tree.

159

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Define Varied Features for Flexibility 1. Open an assembly. 2. Choose one of the following items: o A flexible componentSelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Click Flexibility > Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. A component without defined flexibilitySelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open.

3. Click the Features tab. You are prompted to select a feature. 4. Select a feature on the component and click Features list. . The feature is added to the

5. Select Resumed or Suppressed from the New Status list. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add additional features. 7. Click OK to apply the changes. 8. Click to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard.

To Define Varied Dimensions for Flexibility 1. Open an assembly. 2. Choose one of the following items: o A flexible componentSelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Click Flexibility > Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. A component without defined flexibilitySelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open. . The new

3. To add a new Dimension varied item, select a dimension and click dimension appears in the table.

4. Enter a New Value for the feature dimension or select an option from the Method list: o o By Value (default)Enter a value in the New Value cell. Curve LengthOpens the Length dialog box. Click Definition and select a curve or edge to define its value. Click Details to open the Chain dialog

160

Assembly

box. Set Standard or Rule-Based References for the curve chain. Rulebased references allow you to choose an anchor and chain type: Tangent, Partial loop, or Complete loop. Configure an Extent Reference for a partial loop chain and use Options if required. Note: For more information on chains, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. o o o o DistanceOpens the Distance dialog box. Click Definition and select two entities to drive the new value. AngleOpens the Angle dialog box. Click Definition and select two entities to drive the new angle value. AreaOpens the Area dialog box. Click Definition and select the surface to drive the new value. DiameterOpens the Diameter dialog box. Click Definition and select a round surface or edge to drive the new value. Click the Point box and select a point from which to begin the new diameter calculation. to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard.

5. Click

Note: You can define a Geometric Tolerance for the varied dimension. Only the By Value option is applicable for setting a geometric tolerance. To Exclude a Flexible Component During Dragging Operations 1. Open an assembly. 2. Select the component in the Model Tree or in graphics window, right-click and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 3. Click Flexibility > Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. 4. Click to add an item with varied Dimensions, if none exists.

5. Select an option from the Methods list other than Value. The appropriate Method dialog box opens. 6. Click Definition and select entities in the assembly to drive the value. Note: Defining the flexibility of a component as the distance between two assembly components enables the component to be updated to a new position in the assembly. The component is excluded from the assembly for the duration of the dragging operation and regenerated to a new position when the dragging operation ends. 7. Click 8. Click . .

9. Click OK. 161

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

10. Click

to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard.

To Define Dimension Boundaries for Flexibility 1. Open an assembly. 2. Choose one of the following items: o A flexible componentSelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Click Flexibility > Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. A component without defined flexibilitySelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open. to add an item with varied dimensions, if none

3. On the Dimensions tab, click exists. 4. Click

. The Varied Dimension Table Column Setup dialog box opens. to add it to the

5. Select New Dim Bound in the Not Displayed list and click Displayed list. 6. Click OK. 7. Select a value limit from the New Dim Bound list: o o o o

UpperSets the dimension value to its maximum (generates geometry based on a nominal dimension value plus the tolerance). MiddleSets the dimension value to the nominal value plus the mean of the upper and lower tolerance values. LowerSets the dimension value to its minimum (generates geometry based on a nominal dimension value minus the tolerance). NominalSets the dimension value to nominal (generates geometry based on exact ideal dimensions).

8. Click OK. 9. Click to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard.

To Define Varied Geometric Tolerances for Flexibility 1. Open an assembly.

162

Assembly

2. Choose one of the following items: o A flexible componentSelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Click Flexibility > Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. A component without defined flexibilitySelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open.

3. Click the Geom Tols tab. You are prompted to select an item. 4. Select a configured geometric tolerance. 5. Click .

6. The geometry tolerance information is added to the table in the Varied Items dialog box. 7. Enter a new value. 8. Click OK. 9. Click to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard.

Note: For more information on Geometric Tolerances, search the Fundamentals functional area. To Define Varied Parameters for Flexibility 1. Open an assembly. 2. Choose one of the following items: o A flexible componentSelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Click Flexibility > Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. A component without defined flexibilitySelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open.

3. Click the Parameters tab. The Select Parameters dialog box opens. 4. Select the parameter to be made flexible. 5. Click Insert Selected. The selected parameter appears in the Parameters list. 6. Enter a new value for the parameter. 7. Click to add another parameter to the list and repeat steps 4 through 6. 163

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

8. Click OK. 9. Click to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard.

To Create an Associated Parameter 1. Open an assembly. 2. Choose one of the following items: o A flexible componentSelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Definition. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Click Flexibility > Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box opens. A component without defined flexibilitySelect the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open.

3. In the Varied Items dialog box, click the tab of the varied item of your choice. 4. Click to open the Varied Dimension Table Column Setup dialog box. .

5. Select Assoc. Param from the Not Displayed list and click 6. Click OK.

7. In the Assoc. Param column, enter a parameter name. Associated parameters must exist for the original component. Types of associated parameter are as follows: Real NumberFor dimensions, tolerances, and geometry tolerances Yes/NoFor features and components 8. Click OK. 9. Click to accept the changes and close the Component Placement dashboard.

To Redefine a Flexible Component 1. Open an assembly. 2. In the Model Tree or graphics window, right-click the flexible component to redefine, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu or click Edit > Definition. 3. Click the Flexibility tab. The Varied Items dialog box opens. 4. Change, delete, or create new varied items and click OK. 5. Complete component placement and click .

164

Assembly

To Remove the Flexible Definition from a Component 1. Open an assembly. 2. Right-click the flexible component in the Model Tree or graphics window and select Remove Var Items from the shortcut menu. The varied items are removed and the component no longer has a flexible definition. To Convert a Component to Flexible Using Predefined Flexibility 1. Open an assembly. 2. Select the component, right-click it in the Model Tree or graphics window, and choose Make Flexible from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Make Flexible. The Component Placement dashboard appears with the Varied Items dialog box open. 3. Change, delete, or create new varied items and click OK. 4. Complete component placement and click .

To Display Reference Backups in the Model Tree 1. In an open assembly, click Settings > Tree Filters on the Model Tree menu bar. The Model Tree Items dialog box opens. 2. Click Copied References from the Display column. 3. Click OK. Reference (geometry) backups appear as a Copy Geometry feature sub-node in the Model Tree. Note: To view reference backups in a Model Tree status column, enable Copied Refs in the Model Tree Columns dialog box. Propagating Flexible Components About Propagating Flexible Components You can propagate flexibility back to a component with the same shape and configuration. Propagation may be necessary to change the base component that contains varied items. The Propagate To > Model command changes the original model according to the varied items existing in the selected component. Varied items from upper levels that drive it and its components are also changed. For example, when a flexible subassembly changes, the models that are driven and affected by the flexibility change as well. Use the Propagate To > Model command for: Flexible components Components driven by varied items Members of a flexible subassembly or one that contains components driven by varied items at any level

165

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Propagate a Flexible Component 1. Open an assembly. 2. In the Model Tree, right-click the component to propagate and choose Propagate To > Model from the shortcut menu. The Changing Models message box opens displaying the name of the original component. 3. Click OK to confirm the change. Example: Propagated Flexible Components The same spring, propagated three times, in different states of compression shows propagated flexible components.

Searching for Assembly Items

To Select a Parent Assembly or Subassembly from the Graphics Window You can directly select assembly components from the Model Tree. If the selection is made from the graphics window, use the following procedure: 1. In the graphics window, select a component belonging to a parent assembly or subassembly. 2. Right-click and choose Select Parent from the shortcut menu. The parent assembly or subassembly is selected. Note: Select Parent is only available when the last item in the selection set is a component or assembly feature.

166

Assembly

To Search and Select Items by Attributes 1. Click Edit > Find. The Search Tool dialog box opens. 2. Click Attributes. 3. Select the attribute to use for your search. Additional filtering options appear depending on which attribute you select. 4. Select additional filtering options. 5. In Look For, specify the item types if the action allows for the selection of more than one entity type. 6. In Look by, create a more detailed query. For example, if you set Look for to feature and set Look by to dimension. The rules apply to dimensions but the found items are features that own the found dimensions. 7. In Options, select items that are not visible in the main window. You can search for excluded (from representation), suppressed, out of session, not placed items and control the following options: o o o Filter TreeFilter the model tree to only show selected items. Highlight ItemsHighlight selected items in the main window. Build QueryCombine rules to perform a search.

8. Click Find Now to evaluate search results with set rules and filters. Two areas appear; A list of found items and an area to transfer selected items. 9. Select found items and click to transfer them into the selected items area.

Note: Click one name to select that item and close the dialog box. In multi-select mode, click either Apply or Close to select highlighted items. Ctrl and shift editing commands apply to the results list. Ctrl +LMB selects and unselects multiple items. Shift + LMB selects a range of items, and Ctrl +A selects or unselects all items. To Search and Select Items by History Search items by historic information or design practices previously experienced. For example, feature numbers, ID rules, failed and last features, or all entities for the current context. You can also specify a range of numbers for feature numbers and rules. 1. Click Edit > Find. The Search Tool dialog box opens. 2. Click History. The following items appear allowing you search by: o o o o ID Number Failed Feat Last Feat

167

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o

All

3. Select the item to use for your search. Additional filtering options appear depending on which item you select. 4. Select additional filtering options. 5. In Look For, specify the item types if the action allows for the selection of more than one entity type. 6. In Look by, create a more detailed query. 7. In Options, select items that are not visible in the main window. You can search for excluded (from representation), suppressed, out of session, not placed items and control the following options: o o o Filter TreeFilter the model tree to only show selected items. Highlight ItemsHighlight selected items in the main window. Build QueryCombine rules to perform a search.

8. Click Find Now to evaluate search results with set rules and filters. Two areas appear; A list of found items and an area to transfer selected items. 9. Select found items and click to transfer them into the selected items area.

Note: Click one name to select that item and close the dialog box. In multi-select mode, click either Apply or Close to select highlighted items. Ctrl and shift editing commands apply to the results list. Ctrl +LMB selects and unselects multiple items. Shift + LMB selects a range of items, and Ctrl +A selects or unselects all items. To Search and Select Items by Status 1. Click Edit > Find. The Search Tool dialog box opens. 2. Click Status. 3. Select one of the following status items to use for your search. Additional filtering options appear depending on which status item you select. o o o o RegenerationsSpecify types of regenerations such as frozen, inactive, failed , and so forth. LayersInclude or exclude layers within your model. DisplaySelect display or visibility styles as setup in a simplified representation. Parent/ChildSelect the parents or children of a selected reference. Select the reference to determine the parent/child rule, and then describe the Scope for the rule

4. Select additional filtering options.

168

Assembly

5. In Look For, specify the item types if the action allows for the selection of more than one entity type. 6. In Look by, create a more detailed query. 7. In Options, select items that are not visible in the main window. You can search for excluded (from representation), suppressed, out of session, not placed items and control the following options: o o o Filter TreeFilter the model tree to only show selected items. Highlight ItemsHighlight selected items in the main window. Build QueryCombine rules to perform a search.

8. Click Find Now to evaluate search results with set rules and filters. Two areas appear; A list of found items and an area to transfer selected items. 9. Select found items and click to transfer them into the selected items area.

Note: Click one name to select that item and close the dialog box. In multi-select mode, click either Apply or Close to select highlighted items. Ctrl and shift editing commands apply to the results list. Ctrl +LMB selects and unselects multiple items. Shift + LMB selects a range of items, and Ctrl +A selects or unselects all items.

To Search and Select Items by Copied Refs 1. Click Edit > Find. The Search Tool dialog box opens. 2. Click Status. 3. Click Copied Refs. 4. Select comparison and value filtering options. 5. In Look For, specify the item types if the action allows for the selection of more than one entity type. 6. In Look by, create a more detailed query. 7. In Options, select items that are not visible in the main window. You can search for excluded (from representation), suppressed, out of session, not placed items and control the following options: o o o Filter TreeFilter the model tree to only show selected items. Highlight ItemsHighlight selected items in the main window. Build QueryCombine rules to perform a search.

8. Click Find Now to evaluate search results with set rules and filters. Two areas appear; A list of found items and an area to transfer selected items. 9. Select found items and click to transfer them into the selected items area.

169

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Note: Click one name to select that item and close the dialog box. In multi-select mode, click either Apply or Close to select highlighted items. Ctrl and shift editing commands apply to the results list. Ctrl +LMB selects and unselects multiple items. Shift + LMB selects a range of items, and Ctrl +A selects or unselects all items. To Search and Select Items by Geometry 1. Click Edit > Find. The Search Tool dialog box opens. 2. In Look For, select Component from the item types list. 3. Click Geometry. Note: To enable the Geometry tab, Component must be selected in the Look for: list. 4. Select one of the following geometry types to use for your search. Additional filtering options appear depending on which attribute you select. o o o ZonesSelect assemblies from inside or outside a selected zone. DistanceSearch for models within a distance from a reference. Exterior ComponentsSelect the exterior models of an assembly. Quality Level is specified because this rule essentially takes a shrinkwrap of the assembly and locates any models which intersect with the shrinkwrap. A higher quality level number generates a more detailed shrinkwrap.

5. Select additional filtering options. 6. In Options, select items that are not visible in the main window. You can search for excluded (from representation), suppressed, out of session, not placed items and control the following options: o o o Filter TreeFilter the model tree to only show selected items. Highlight ItemsHighlight selected items in the main window. Build QueryCombine rules to perform a search.

7. Click Find Now to evaluate search results with set rules and filters. Two areas appear; a list of found items and an area to transfer selected items. 8. Select found items and click to transfer them into the selected items area.

Note: Click one name to select that item and close the dialog box. In multi-select mode, click either Apply or Close to select highlighted items. Ctrl and shift editing commands apply to the results list. Ctrl + LMB selects and unselects muliple items. Shift + LMB selects a range of items, and Ctrl + A selects or unselects all items.

170

Assembly

Managing Views Exploded Views

About Exploded Views An exploded view of an assembly shows each component of the model separated from other components. Using Explode in the View Manager, you can create exploded views. An exploded view affects only the assembly appearance. Design intent and the true distance between assembled components does not change. You create exploded views to define the exploded position of all components. For each exploded view, you can perform the following actions: Toggle the exploded view of components on and off. Change the location of components. Create offset lines.

You can define multiple exploded views for each assembly and then use any of these saved views at any time. You can also set an explode state for each drawing view of an assembly. Each component has a default exploded position determined by the placement constraints. By default, the reference component of the exploded view is the parent assembly (top-level assembly or subassembly). When using exploded views, keep in mind the following rules: If you explode a subassembly in the context of a higher level assembly, the components in the subassembly are not exploded automatically. You can specify the exploded state to use for each subassembly. When the exploded view is turned off, information about the exploded position of components is kept. The components return to their previous exploded position when the exploded view is turned on. All assemblies have a default exploded view, which is created using the component placement specifications. Multiple occurrences of the same subassembly in an exploded view can have different characteristics at a higher level assembly.

Note: Exploded views cannot be created in NC Manufacturing assemblies (.mfg files). To Create and Save a New Exploded View 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. 2. Click Explode. 3. Click New. A default name for the exploded view appears. or View > View Manager. The View Manager

171

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Press ENTER to accept the name or type a new name. The exploded view is active. 5. Click Properties and set the explode position of the assembly components. 6. Click List to return to the exploded views list. 7. Click Edit > Save. The Save Display Elements dialog box opens. 8. Click OK and Close. To Explode or Unexplode an Assembly View 1. To explode an assembly view, click View > Explode > Explode View. 2. To return the view to its former unexploded state, click View > Explode > Unexplode View. To Set the Exploded Position of Components 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

3. Click Explode, select an exploded view, and click Properties. 4. Click . The Explode Position dialog box opens.

5. Select a motion type for positioning the exploded components. 6. Select a motion reference to set the direction of the move. 7. Select the component to explode and drag it to a new position. 8. Continue selecting components and dragging them to desired positions in the exploded view. 9. Click OK to return to the View Manager. To Set the Exploded Status of Components Use the View Manager to set the explode position of components. 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

3. Click Explode. 4. Select an exploded view and click Properties. 5. Select a component from the component list in the View Manager and click to toggle the exploded view on or off. The status of the component is set to exploded or unexploded .

172

Assembly

6. Click Close. About Offset Lines in Exploded Views You can use offset lines to show how exploded components align when they are in their final positions, and then modify or delete them when editing an exploded state. They display in a dashed font. Offset lines are composed of three straight segments. You determine the direction of the end segments by selecting references (parallel to an edge or curve or normal to a surface), and the middle segment connects the two end segments. Configuration File Options for Offset Lines In the configuration file, you can set the default color and font style for offset lines created for exploded views. The following options are available: offset_line_def_font offset_line_def_color

To Create Offset Lines 1. Click View > Explode > Offset Lines > Create or click View > View Manager, select the Explode tab, and click appears. . The Entity Select menu

2. Select a pair of start and end anchor points for the offset lines: o o o AxisSelects an axis on which to place the offset line. Surface NormSelects a surface on which to place the offset line. Edge/CurveSelects an edge or curve on which to place the offset line.

3. Follow the prompts to select the start and end points. When complete a message appears indicating the assembly components are successfully exploded. To Modify Offset Lines You can modify offset lines by: Adding, moving, or deleting jogs Changing line font Changing line color

1. Click View > Explode > Offset Lines. 2. Choose one of the options in the OFFSET LINES menu: o o ModifyMove, add, or delete a jog. DeleteDelete an offset line.

173

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o o

Mod Line StyleSelect a line to modify using options in the Line Style dialog box. Set Def StyleSet a new default line style and color using options in the Line Style dialog box.

To Add or Modify Jogs in Offset Lines You can create offset lines with multiple jogs. You can also move as well as delete the jog points. 1. Click View > Explode > Offset Lines > Modify. 2. Select an offset line to modify. 3. Select an option from the EXPL LINES MODIFY menu: o o o MoveMove a jog point. Add JogsAdd a jog to the lines. Delete JogsDelete a jog by selecting a jog point.

Cross Sections
About Assembly Cross Sections Create a cross section to cut away a section of a part or assembly to view a section of the model. In Assembly mode, you can create a cross section that intersects an entire assembly or only a selected part. The crosshatching of each part in an assembly is determined separately. Assembly cross sections can be used in drawings. You can create the following types of cross sections using the View Manager: Planar cross sections of models (crosshatched or filled) Offset cross section of models (crosshatched but not filled) Cross sections from a faceted model (.stl file)

With the Surfacing model you can create planar cross sections that automatically intersect all quilts and all geometry in the current model. The following restrictions apply to using cross sections: If you have a detailed drawing, crosshatching is visible even if you click No Hidden. Cross-sectional cut planes do not intersect cosmetic features in a model. You can view only one clipped cross section at a time.

174

Assembly

Assembly Zones
About Assembly Zones Zones are regions within models that make large assemblies more manageable. You can use zones to help organize your assembly, as follows: Control view clipping Select components in an assembly for a simplified representation Create component display states Define envelope parts

Use the Xsec tab in the View Manager to create zones. Each zone is named and stored with the top-level assembly or part. You can create an assembly zone based on offset distances from a coordinate system, datum plane references, closed assembly feature surfaces, 2-D elements (such as curves) or by specifying a distance from an entity. Zone references can come from any level of the assembly. You can define the coordinate systems, datum planes or surfaces while you create a zone, or you can use preexisting coordinate systems, datum planes, or surfaces. You can use coordinate systems, flat datum planes, or extruded or revolved surfaces to define what is inside the zone or outside the zone. For example, if you define a zone to include everything on one side of a datum plane, that side is a half-space of the datum plane. You can combine any number of half-spaces. However, if you use more than 6 half-spaces, view clipping is not available. You can manage a collection of components or assembly areas by using closed surfaces to define the assembly zone boundaries. Sketch a closed section and extrude it to get a surface with capped ends. This closed section, which defines the zones boundaries, specifies which components are included in the zone. Components are included in zones as follows: If a component lies in more than one zone, the system includes it in both zones. If a components bounding box is intersected by a zone, the system includes the component in that zone.

Define zones as follows: Reference an existing assembly datum plane Create an assembly datum plane during zone definition Reference an existing assembly closed quilt Reference a 2-D element (a plane, curve, or vertex) Reference a radial distance from a 2-D element Create an assembly coordinate system during definition Reference an existing coordinate system

175

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Note: A bounding box highlighting the geometry for selected zones is visible when using Offset CSYS, Inside-Outside, and Half-Space types. However, a bounding box does not appear when using Radial Distance From. To Clip a Zone 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

3. Click the Xsec tab. 4. Create a zone in your model using the type. Half-Space (datum plane) reference

5. Right-click the name of the zone to clip and click Set Active from the shortcut menu. The model is clipped. Note: You can click Display > Flip to change the side clipping that occurs on your model. You can also click Display > Exclude Comps to disable graphic selection of geometry that is clipped away. To Create a Zone Using a Distance from an Element 1. Retrieve an assembly. or View > View Manager, click the Xsec tab and then click New. A 2. Click default zone name appears in the Names area of the View Manager dialog box. 3. Accept the default zone name or enter a new one and press ENTER. The XSEC OPTS menu appears. 4. Click Zone. A dialog box opens labeled with the zone name. 5. Click Radial Distance From from the Type list.

6. On the From list, select the type of entity from which to measure: o o o o o o o o o Any Vertex Point Line/Axis Curve/Edge Curve Feature Plane Surface Cable

176

Assembly o o o o

Part Subassembly Component Center Coordinate System (offset)

7. Select the specific entity from which to measure in the graphics window. 8. Enter a value for the radial distance in the Radius box. to preview the newly created zone and click 9. Click dialog box. to close the Zone

Note: Zones created using distance from an element cannot be view clipped. To Create a Zone Using Closed Surfaces 1. Retrieve an assembly. or View > View Manager, click the Xsec tab and then click New. A 2. Click default zone name appears in the Names area of the View Manager dialog box. 3. Accept the default zone name or type a new one and then press ENTER. The XSEC OPTS menu appears. 4. Click Zone. A dialog box opens labeled with the zone name. 5. Select Inside-Outside (quilt) from the Type list.

6. Select an existing closed quilt from the graphics window or Model Tree. The quilt appears in the references list. to indicate whether components inside or outside the boundaries 7. Click defined by the bounding box are to be included in the zone (the default is Inside). to preview the newly created zone and click 8. Click dialog box. To Create a Zone Using Datum Planes 1. Retrieve an assembly. or View > View Manager, click the Xsec tab and then click New. A 2. Click default zone name appears in the Names area of the View Manager dialog box. 3. Accept the default zone name or type a new one and press ENTER. The XSEC OPTS menu appears. 4. Click Zone. A dialog box opens labeled with the zone name. 5. Select Half-Space from the Type list. 177 to close the Zone

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Note: If you change the reference type after specifying references, they are no longer displayed. If you switch back to that type of reference, they reappear. 6. Select a datum plane from the graphics window or Model Tree. The datum plane name appears in the reference list. The nine arrows that appear in the graphics window indicate which side of the datum is used to define the zone. Use change direction. 7. Click to preview the newly created zone and click dialog box. To Delete a Zone from an Assembly 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. to close the Zone to

2. Click the Xsec tab. 3. Right-click the zone to be deleted and select Remove from the shortcut menu. Note: You can also select the zone to be deleted and click Edit > Remove. A warning message confirming the deletion is displayed.

To List All Zones in an Assembly 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

2. Click the Xsec tab. All assembly zones and cross sections appear in the Names area of the View Manager. To Redefine a Reference in a Zone 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

2. Click the Xsec tab. 3. Right-click the zone name to be changed and select Redefine from the shortcut menu. The Zone dialog box opens with the zone references displayed. located at the bottom of the Note: You can also expand the Footer group Model Tree. Right-click the zone name and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the reference to be redefined and edit it. 5. Click 6. Click to preview the newly created zone. to close the Zone dialog box.

178

Assembly

To Remove a Reference from a Zone 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

2. Click the Xsec tab. 3. Select the name of the zone to be changed. 4. Click Edit > Properties. The Zone dialog box opens. 5. Select the reference to be removed. 6. Click 7. Click to remove the reference. to close the Zone dialog box.

To View a Zone 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

2. Click the Xsec tab. 3. Click Display. The following options are available: o o o Show RefsHighlight the defining references for the selected zone. Zone CompsHighlight the components in the selected zone. Zone OnlyShow only the components in the selected zone or zones.

To Rename a Zone 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

2. Click the Xsec tab. 3. In the View Manager, right-click the zone to be renamed and choose Rename from the shortcut menu. 4. Enter a new zone name. 5. Click Close. Multiple References for Assembly Zones You can select more than one reference to define an assembly zone. When you select a reference in the references area of the dialog box, it is highlighted in the graphics window. Two or more references always have logical AND and OR capabilities. Use the AND and OR options in the zone definition dialog box. The system maintains an order of operations denoted by parentheses. Parentheses placement cannot be changed.

179

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Create a Zone Using Offset Distance from a Coordinate System 1. Retrieve an assembly. Zone or open the View Manager, click the Xsec tab, and then 2. Click View > click New. A default zone name appears in the Names area of the View Manager dialog box. 3. Accept the default zone name or enter a new one and press ENTER. The XSEC OPTS menu appears. 4. Click Zone. A dialog box opens labeled with the zone name. 5. Select Offset CSYS from the Type list.

6. Create a new coordinate system or select an existing one from the graphics window or the Model Tree. The coordinate system name appears in the reference list. A three-dimensional bounding box appears, enclosing the created or selected coordinate system. 7. Specify the offset from the coordinate system by changing the distance values of the six planes making up the bounding box (X1, Y1, Z1 and X2, Y2, Z2). The graphics window updates whenever you change a value and press ENTER. The values of X1 and X2, Y1 and Y2, and Z1 and Z2 cannot be the same. Note: When a bounding box expands beyond the model's outline, two bounding boxes are displayed in the graphics window: o o Csys offset bounding boxDefined using coordinate system offset values. Zone bounding boxDefined using the intersection of the model's outline and zone references.

to indicate whether components inside or outside the boundaries 8. Click defined by the bounding box are to be included in the zone (the default is Inside). 9. Click to add additional references to the zone or to remove a reference. to close the Zone

to preview the newly created zone and click 10. Click dialog box.

Assembly Display Style

About Display Style for an Assembly You can assign solid or wireframe display styles to components in your assembly. This improves computer performance as designs get larger. There are two main style modes: shaded (solid) and lined. Use the Style tab in the View Manager or the View > Display Style command to manage the assembly display. The assigned component style appears in the Display Style column in the Model Tree. You can assign one of the following display styles to components in an assembly:

180

Assembly

WireframeShows front and back lines equally. Hidden LineShows hidden lines in ghost tones. No HiddenDoes not show lines behind forward surfaces. ShadedShows the model as a shaded solid. TransparentShows the model as a transparent solid. BlankDoes not show the model.

Component display styles can be modified without using the View Manager. You can select desired models from the graphics window, Model Tree, or search tool, and then use the View> Display Style commands to assign a display style to the selected models. These temporary changes can be stored to a new display style, or updated to an existing one. When a default display styles is defined, it appears each time the model is retrieved. To Create a Display Style Note: In the View Manager a plus (+) indicates that the current display style is modified. A display style can be created by following one of these two procedures: 1. Select components, and then click View > Display Style. Select one of the options from the list of display styles. 2. Select additional components and apply other display styles to them. or 1. Click or View > View Manager to open the View Manager.

2. Click Style. 3. Click New. A default name for the display style appears. 4. Press ENTER to accept the default style name or enter a new one. The Edit dialog box opens. 5. Click Show and select a display style from the Method list. 6. Select a component from the graphics window or the Model Tree. 7. Click to preview the selected style and click to accept the change.

To Edit a Display Style 1. Click or View > View Manager to open the View Manager.

2. Click Style. 3. Select the style name to be changed, and then click Properties.

181

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Select a component from the list. 5. Click an option to select another style: o o o o o o o Wireframe Solid Transparent Hidden lines No hidden lines Blank Activate a display style from the selected component

To Redefine a Display Style from the Model Tree 1. Retrieve an assembly and create a display style. 2. Click Settings > Tree Columns from the Model Tree. The Model Tree Columns dialog box opens. 3. From the Type list select Display Styles. Choose a style to add to the list in the Displayed column. 4. Click OK. The new style column appears in the Model Tree. 5. Select a component with a defined display style, and then redefine the display style by selecting a different one from the Display Style column. Display Styles for Components The View > Display Style menu controls the display style of components with no assigned display style, as follows: WireframeComponents are displayed in front of the assigned component in wireframe and all edges appear in white (or another assigned color), when you: o o o Assign one component to display its hidden lines. Leave the other components unassigned. Set the general display style to Wireframe.

The components behind the assigned part are displayed in wireframe, but the sections of edges masked by the component with hidden lines are not displayed. Hidden LineAll components and the hidden line component are displayed in the same way.

182

Assembly

No HiddenAll components in front of the assigned component appear with no hidden lines. The obscured edges of the hidden line component appear in gray and its visible edges in white. In components behind the assigned part, visible edges appear, but obscured ones do not. The edges of the other parts obscured by the hidden line component do not appear in gray. ShadedAll assigned components display as shaded, whether they are in front of or behind the hidden line component. TransparentAll assigned components are displayed as transparent. Note: The default transparency value is 75. You can set the style_state_transparency configuration option in a range of 0100.

The display style for assembly components affects only the top-level assembly. Display style information exists in the assembly, not in the components. Components in a subassembly may have defined display styles before their assembly. Use the By Display command in the Edit Display menu to activate subassembly settings in the assembly. As a result, when you retrieve the subassembly in another session, it retains the display style that you assigned it. Keep the following in mind when using display styles: The display style of the components in an assembly overrides the general display style setting. You cannot mix general display style settings and different states on individual components. When you select a component and assign a display style to it, the unassigned components appear in accordance with the general display style setting. You can store a component with an assigned display style and retrieve that style by name so that you can return the model to the regular display style without losing defined settings. Only one display style can be active at a time. You can also change display states in simplified representations and exploded assemblies.

Assembly Orientation
About Assembly Orientation An assembly appears in a default view orientation when it is first created and any time it is retrieved (provided it was saved in default orientation). You can change the default orientation of your model or create new orientations using the Orient command in the View Manager. Using View > Orientation you can perform the following actions: Return to the default orientation. Return to the previous orientation. Refit the model to the screen so that you can view the entire model.

183

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Reorient the model.

To Save an Assembly Orientation 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens. 2. Click Orient. 3. Click New. A default name appears for your view. Change the view name or press ENTER to accept it. 4. Right-click the view name, and then click Redefine. The Orientation dialog box opens. 5. Orient the model by references or position the model to the desired view using the spin, pan, and zoom commands. 6. Click OK to return to the View Manager. 7. Click Edit > Save. The Save Display Elements dialog box opens. 8. To save the view click OK. or View > View Manager The View Manager

Combination Views
About Combination Views A combination view allows you to combine and apply multiple View Manager display states. You can save combination views to quickly switch between customized model display states. With combination views you can control the following display states: Model orientation Simplified representations Model style Cross sections Exploded views Layer status

To Create a Combination View 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

2. Configure the display settings to be saved with the new combination view. 3. Click the All tab. 4. Click New. A default name for the combination view appears. 184

Assembly

5. Press ENTER to accept the default name or type a new name and press ENTER. The New Presentation State dialog box opens. 6. Click Reference Originals to reference the original display states, or click Create Copies to create copies of the original display states. To Redefine a Combination View 1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens.

2. Click the All tab. 3. Right-click the combination view to edit and select Redefine from the shortcut menu. The combination view definition dialog box opens. 4. Redefine the following display settings: o o o o Orientation Simplified Rep Style Cross Section Click Visible Cross Sections. The Select Xsec dialog box opens. Doubleclick a listed cross section to preview. Exclude clipped componentsExcludes components that are clipped by a 3D cross section (zone). o Explode Show explodedActivates the selected exploded view. o Layers Include Current statusClick to store the current top level assembly layer status. The layer status of lower level components is not stored. However, top level assembly layer status is propagated to sub model same name layers. Note: It is recommended to set the model to its current combination state before redefinition is done. This prevents the layer status from being overwritten unintentionally. 5. Click 6. Click . to preview the changes.

185

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

References and Dependencies Reference Views

About the Reference Viewer User Interface The Reference Viewer user interface consists of the following items: Menu bar commands Task panel Path overview graph Parent/Child graph Current item collector Shortcut menus

Menu Bar Commands The following commands are available: FileIncludes the following file options: o o o o o o o Save PathsSaves all paths in the paths tab with the model. Load PathsLoads a saved paths file. Export > Export All Full PathsExports all the full paths in the model to a text file. Export > Export Paths ListExports all the paths in the Paths tab to a text file. Export > Export Graph as TextExports all parents and children in the graph to a text file. Export > Export Model Tree as TextExports the Model Tree to a text file. Close

ViewToggles the display of parents and children in the graph: o o o o o Parents and Children (default) Show Parents only Show Children only Add Tree ColumnToggles the display of the Dependency Status column in the Model Tree. Expand allExpands all subitems in the graph.

186

Assembly o

Collapse allCollapses all subitems in the graph.

Actions o o o o o o o Set as CurrentSets the selected object as the current object. Info > Reference InfoDisplays information about the selected object reference. Info > Feature InfoDisplays information about the selected feature. Info > Relation InfoDisplays information about relation references. Find PathsLocates the path between objects. Find Circular PathsLocates circular paths in the model. Find in Model Tree > Filter TreeFilters the Model Tree according to reference and object filters.

Task Panel Contains the following tabs: Reference FiltersControls the reference filters settings. PathsProvides tools for managing reference paths.

Path Overview Graph This graph is at the top of the Parent/Child graph. It is used to display and navigate a defined path. A path is considered defined when it contains more than one object. Parent/Child Graph This graph displays the parents and children of the current object. The displayed objects can be selected directly in the graph for reference investigation. Current Item Collector The current item collector is above the Parent/Child graph. The following elements are available: Current ObjectDisplays the currently investigated object. Use PreviousSets the previous object as the current object. Displays a history list of the current item. Click an item from the list to make it current.

Shortcut Menus To access a shortcut menu, right-click an object on the Parent/Child graph or anywhere inside the graph to quickly access general commands.

187

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

About Reference Investigation in Assembly With the Reference Viewer you can investigate the relationships and dependencies among features and models for increased management of design intent. The contents are displayed graphically by representing component hierarchy and multiple dependencies. The graph can display multiple levels of parents and children at one time. You can customize the contents of the Reference Viewer to show only dependencies of interest. When you select an assembly for reference investigation, the Reference Viewer displays both solid model and component references. Solid model references are part level (feature) references and component references are assembly level (placement) references. Solid model references describe model geometry and component references describe part relationships in context of the assembly. You can control the display of references and view only solid model or only component references. The following icons in the Parent/Child graph indicate the display mode of the investigated object: Both solid model and component references are displayed. Only component references are displayed. Only solid model references are displayed.

About Reference Types A reference is indicated by an arrow between two objects in the Parent/Child graph. When there is more than one reference, the number of references appears on the arrow. With the Reference Viewer you can investigate the following reference types: Regular References Regular references are created between features in the context of a single part or in the context of an assembly. Feature references can be local or external. Local references are created by features that only reference geometry of the model in which they were created. External references are created by a feature referencing geometry that does not belong to the model where the feature is created. Note: External references are indicated by a gray dot on the reference arrow in the Parent/Child graph. Relation References Relation references are equations written between dimensions and parameters to define relationships within features or parts, or among assembly components. You can investigate model and feature relations, and you can investigate local and external references created by relations. By default, relation references are indicated by a red arrow between two objects in the Parent/Child graph. Note: The color of the reference arrows can be customized.

188

Assembly

Placement References Placement references are used to place a component in an assembly. When a part is added to an assembly, the system creates a component feature called a Placement folder. The folder stores the part name and the part and assembly entities that were used to place the part. Placement references are indicated by System References System references are created automatically by Pro/ENGINEER. About Viewing Parent and Child References The Reference Viewer provides a graphical illustration of parent-child relationships in the design. When you select an object for reference investigation, the graph area displays its parents and children. The investigated object is usually placed at the center of the Parent/Child graph. Parent objects are positioned on the left of the graph and children on the right. Note: To view a list of referenced entities, click To Investigate References 1. Open an assembly or part. 2. In the Model Tree, right-click an assembly component or a part feature and select Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens with the selected component as the current object. Note: To set an object as current when the Reference Viewer is open, rightclick an object in the Model Tree or graphics window and select Set Current. 3. Set the reference filters. The graph area displays related objects, references, and dependencies according to the set filters. 4. Click Actions > Info and select Reference Info, Feature Info, or Relation Info to open the information window for the selected object. Note: When an information window is opened, the system creates a file (grv_ref_info.inf) of the data. The file is stored in the working directory and is overwritten each time a new information window is opened. 5. You can perform the following reference investigations: o Right-click an object or a reference arrow in the graph to access the shortcut menu. next to a graph object. The subitem window opens. Move the Click pointer over a listed subitem to highlight its reference in the Parent/Child graph. . .

189

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Set Reference Filters 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Click References on the Reference Filters tab. 3. Set the reference filters on the References Filters tab: o o ScopeDisplays only references of the selected scope. Click All, External, or Local. StatusDisplays only references of the selected status. Click All, Missing, Missing without backup, Not Updated, To Excluded Parents, To Substitute Parents, or Complete. Strong/WeakDisplays only references of the selected type. Click All, Strong, or Weak.

4. Set the reference types to display in the graph: o o o o o Regular Placement Relation System Components in path to customize the reference color in the graph.

Note: Click

5. Set the object types from which references are displayed in the graph: o o o From Independent ChildrenToggles the display of references from independent objects (the referencing object is an independent feature). From Excluded ChildrenToggles the display of references from excluded objects (the referencing object is an excluded object). From Suppressed ChildrenToggles the display of references from suppressed objects (the referencing object is a suppressed object).

To View Solid Model and Component References 1. Open an assembly and click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens with the top-level assembly set as the current object. 2. Click one of the following icons to view solid or component references: o o o Displays both solid and component references (default). Displays only solid references. Displays only component references.

190

Assembly

Tip: Displaying Only External References When the erv_show_external_only configuration option is set to yes, the Reference Viewer displays external references only. You can use this configuration option to improve system performance when working on a large assembly. To Find a Reference Path 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Select an object to investigate, right-click, and choose Set Current from the shortcut menu. The selected object appears in the graph area. Related objects, references, and dependencies are displayed, according to the set filters. 3. Click Actions > Find Paths or right-click an object and choose Find Paths from the shortcut menu. The Find Paths dialog box opens and the selected object appears in the From Object box. 4. Select the path's destination: To ObjectDisplays the path to a selected object. Full path to current objectDisplays the full path from the reference to the current object. Full path to direct parents/childrenDisplays paths to the direct parent and children and includes components on the reference path. 5. Click Find Path. The reference path is given a default name and added to the path list. Note: To rename a selected reference path, right-click, choose Rename from the shortcut menu, and type a new name. To delete a selected reference path, right-click, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

To Save a Reference Path 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Find one or several reference paths between selected objects. 3. Click File > Save Paths or press CTRL+S. The reference paths are saved to the session. 4. Save the assembly. To Export All References 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Set the reference filters.

191

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Select an object to investigate, right-click, and choose Set Current from the shortcut menu. 4. Click File > Export > Export All Full Paths. An information window containing all the references opens. Note: When you open the information window, the system creates a file (grv_full_path.inf) that contains the reference data. This file in the working directory is overwritten each time you use the Export All Full Paths command. 5. Click File > Save or File > Save As to save the information window and click Close. To Investigate Circular References 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Click the Paths tab and then click Find Circular Paths. The model is regenerated and the existing circular paths are listed. 3. Click a circular path. The path is displayed in the graph. To View a Reference Path 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Select an object to investigate, right-click, and choose Set Current from the shortcut menu. The selected object appears in the graph area. Related objects, references, and dependencies are displayed according to the set filters. 3. Right-click a reference arrow in the graph area and select Display Full Path. The Full Path Display dialog box opens displaying the route of the selected reference in the assembly tree. Note: The black arrow indicates the connection between the end entities. The red arrows indicate the reference path in the assembly. 4. Click Close. To Filter the Model Tree 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. On the References Filters tab, set the reference filters and click Filter Model Tree. The Model Tree is filtered according to the set filters. 3. To filter the Model Tree by object type, select on of the following options from the Filter By list: o o o Parent or Child References (default) Parents References Child References

192

Assembly

To Export a Model Tree to a Text File 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Expand the Model Tree items intended for export. Note: Collapsed Model Tree items are not exported. 3. Click File > Export > Export Model Tree as Text. The Get Name dialog box opens. 4. Type a name in the Enter file name box and click OK. The Model Tree is exported to a text file and saved in the working directory. To Toggle the Display of Parents and Children in the Reference Viewer 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. 2. Select an object to investigate, right-click, and choose Set Current from the shortcut menu. The selected object appears as the Current Object at the center of the graph area. Parent objects are displayed to the left of the Current Object and child objects are displayed to the right of it. to close the parent or child reference columns of the Parent/Child Graph. 3. Click To restore a closed reference column, click View and select and select one of the following options: o o o Parents and Children (default)Displays the parents and children of the Current Object. Show Parents onlyDisplays only the parents of the Current Object. Show Children onlyDisplays only the children of the Current Object.

Note: You can also right-click the graph area and choose one of the above options from the shortcut menu. To Investigate Dependencies 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens. Note: To investigate the dependencies of a component, select the component, right-click, and choose Info > Reference Viewer from the shortcut menu. 2. Click Dependencies on the Reference Filters tab. 3. Set the dependencies filters: o StatusDisplays only dependencies of the selected status. Click All, Missing, Missing without backup, Not updated, To Excluded Parents, To Substitute Parents, or Complete. TypeDisplays only dependencies of the selected type. Click All, Family Table, Substitute, Interchange, Membership, Layout Declared, External Representation, Manufacturing, UDF, Merge, or Dummy.

193

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Set the object types from which references are displayed in the graph: o o o From Independent Children From Excluded Children From Suppressed Children

About Breaking Dependencies Dependencies between features and models are created by Pro/ENGINEER to enable work on Product Development Management systems. The Reference Viewer allows you to investigate and break object dependencies before the model is checked into the PDM system. The following dependency types can be broken: Restructure dependencies Dependencies to unused substitute components Dependencies to reference models of independent Data Sharing features Dependencies to layouts Dependencies to Interchanges assemblies Dependencies of mirrored models to the original ones Dependencies to old assembly cuts Dependencies to replaced components

To Break Object Dependencies 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer dialog box opens with the top-level model as the current object. 2. Click the Reference Filters tab and then click Dependencies. The Parent/Child graph displays the model dependencies. 3. Select a dependent object or a dependency link, right-click, and choose Break Dependency from the shortcut menu. Note: To access object-specific functions, right-click the dependency link, and choose a relevant command from the shortcut menu.

Reference Viewer Tutorial

About the Reference Viewer Tutorial In the Reference Viewer tutorial, you will use files from a model of a fan to learn how to use the Reference Viewer. You will learn about the Reference Viewer User Interface and perform common reference investigation tasks. The tutorial is composed of four sequential exercises: Exercise 1: Opening the Reference Viewer and Viewing its Contents

194

Assembly

Exercise 2: Controlling the Graph Display and Filtering References Exercise 3: Viewing Reference Paths and Investigating Circular References Exercise 4: Displaying and Breaking Model Dependencies

Complete the exercises in their order. Follow the instructions in the Setup page to get started.

Setup To work through this tutorial, you need Pro/ENGINEER Wilfire 4.0 or later and the model.zip file provided. 1. Download the model.zip file and extract it to a directory on your hard drive. 2. Start Pro/ENGINEER. 3. Click File > Set Working Directory. The Set Working Directory dialog box opens. 4. Browse to ../models/models/ and click OK to set this as your working directory. This directory contains the files you will use in this tutorial. 5. Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens. 6. Click and click Open to load the ref_view_tutorial.pro configuration file.

195

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

7. Click Close to close the Options dialog box. 8. In the Model Tree, click Settings > Tree Filters. The Model Tree Items dialog box opens. 9. Under Display, click all the items and then click OK. To start the tutorial, proceed to Exercise 1. About Exercise 1 The Reference Viewer provides a graphical illustration of parent and child relationships in the design. When you select an assembly object for reference investigation, the graph area displays its parents and children. The investigated object is usually placed at the center of the Parent/Child graph. Parent objects are positioned on the left of the graph and children on the right. In this exercise you will learn how to open the Reference Viewer and view the current objects parents and children. Proceed to Task 1.1. Task 1-1: Open the Reference Viewer 1. Open the WHIRLWIND_250.ASM file. 2. In the Model Tree, expand the BASE.ASM subassembly. 3. Right-click BASE_ARM.PRT and select Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer opens with BASE_ARM.PRT set as the current object. In the Reference Filters tab, ensure that References is selected. Tip: Click Info > Reference Viewer to open the Reference Viewer with the top model as the current object. 4. Review the Parent/Child graph. This graph uses arrows to represent the references between the current object and its parents and children.

196

Assembly

Note: To view the full reference path between two objects, right-click a reference arrow, and select Display Full Path from the shortcut menu. The Reference Path Display dialog box opens. Proceed to Task 1-2. Task 1-2: View the Subitem Window next to BASE_SKEL.PRT. The subitem window 1. In the Reference Viewer, click opens and includes all the items (in BASE_SKEL.PRT) that are referenced by the current object.

above BASE_ARM.PRT. The subitem window opens and includes all the 2. Click items (in BASE_ARM.PRT) that are responsible for the references displayed in the graph. 3. Place the pointer over a subitem to highlight its reference arrow in the Parent/Child graph. For example, place the pointer over Copy Geometry id 39. The reference to BASE_SKEL.PRT is highlighted in light blue. to close the parents or children reference columns. The Note: You can click content of the subitem window updates accordingly. To restore a closed reference column and view parents and children, click View > Parents and Children. 4. Close the Reference Viewer.

This completes the first exercise. Proceed to Exercise 2.

197

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Reference Representations in the Parent/Child Graph A reference is indicated by an arrow between two objects in the Parent/Child graph. When there is more than one reference, the number of references appears on the arrow. Graphical Display Definition

A reference between objects. Multiple references between objects. The number of references is indicated in the box. An external reference. Colors can be assigned to distinguish between different reference types. By default, relation references are marked in red. A reference that is not updated. Make sure the parent object is in session and regenerate the assembly to update the reference. A circular reference between objects.

About Exercise 2 The Reference Viewer can be set to display only references of interest. In this exercise you will learn how to control the graph display and filter references by scope, status, and type. You will also learn how to filter the Model Tree to easily find objects with specific reference types. Proceed to Task 2-1. Task 2-1: Set the Reference Filters 1. Open the WHIRLWIND_250.ASM assembly. 2. Click Settings > Tree Filters. The Model Tree Items dialog box opens. Click Features to display component features in the Model Tree and click OK. 3. In the Model Tree, expand the FAN.ASM subassembly. Right-click AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT and select Info > Reference Viewer from the shortcut menu. The Reference Viewer opens with the selected part set as the current object. 4. On the Reference Filters tab, set the scope to external. The local references are filtered out and the graph displays only external references.

198

Assembly

5. On the Reference Filters tab, clear all reference type filters except Placement. Nonplacement and local placement references are filtered out and the graph displays only external placement references. Note: Click next to a reference type to assign a new color to the reference type.

The reference filter settings are saved for the current Pro/ENGINEER session. 6. Close the Reference Viewer.

Proceed to Task 2-2. Task 2-2: Filter the Model Tree 1. Review the Model Tree objects of the WHIRLWIND_250.ASM assembly. 2. Make sure that the WHIRLWIND_250 assembly is set as the active assembly component and click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer opens with the top-level assembly as the current object. 3. On the Reference Filters tab: o o o Set Scope to All. Clear all reference type filters except Relation. Click Filter Model Tree.

4. In the Model Tree, click Show > Expand All. Note that only components with relation references are displayed in the Model Tree. 5. In the Model Tree, right-click Curve id 41 in AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT and select Set Current. Note the relation reference from AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT to Curve id 41 appears in the Reference Viewer. 6. You can filter the Model Tree to display objects with parents only or objects with children only. To view only objects with parents, select Parent References from the Filter By list. 7. Close the Reference Viewer.

This completes the second exercise. Proceed to Exercise 3.

199

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Path Overview Graph Symbols Symbol Definition A subitem link between two adjacent objects. A reference between two adjacent objects no longer exists. A subitem link between two adjacent objects no longer exists.

About Exercise 3 The Reference Viewer can provide information on paths and references. In this exercise you will learn how to: Use the Path Overview graph to display and navigate a defined path. Use the Reference Viewer to find and save a path between two objects. Find and investigate circular references.

Note: A path is considered defined when it includes at least two objects. Proceed to Task 3-1. Task 3-1: Define the Path Overview Graph 1. Open the WHIRLWIND_250 assembly. 2. In the Model Tree, expand the BASE.ASM subassembly. 3. Expand BASE.PRT, right-click the Copy Geometry feature, and select Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer opens with the Copy Geometry feature set as the current object. 4. On the Reference Filters tab select all Reference Types. Note that the feature has only parents. 5. Right-click BASE_PUB in BASE_SKEL.PRT in the Parent/Child graph, and select Set as current. BASE_PUB in BASE_SKEL.PRT becomes the current object. Note that the Path Overview graph now includes the current object and the previous object (the Copy Geometry feature). 6. Right-click the BASE extrude feature and choose Set as current from the shortcut menu. The object is added to the Path Overview graph. 7. Add the BASE_CRV sketch feature to the Path Overview graph.

8. Click an object in the Path Overview graph. The selected object is highlighted and becomes the current object in the Parent/Child graph. 200

Assembly

Note: The Path Overview graph displays symbols that indicate the existence of a subitem link between two adjacent objects. 9. Close the Reference Viewer. Proceed to Task 3-2. Task 3-2: Find All Paths Between Two Objects 1. Open the WHIRLWIND_250 assembly. 2. In the Model Tree, expand the FAN.ASM subassembly. Right-click the DRIVETRAIN_SKEL part and select Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer opens with the selected part set as the current object. 3. Click Actions > Find Paths. The Find Paths dialog box opens. DRIVETRAIN.ASM appears in the From Object box. Next, you must select a destination object for the To Object box. 4. In the Model Tree, expand the DRIVETRAIN.ASM assembly, select MOTOR.PRT as the destination object, and click Find Paths. MOTOR.PRT appears in the To Object box. Note that 3 reference paths are added to the paths list. 5. Click Path 1 to view the reference path from the MOTOR part to the DRIVETRAIN_SKEL part. 6. View reference paths 2 and 3. 7. To save the reference paths, click File > Save Paths. The Save Paths dialog box opens. Type a name for the saved paths list in the Name box and click OK. The list is saved in the working directory. Note: To open the saved paths file in the Reference Viewer, click File > Load Paths. 8. Close the Reference Viewer. Proceed to Task 3-3. Task 3-3: Investigate Circular References 1. Click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer opens. 2. Click the Paths tab and then click Find Circular Paths. Note that 3 circular paths are added to the circular paths list. 3. Click a circular path from the list. The selected path is displayed in the Parent/Child graph. Note: Circular references occur when an assembly contains a number of cross references that form a loop. In this example there is a circular reference between the HUB and the BLADE parts. The hub is referenced by the blade for placement constraints and the blade is referencing the hubs protrusion.

201

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

The circular paths are stored in the working directory by default. Note the whirlwind_250.crc file in the working directory.

This completes the third exercise. Proceed to Exercise 4. About Exercise 4 Dependencies between features and models are created by Pro/ENGINEER to enable work on Product Development Management systems. In this exercise you will learn to display model dependencies. You will also learn how to break dependencies before the models are checked into a PDM system. Proceed to Task 4-1. Task 4-1: Display Dependencies 1. Open the WHIRLWIND_250 assembly. 2. In the Model Tree, right-click the FAN subassembly and select Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer opens with the selected part set as the current object. 3. On the Reference Filters tab, click Dependencies. The Parent/Child graph displays model dependencies. Note: You can filter the displayed dependencies to view only dependencies of interest. 4. Review the model dependencies, close the Reference Viewer, and click File > Close Window. Proceed to Task 4-2. Task 4-2: Break Dependencies and Retrieve Missing References 1. Click File > Erase > Not displayed and then click OK to remove all objects from session. 2. Open the DRIVETRAIN assembly and click Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer opens with the top-level assembly set as the current object. The symbol for a missing reference is . Note the two missing references.

3. On the Reference Filters tab, click Dependencies. 4. Right-click the VORTEX-1200_SKEL part and select Break Dependencies. A Break Dependency message appears. Click Confirm to break the dependency. The missing dependency is removed from the Parent/Child graph. 5. To locate the second missing dependent object, right-click the DRIVESHAFT part, and select Retrieve Ref. The File Open dialog box opens.

202

Assembly

6. Select the DRIVESHAFT part from the working directory and click Open. The missing part is retrieved into session. 7. Close the Reference Viewer and close the assembly.

This completes the fourth exercise. Congratulations! You have completed the Reference Viewer tutorial. View a list that summaries the contents of this tutorial. Summary Now that you have completed this four-part tutorial, you should be able to: Open the Reference Viewer and investigate parent and child relationships. Define and work with a Path Overview graph. Set reference filters and filter the Model Tree. Find a path between design objects and investigate circular references. Investigate and break object dependencies.

Object-Specific Reference Control

About Object-Specific Reference Control In addition to the global environment scope settings, you can specify a particular scope setting and reference handling scheme for a particular object. The information is stored with the object and is in effect for each assembly in which the object appears. To manage reference control settings for assembled components, set the following configuration options: default_comp_scope_settingSets the specified accessible reference control conditions to newly added components. default_comp_skel_scope_settingSets the specified Accessible reference control conditions to newly added Skeleton components. default_comp_invalid_refsSets the specified handling method of out-of-scope Accessible references to newly added components. default_comp_geom_scopeSets the specified Shared Geometry reference control conditions to newly added components. default_comp_skel_geom_scopeSets the specified Shared Geometry reference control conditions to newly added Skeleton components. default_obj_constraints_scopeSets the specified Shared Placement reference control conditions to newly added components.

203

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

default_object_geom_scopeSets the specified Shared Geometry reference control conditions to newly created models if template models were not used. To Define Object-Specific Reference Control You can use any of the following methods to control the reference scope and handling for a component: Right-click on the part in the Model Tree and click Reference Control to set the reference scope and handling for a part in Part mode. Right-click on the top assembly in the Model Tree and click Reference Control to set the reference scope and handling for a part in Assembly mode. Open the Ref Control column in the Model Tree, and then use the right mouse button to select Ref Control for a part or subassembly within an assembly.

Each of these methods opens the External Reference Control dialog box. Use the Look In drop-down list to select the object and object type (part, assembly, or component). The dialog box is divided into two tabs: Accessible and Shared. The Accessible tab of the dialog box refers to setting the allowable references of the current model that can be borrowed from other models. The Shared tab refers to setting the allowable external references that can be shared by other models. This tab includes external references for feature creation, and also allowed component placement constraint references. Settings are the same as for environmental reference control. If there are object-specific settings and an environmental setting for scope control on an object, the system enforces the more restrictive setting for the object. Accessible AllAllow external references to any component. Inside Subassembly Allow external references only to components within the same subassembly. Skeleton Model Allow external references only to the skeleton of high level subassemblies. NoneAllow no external references. You may choose to use backup of forbidden references by selecting the Backup Forbidden References check box.

Shared Geometry Allowed for Referencing AllAllow external references to any geometry in the model. Published Geometry Restricts external references shared from this model to be made only to Publish Geometry. NoneAllow no external references.

204

Assembly

Allowed Placement References AllWhen assembling this model, allow all geometry to be used as component constraints. Component InterfacesAllow only component interfaces to be used for component constraints. NoneAllow no geometry to be used a component constraints (Fix of Default must be used).

Tip: View Object-Specific Settings from the Model Tree You can see current object-specific reference control settings for each model in the Ref Scope column of the Model Tree.

Environment Reference Control

About Environment Reference Control Pro/ENGINEER provides reference control tools for specifying system behavior when you create external references among features in a design. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to use the External Reference Control dialog box to specify global settings that apply to all components in the current session except objects that have an object-specific scope setting and objects that have a less restrictive object-specific scope control. These settings are runtime; that is, they apply only during the session in which they are set. They do not affect the internal database of the object. You can also specify object-specific scope settings and reference control. This information is stored with the object and is in effect for each assembly in which the object appears. The External Reference Control dialog box contains an Environment settings area containing a Components Allowed to be Referenced area and Geometry to be Referenced area. These options allow you to control scope control. In addition, when you select Selection, you can control selection and color feedback options. Use the External Reference Control dialog box to specify global environment settings to control scope, reference handling, reference selection, and color feedback during selection of references: Geometry to be ReferencedThis area contains commands to activate additional Publish Geometry filters. These filters are used in conjunction with the four scope settings, restricting them further. Components Allowed to be ReferencedYou can define a scope where creating external references to other models is allowed in the context of an assembly, manufacturing model, or process plan. Exclude from Selection BinYou can disable the selection of out-of-scope references or of components that are either prohibited or from which local copies must be made. 205

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Colors of Forbidden ReferencesYou can enable highlighting to distinguish between components available for referencing and components that are not available for referencing. For example, the system highlights (or reshades) all invalid components (that are either prohibited, or from which local copies must be made) in user-defined colors. The models that are out of scope and available for copying are highlighted in a user-specified color while you are selecting geometry items for referencing. Allowed Placement ReferencesAllow component placement constraints including interfaces to be referenced.

About the Publish Geometry Reference Filter The Publish Geometry Settings in the External Reference Control dialog box enable isolation of only Publish Geometry features for allowed references using the Geometry tab. The Geometry to be referenced setting in the External Reference Control dialog box enables filtering out of the Publish Geometry features for referencing, depending on the scope option selected. This filter is not a separate setting that allows referencing to only Publish Geometry features in the whole model. Instead, it works in conjunction with the existing scope settings, restricting them further. The following options allow you to apply the filter to only models that contain Publish Geometry features or to all models. Geometry to be Referenced AllAllow external references to any geometry. Published Geometry if Exists in a ModelAllow external references to only published geometry if it exists in a model (if it does not exist, allow external references to any geometry. Published Geometry OnlyAllow external references to only published geometry. Note: The Publish Geometry filter is unaffected by Reference Handling settings in the dialog box. These settings are functional during runtime actions. Any references already established do not fail during regeneration. Allowed Placement References AllWhen assembling the model, allow all geometry to be used as component constraints. Interfaces if Exist in a ModelAllow only component interfaces to be used for component constraints, if they exist. If not, any geometry is allowed. Interfaces OnlyAllow only component interfaces to be used for component constraining placement.

206

Assembly

To Set Color Feedback for Out-of-Scope External References Use the Colors of Forbidden References area of the Reference Control dialog box to define a color for displaying out-of-scope components during reference selection. You can also specify settings to turn this color display on and off. Scope color display in selection mode is independent of the environment cosmetic color setting. If you switch off the environment setting (Model Display/Color), color scope feedback highlighting still applies. The following options are available: Change Color of Not Allowed for BackupSelecting this check box causes the color of out-of-scope prohibited references to change to the user-specified color to display the Color Editor dialog box, and during reference selection. Click set the user-defined color. A bitmap on this button shows the current userdefined color for these references. Change Color of Allowed for BackupSelecting this check box causes the color of out-of-scope references that are allowed as local copies to change to the user-specified color during reference selection. Click to display the Color Editor dialog box, and set the user-defined color. A bitmap on this button shows the current user-defined color for these references.

External Reference Control

About Shared Geometry Settings The shared geometry settings are controlled in the External Reference Control dialog box. This controls geometry of a specific model that can be accessed by other models. You can access the External Reference Control dialog box for specific models by selecting the model node in the model tree, and right-click and click Reference Control. You can also activate a model, and use Edit > Setup > Reference Control. Shared contains three settings to control what geometry of the current model can be accessed by other models: AllAllows external references to any geometry of this model. Publish GeometryAllows external references only to Publish Geometry within the model. NoneNo external references to this model are allowed.

A separate section is used to control what references can be used when assembling this model to another assembly. AllAllows all geometry to be referenced when assembling this component into an assembly. Component InterfacesOnly allows previously defined component interfaces to be used to assemble this component to another assembly.

207

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

NoneNo geometry from this part can be use to assembly this component into another assembly. This component must be assembled using Fix or Default constraints.

These settings are functional during runtime actions. Any references already established do not fail during regeneration. To Define Global Reference Scope Control Settings Global reference control is accessed by using Tools > Assembly Settings > Reference Control to open the External Reference Control dialog box. Use Objects to specify the level at which external references can be made: All, Subassembly, Skeleton Model, or None. Note: The reference capability of a skeleton model is not affected by the scope setting of its associated subassembly. Choose one of the following settings: AllAllow external references to any other component. The All setting allows any external references to be created. This setting is equivalent to having no scope control at all. For PartThe part can make external references to any other part, subassembly, or skeleton model in the assembly. For SubassemblyThe subassembly can make external references to any other subassemblies, parts, or skeleton models in the assembly. For Skeleton ModelThe skeleton model can make external references to any other skeleton model, part, or subassembly in the assembly. SubassemblyAllow external references only to components of the same subassembly. For PartThe part can make external references to other parts that are in the same subassembly object anywhere in the assembly as the part being modified, to subassemblies and their subcomponents that are in the same subassembly as the part being modified, and to the skeleton model of the subassembly to which the part being modified belongs. For SubassemblyThe subassembly can make external references to other subassemblies and their subcomponents that are in the same parent subassembly as the subassembly being modified. Also, the skeleton model of the parent subassembly can be referenced, as well as any parts that also exist in the parent subassembly. For Skeleton ModelThe skeleton model can make external references to any parts or subassemblies (and their subcomponents) of the subassembly to which it belongs, and also to those of a higher-level subassembly to which the subassembly belongs.

208

Assembly

Skeleton ModelAllow external references to skeleton models only. For PartThe part can reference the skeleton model of the subassembly to which it belongs, or any higher-level skeleton model that is its direct ancestor. For SubassemblyThe subassembly can reference the skeleton model of the parent subassembly to which it belongs, or any higher-level skeleton model that is its direct ancestor. For Skeleton ModelThe skeleton model can reference any higher-level skeleton model that is its direct ancestor.

NoneAllow no external references. For PartThe part cannot have external references. Part features can reference only other features in the part being modified. For SubassemblyThe subassembly cannot have external references. (References to its own components and their subcomponents are allowed). Assembly features can reference only other features in the assembly being modified. For Skeleton ModelThe skeleton model cannot have external references.

Example: The Scope Settings of Subassembly and None The illustration shows the Subassembly reference control scope setting:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Assembly Modified component Allowed scope Skeleton model Modified component Allowed scope

209

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

The illustration shows the None reference control scope setting:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Assembly Modified component Allowed scope Skeleton model Modified component Allowed scope

To Channel All External References Through Skeleton Models You can use reference control settings so that only external references via skeletons from the top downward are allowed: 1. Create a skeleton for each subassembly. 2. Set an object-specific reference control None and clear the Backup Forbidden References check box. 3. Set an object-specific reference control Skeleton Model and clear the Backup Forbidden References check box. These reference control settings are stored with the assembly and are not environment dependent. To Backup Forbidden or Out-of-Scope External References In the Accessible area of the External Reference Control dialog box, you can specify how the system behaves when you attempt to create an external reference to a model that is outside the specified scope. The following check box is available when the scope is set to Subassembly, Skeleton Model, or None: Backup Forbidden ReferencesIf this box is checked, the system allows you to create out-of-scope references as a local copy only. If the box is unchecked, the system aborts the action if you attempt to create an external reference that violates

210

Assembly

the scope. The system also displays a message identifying the model whose scope has been violated. To Set Selection Options for Out-of-Scope External References Using the Selection Options for Out-of-Scope Refs area of the Reference Control dialog box, you can disable the selection of out-of-scope references. These settings apply during reference selection and also during other kinds of selection such as Pick, Query Sel, and Search Tool. The following options are available in the Exclude from Selection Bin area: NoneAll items are selectable (nothing is excluded) Forbidden References not Allowed for BackupAny items not allowed for backup cannot be added to selection bin. All Forbidden ReferencesAll forbidden references will be excluded from selection bin.

Selection settings do not apply for the following exceptions: Selecting reference parts for merge or cut out functionality using Edit > Component Operations > Merge or Cutout commands Using multiple models; that is, using the same part in several assemblies and trying to modify one of the parts or assemblies

To Specify Default Scope Settings You can use the following configuration file options to specify the default settings for external reference scope, out-of-scope reference handling, and reference scope modification. To specify the default settings for the reference control environment, set the configuration file option default_ext_ref_scope to all (the default), none, skeletons, or subassemblies. To specify the default setting in the Reference Control dialog box for reference handling, set the configuration file option scope_invalid_refs to prohibit or copy. To set the default reference scope and not allow anyone to change that setting from inside the Pro/ENGINEER interface, specify the appropriate value for default_ext_ref_scope. Then set the configuration file option allow_ref_scope_change to no (yes is the default). You cannot use this option unless you have set default_ext_ref_scope. To specify the default settings for the reference control in a new object, set the configuration file option default_object_scope_setting to all (the default), none, skeletons, or subassemblies. To specify the default setting in the Reference Control dialog box for reference handling of new objects, set the configuration file option default_object_invalid_refs to prohibit or copy. 211

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To control whether users can change the scope setting of components, set the configuration file option model_allow_ref_scope_change to yes or no. To ignore object-specific reference scope settings, set the configuration file option ignore_all_ref_scope_settings to no (yes is the default). The Environment scope settings will still be enforced.

To Replace or Prevent Missing Locally Copied References When the locally copied references that are backed up are missing in the original part (if, for example, they were deleted or suppressed), the feature that depends on that reference fails the regeneration. You can redefine or reroute a missing reference and select a replacement reference. You can prevent features with backed up references from failing when a reference is missing by setting the configuration file option fail_ref_copy_when_missing_orig to no. This automatically freezes all copied references with missing parents. Tip: View the Status of Locally Copied References from the Model Tree When you have set the configuration file option fail_ref_copy_when_missing_orig to no, you can view information on the status of locally copied references in the Copied Refs column of the Model Tree. About External Reference Backup When a feature is defined using external references, the system creates a geometry backup to support feature regeneration and redefinition when the external references are out of context or out of session. The geometry backup appears as a feature subnode in the Model Tree. Note: External reference backups can be created only when the appropriate reference controls are turned on. You can redefine a feature with external references in its current context.

To Convert an External Reference Backup to a Copy Geometry Feature 1. In an open assembly, click to expand the Model Tree node of the feature containing the external reference backup. 2. Right-click the external reference backup and choose Make Feature from the shortcut menu. A warning message appears. Note: You can also drag the external reference backup and drop it outside the feature Model Tree node. 3. Click Yes to convert the backup reference to a Copy Geometry feature, or No to abort the operation.

212

Assembly

Working with Assemblies To Copy an Assembly

Using Copy From, you can copy an entire assembly or subassembly into a new assembly. You can use Copy From to copy features but not parts or any solid geometry. Copy From is available only for copying an assembly that is empty (but that can contain assembly features) into an assembly that is completely empty (one that does not contain even assembly features). Recommended practice is to use start components and default templates. This functionality may often be used more efficiently than Copy From to replicate assemblies. For information about using default templates, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.

About Copying and Pasting in Assembly

The Copy, Paste, or Paste Special, commands allow you to easily duplicate and place components in an assembly. You can create instances dependent or independent of the source component. While the dependency of pasted features in Part Modeling refers to geometry, the one in Assembly refers to the placement of the pasted component. Note: Once the Paste command is activated, the Component Placement dashboard appears. The placement references of the source component are maintained but the assembly references must be redefined. Click the Placement tab and provide the appropriate assembly references.

Using Start Components and Default Templates

A start component is a standard component that you can copy to create new parts or assemblies. Start components can contain relations, layers, views, and parameters subject to the following conditions: A start part should not have any external dependencies. A start assembly should contain only assembly features.

Note: Start assemblies, which you can use to create a new subassembly, can contain assembly-level data (such as features, parameters, and layers) but cannot contain components or skeleton models. If the selected start part or assembly has a family table, you will be prompted to select a particular instance of that family table, and the information that is associated with that instance will be copied to the newly created component. If you select the generic instance, the family table will not be copied over to the new component. If you have specified a default template (you can set the configuration file option start_model_dir to specify its location), the system uses that template, or start

213

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

model, for the part. Using a template as a start model allows you to include critical layers, datum features, and views in the model. For detailed information, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.

About Regenerating to Update Modified Parts

You must use the Regenerate command to update the modified parts after you make dimensional modifications. You can select individual parts to regenerate or you can perform an automatic regeneration by selecting no components at all. Automatic regeneration is performed by default by the regenerate command. The regenerate command, with nothing selected, identifies and regenerates all parts that were modified along with the top level assembly and subassemblies.

Using the Assembly Model Tree

A graphical, hierarchical representation of the assembly is shown in the Model Tree window. The nodes of the Model Tree represent the subassemblies, parts and features that make up an assembly. Icons, or symbols, provide additional information. You can expand or compress the tree display by double-clicking with the left mouse button on the name of the component. The Model Tree can be used as a selection tool, allowing objects to be quickly identified and selected for various component and feature operations. In addition, system-defined information columns can be used to display information about components and features in the Model Tree. When the top level assembly is active, the Model Tree right-click shortcut menu provides direct access to the following Assembly operations: Modify an assembly or any component in an assembly Open the component model Redefine component constraints Reroute, delete, suppress, resume, replace, and pattern components Create, assemble, or include a new component Create assembly features Create notes (See Fundamentals Help for additional information.) Control references Access model and component information Redefine the display status of all components Redefine the display status of individual components Fix the location of a packaged component Update a shrinkwrap feature

214

Assembly

Note: You can invoke an operation from the Model Tree window only when no other operation is active in the system. Also, when a sub-model is active, the operations allowed on items of non-active models are limited to Edit, Hide/Unhide, and Info.

Using Save A Copy with Assemblies

When you save a copy of an assembly, you have the option to copy any or all members of the assembly. However, you must copy and rename any components that have external references. Click File > Save A Copy, then enter a new name for your assembly and click OK. The Assembly Save A Copy dialog box opens. It provides a convenient way to provide new names for the desired assembly components. You can reuse the original component or define a new name for the new copy of the original component. These new components are saved to the same directory as an assembly copy. Reused components stay at their original location. If a family table is used with your assembly and you set the configuration file option allow_save_as_instance to yes, you are given the option to save your assembly as a family table instance. If you set the configuration option to no, the option of saving a family table instance is not available. The only choice is to save your assembly as new, independent assembly. The recommended method of creating table instances is within the family table dialog box and not with the configuration option. The source assembly is shown in a tree-like structure so you can see its hierarchy of components. By default each component is selected to be reused. To provide a new name, the user must select components and specify "New Name" in the drop-down menu or click Generate New Names. For each component, you can choose to give it a new name or to reuse the component in the source subassembly. If a subassembly is chosen to be renamed, all components in that subassembly can also be renamed using the default new name or remain as "unused". If you change all components to "new name", change the subassembly to "reuse", and then back to "new name", the status of the components change automatically to "new name". If a subassembly is reused, then all components in that subassembly are reused. When you copy an assembly, you can copy any or all of the components that make up the assembly. In the Rule section of this dialog box, you can establish a rule for a renaming convention. The default renaming convention is the old name appended with a default suffix. You can change the suffix and apply it to selected components. You can also create a template for other renaming conventions including a suffix or prefix. To input a suffix for component name generation, type the suffix in the Use Suffix box. Change components to "new name" to add this suffix. Note: Click the right mouse button in the tree-like section to view the pop-up menu. To select multiple items to be resumed or renamed, hold down the CTRL key and then click components or subassemblies.

215

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Add Information Columns to the Model Tree

You can add and remove system-defined columns to the Model Tree to display different types of information about components and features currently displayed in the Model Tree. You can expand and collapse the Model Tree window, and the system updates the columns accordingly. 1. Click Settings > Tree Columns. The Model Tree Columns dialog box opens. 2. Click the Type list, and select the name of a column from the list of types of information. 3. Click the right arrow command button to add the specified column to the Displayed list of columns. 4. Click OK to close the dialog box. The new column now appears in the Model Tree. The system displays appropriate information in this column. The columns display the following: Information items o o o o o Status (regenerated, packaged, suppressed/suppression order, and so on) Feature information (number, ID, type, name) Reference control Copied references Model size

Feature parameters Database parameters Model parameters Simplified representations Visual (display) mode Layer information Notes

To Control the Visibility of a Part Layer at the Assembly Level

1. On the Model Tree, click Show > Layer Tree. Any existing layers are listed. 2. Click Settings > Save status in sub models (active by default). The Save status in sub models command is deactivated and the display status of lowerlevel component layers is stored at the top-level assembly. 3. Click Layer > Save Status to save the display status in the top-level assembly. 4. Save the assembly.

216

Assembly

Controlling the Visibility of Part Layers at the Assembly Level

Component layer display status can be changed and stored at the assembly level. The components do not have to be saved to store layer display changes. To save component layer display status at the level assembly, set the save_display_status_in_submodel configuration option to no, or click Settings > Save status in sub models and deactivate the command. Note: When a Same Name Layer exists in both the assembly and a part in the assembly, layer visibility changes that are saved at the part level are not stored at the assembly level. When component layer status is saved at the assembly level, component model display in part window is not affected. When multiple windows are open, the current layer status is displayed when the assembly is activated.

About Creating Reference Dimensions

You can create a reference dimension in an assembly using the same method you would use in Part mode. It can be a linear distance, a radial value, or an angular value. If you create reference dimensions on an assembly, you can then display them in assembly drawings. For information about reference dimensions, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.

About Displaying Assembly Information

You can use the Info menu to display information. You can also use Info on the right mouse pop-up menu from the Model Tree to display information about the assembly. Note: Info displays information only for objects in session. Info displays information about a suppressed object if it is still in session. To display an information window providing the assembly name and the hierarchy of the names of the assembly components, you can do one of the following: Choose Model from the Info menu. Right-click an assembly from the Model Tree. A shortcut menu appears. Click Info > Model.

To display parent/child information, information about features, or information about parts, you can right-click a part in the Model Tree and in the shortcut menu, click Feature, Model, or Parent/Child. You can use the other commands in the Info menu to do the following: Obtain mass properties of the assembly such as volume, center of gravity, and moments of inertia.

217

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Obtain names of files created in the current working session. Obtain measure information. Obtain information about features and parts. Obtain parent/child information. Obtain layer information concerning the entire assembly, any subassembly, or a component part. Regenerate the part, giving information about each feature. Generate a Bill of Materials. Show surface properties with color representation. Show curve properties with color representation. Show audit trail information about a specified model.

For information about the Info menu, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.

To Review Assembly Instructions for a Component

Using the Comp Info command, you can access assembly instructions for individual components. 1. Select Info > Component to display the Component Constraints dialog box. 2. Select a component. The constraints for that component appear in the Component Constraints dialog box. 3. Select a constraint from the list in the dialog box. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the corresponding model geometry in magenta and cyan. 4. Click Apply to display an information window with detailed assembly placement constraint information for the selected component. 5. Click Close to exit the Component Constraints dialog box.

To Check Clearance
In Assembly mode, you can check clearances and interferences between parts, as well as between any two surfaces within the assembly. Note: Exploded views are only cosmetic and have no effect on clearance computations. The displayed results in such cases correspond to an unexploded model. 1. Click Analysis > Model Analysis to open the Model Analysis dialog box. 2. Select one of the following options from the Type list: o o 218 Mass Properties X-section Mass Properties

Assembly o o o o o o o

Pairs Clearance Global Clearance Volume Interference Global Interference Short Edge Edge Type Thickness

Setting Advanced Clearance Checking

You can control the calculation accuracy that Pro/ENGINEER uses for clearance checks. The system's default method of clearance checking is to check for a local minimum at random points. You can specify a slower but more accurate method of checking for clearance and distance measures, whereby the system computes the high quality first guess based on refined triangulation. With this method, the system facets the surfaces of the model (with a quality that is proportional to the configuration file option value setting), and checks for a local minimum at each triangle point. To perform more accurate analysis on pairs clearance, use the clearance_triangulation configuration file option settings: nonechecks for a local minimum at random points (the default) lowcorresponds to a 7 x 7 minimum grid on a surface mediumcorresponds to a 14 x 14 minimum grid on a surface highcorresponds to a 21 x 21 minimum grid on a surface

Note: These settings affect performance and may not be acceptable for very large assemblies. Clearance interference calculations using these settings take 50 to 150 times longer than default clearance checking calculations.

About Entering Relations in Assembly

You can add relations to parts or between parts within an assembly. Relations in Assembly follow the standard rules for relations except that you must first specify the model to which relations apply. This can be the main assembly, a subassembly, or a part. Once specified, all relation operations apply only to the specified model. For example, if the specified model is a part, the system shows only dimensions of the part in the assembly. The notation you use to enter relations in Assembly differs from the notation you use to enter relations in Part mode. In Assembly, for each assembly parameter, you must specify a session_ID that refers to a component in the assembly. The relations file contains a table that specifies the session ID for each part. 219

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

For example, parameters in an assembly appear for part with session_ID 1 as d0:1, d1:1, and d2:1; for part with session_ID 3, they appear as d0:3, d1:3, and d2:3. If you select a part in Assembly mode, you can enter the part relations either in Part format (d0 = 2*d1) or in Assembly format (d0:3 = 2*d1:3). When using relations to relate parts within assemblies, keep in mind the following: If the relation drives a part that is a member of the assembly, it does so only in the context of the assembly. (In Part mode, you can modify the driven value if the assembly containing the relation is not in memory.) You can use assembly relations to drive dimensions only on dimensions driven by a family table. You cannot add or edit an assembly relation that tries to drive a parameter that a part relation is already driving. If you add a part relation that drives the same parameter as one that already exists in an assembly relation, the new part relation drives the parameter, but the system displays an error message during the assembly regeneration.

About Using an Assembly Bill of Materials (BOM)

The Bill of Materials (BOM) provides a listing of all parts and parameters in the current assembly. The BOM and mass properties for the assembly are always based on the Master Representation and the components in the Master Representation. You can customize the BOM by doing either of the following: Customize the text output format for a particular form of presentation and content. Use Pro/REPORT to create the BOM in table format in drawings.

In the assembly BOM, you must still list nongeometric assembly features that do not have representable geometry such as glue, paint, and solder (referred to as "bulk items"). BOM and Mass Properties Behavior in Skeletons When working with a skeleton model in an assembly, Pro/ENGINEER generates Bill of Materials (BOM) information and mass properties information that accurately reflects the design models and either the default or user-specified mass properties. However, the assembly BOM and assembly mass properties ignore skeleton models entirely when working on parts. BOM and Mass Properties Behavior in Master Representations To obtain the full BOM or the mass properties of the Master Representation while working with a simplified representation, you must switch to the Master Representation. Pro/ENGINEER includes included components in mass property calculations because they are in session. It does not include excluded components unless they are in session. Mass properties only reflect what is currently on the screen. The BOM lists all components of assemblies that are in session. Unless the 220

Assembly

Master Representation is in session, the BOM is not accurate. Pro/PDM provides the full BOM without retrieval of objects. In Pro/REPORT, the BOM is available only when you retrieve an assembly as the Master Representation. For substituted objects, Pro/ENGINEER has access to the names of both the original object and the substituted object. The mass properties of the substituted component are available because the component is in session. If they have been assigned through Interchange mode, the mass properties of the original object are available in the substituted component.

About Showing Dimensions in Part and Assembly

You can use Show Dim in the RELATIONS menu in both Part and Assembly to enter a dimension in the symbolic format. The system displays the dimension in symbolic format for the model with the given session_ID. You can identify the session_ID in either of two ways: Select a feature in the model to show dimensions; then choose Switch Dim. In the RELATIONS menu, choose Component Id; then select the component. The system displays the session ID of the component in the message window.

The terms session ID, runtime ID, coding symbol, and component ID are all equivalent.

Assembly Family Tables

About Assembly Family Tables An assembly Family Table represents the design optional deviations, or a family of similar assemblies. All items that can be added to the part family table can also be added to the assembly family table. In addition, you can add assembly components to the assembly family table. You can assign simplified representations to assembly family table instances. Each component in the assembly model is displayed according to its simplified representation status. Use the Replace command to substitute instances from the same assembly family table. The following rules apply: Every member entry must contain a Y indicating that the member is present, an N indicating that it is absent, or the actual name of a replacement member. When a member is omitted from an instance of an assembly, it is still placed in the instance. This ensures that other parts attached to it can still be placed. However, the omitted member is not displayed, nor is it considered during mass property calculations. Members being replaced with one another in an instance must be interchangeable. That is, they must be instances from the same part or assembly family, or they must both be included in the same interchange group. Otherwise, Pro/ENGINEER can not position the replacement member automatically; you have to position it manually. Note, too, that relationships between parts may need updating. 221

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

If the instances of a family of assemblies use instances of other families as components, and the names of the component instances are entered in the Family Table of the assembly, the names of the component instances must be present in an instance index file in order to be assembled. This also applies to component instances for which the generic models are members of an interchangeability group.

Values of Family Table Component Items Instances of assemblies differ from their generics in the values of their Family Tabledriven items. The item that is specific to assemblies is the member, or component, item. In the instance cell of a component item, in a Family Table, you may specify the following two categories of values: Boolean value, which has the following possible values: o o o YResume even if suppressed at the generic NSuppress even if resumed at the generic *Whatever is in the generic

Namea solid name. If that solid is a generic, and it is to be replaced through Family Table, the solid of the component of the generic. o o o If that solid is not a table-driven solid assembly or part, you can simply retrieve it and replace it in the generic. If that solid is a generic, you are asked if you want an instance of that generic. If that solid is an instance name, the instance index file is searched to determine if that solid is listed. If so, it is retrieved.

Note: Pro/ENGINEER refers first to the solids in session, even if they have no solid file, and their instances are visible even if there is no .idx file. About Working with Assembly Family Instances There are several points to remember when modifying instances of an assembly family. The generic assembly serves as the template for all instances; all of its components, assembly features, assembly dimensions, and characteristics are copied once each time an instance is activated. Then, when the instance is regenerated, components and features are blanked or substituted and dimensions are modified as indicated by the table. You can modify parts in, and independently of, any assembly instance. There are two ways of modifying an assembly instance: Edit its Family Table. You can change a table dimension, turn an assembly feature or component on or off, or replace a component. Change it while it is in session in the active window. Then, when the instance is regenerated, the system automatically updates the generic geometry and Family Table.

222

Assembly

You must observe the following rules when you are creating or using assembly families: If an instance of an assembly is in the active window and you assemble a component or add an assembly feature, that component or assembly feature is added as a new item in the assembly Family Table, but only for that particular instance. It is suppressed for the generic and all other instances. You cannot directly substitute components that are listed in the Family Table of the instance. To substitute a component, you must edit the Family Table and replace the component for the instance.

Replacing Assembly Components in the Assembly Instance You can replace a component in an assembly Family Table with another component under the following conditions: Both components belong to the same family. Both components belong to the same interchange assembly. Both components have declarations to the same Pro/NOTEBOOK layout.

Assembling Instances Automatically Using Pro/NOTEBOOK The automatic assembly of family members using Pro/NOTEBOOK requires a special procedure. You cannot make global declarations for the family instances. Instead, you can have Pro/ENGINEER transfer declarations from the generic part to the instances. To do this, you must retrieve the generic part and make the necessary global declarations before assembling an instance. Note: You can declare items only if no family instances are active in the current session. To Create a Family of Assemblies Create the generic assembly. 1. Click Tools > Family Table. The Family Table dialog box opens.

2. Click

or Insert > Columns. The Family Items dialog box opens.

3. Under Add Item, click Component. The Select dialog box opens. 4. Select the required component to add to the family table and click OK. 5. Click OK in the Family Items dialog box to accept your changes.

or Insert > Instance Row. Add as many 6. In the Family Table, click instances as you want. Each row is added after the current, highlighted row. You

223

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

can also select a cell in the last row and press ENTER to add a row to the end of the table. 7. Initially, all new cells contain asterisks (*), which means they take their value from the generic model. 8. Enter names and values in the cells to define the instances. Example: An Assembly Family Table ! Generic assembly name: ! IDENTIFICATION ! --------------! GENERIC MOD11 MOD12 MOD13 MOD1 M0004 BOLT1 Y * PIC BOLT2

Using Part Family Members in an Assembly Part families are especially convenient to use in assemblies. From a single part file, you can assemble multiple instances and multiple occurrences of each instance in multiple assemblies. If you have a Assembly license, instances from the same family can be exchanged with each other when you use the Edit > Replace command. After an instance of a family has been assembled, it can be replaced automatically with any other instance in the same family, if the replacement instance has all of the necessary features for assembling (that is, no features used in the assembly process are suppressed). To Substitute a Component with an Instance from its Family Table in a Simplified Representation To substitute one instance with another in a simplified representation: 1. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. The Simp Rep tab is selected by default. 2. Click New to create a new simplified representation. 3. Click Properties. 4. Select the component that you want to substitute with an instance and click The Family Tree dialog box opens. .

224

Assembly

5. Select an instance with which you wish to substitute the component and click OK. Alternatively, after you click New to create a new simplified representation, you can, 1. Click Edit > Redefine. The EDIT: REP dialog box opens. 2. Click the Substitute tab. 3. Under Method, click By Model. You are prompted to select a component to substitute with in the simplified representation. The Family Table option under Select Model is selected. 4. Click Browse. The Family Tree dialog box opens. 5. Select an instance with which you wish to substitute the component and click OK. Alternatively, you can also substitute an instance using the following method: 1. Select the component in the model tree for which instances exist in the family table. 2. Click View > Substitute > Family Table. The Family Tree dialog box opens. 3. Select the instance with which you want to substitute the component and click OK. The selected component is substituted with the new instance in a simplified representation. To Replace a Reference Model of a Merge or Inheritance Feature With a Family Instance 1. Click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The dashboard for Merge or Inheritance appears. 2. Select a reference model from the current assembly in the collector and click . 3. Select the reference model, right-click, and click Edit Definition. The dashboard for Merge or Inheritance appears. 4. Right-click in the collector and click Replace. The Family Tree dialog box opens. 5. Select the instance with which you want to replace the referenced part and click . The model is regenerated. To Replace a Component with an Instance from its Family Table 1. Click Edit > Replace. The Replace dialog box opens. Alternatively, select the component or instance graphically, right-click, and click Replace. The Replace dialog box opens. The Select Current Component(s) and Select New Component collectors are active. 2. Select the component that you want to replace with an instance from its family table in the Select Current Component(s) box. 225

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Note: You can select multiple components to be replaced with the new component or instances. 3. Select the instance that you want to replace the component with from its family table in the Select New Component box. The Family Tree dialog box opens. 4. If you have replaced a component earlier, the Last Used check box becomes available. A list of previously used new components is available only for the current session. Select a previously used new component in the Select New Component box. 5. Select the required family table instance and click OK. The model is regenerated and the selected component is replaced with the family table instance. To Replace Assembly Components in the Assembly Instance 1. Click Tools > Family Table. The Family Table dialog box opens. 2. Select the cell that contains the model you want to replace. 3. Click Tools > Replace Using. 4. Select one of the following: o o o Family MemberReplace the selected component model with another model that belongs to the same family. Interchange AssemblyReplace the selected component model with another model that belongs to the same interchange assembly. Related ModelReplace the selected component model with any related component or non-family table model that has same layouts declared.

A window appears that lists all the available models. 5. Select a model. Its name appears in the selected cell of the Family Table. To Automatically Update References to Assembly Instances If some of your table-driven components have assembly references, in an assembly instance these references should be redirected from the generic assembly to the current instance. Do this by adding the reference model into the Family Tables of the corresponding component models. The manual update of the external references of the assembly members in instances requires the editing of a number of Family Tables of different models. In many cases, this process can be automated. 1. Click Tools > Family Table. The Family Table dialog box opens. 2. In the Family Table dialog box, click Tools > Switch External References to Instances. 3. The system analyzes all table-driven assembly members to identify those which have references to the generic assembly. The Update References dialog box

226

Assembly

opens. The components which have external references will be listed and those references will be proposed as new instances. 4. Select OK to add the reference model into the Family Table. Example: Automatically Updating References to Assembly Instances There is a generic assembly AB, which contains the components A and B. Component B has no instances. Component A has a Family Table with five instances in it. Assembly AB has five instances corresponding to the instances in component A. You can automatically update component B, so that it will have a Family Table containing instances to correspond to assembly AB. 1. From the Family Table dialog box in assembly AB, select Tools > Switch External References to Instances. 2. The system analyzes all the table-driven assembly members to identify those which have references to the generic assembly. It finds that component B has a reference. The Update References dialog box opens and suggests adding instances B01 through B05 to component B. 3. Click OK. The system automatically adds a column titled Reference Model into the Family Table for component B and populates the five new instances. To Assemble an Instance Automatically Using Pro/NOTEBOOK 1. Open the generic part in Part mode and make the necessary global declarations. 2. Make sure that the other assembly members have the appropriate global declarations. 3. Assemble the instance in Assembly mode. Example: Family of Assemblies The following figure shows a family of assemblies representing two parts connected by various types of fasteners:

To Replace Assembly Components in the Assembly Instance 1. Click Tools > Family Table. The Family Table dialog box opens. 2. Select the cell that contains the model you want to replace. 3. Click Tools > Replace Using.

227

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Select one of the following: o o o Family MemberReplace the selected component model with another model that belongs to the same family. Interchange AssemblyReplace the selected component model with another model that belongs to the same interchange assembly. Related ModelReplace the selected component model with any related component or non-family table model that has same layouts declared.

A window appears that lists all the available models. 5. Select a model. Its name appears in the selected cell of the Family Table. To Configure Components of an Assembly Instance When defining instances of an assembly, you can make it easy to replace components in instances at different levels of the assembly. 1. In the Family Table dialog box, select a cell in the row for the instance that you want to configure. 2. Click Tools > Configure Assembly Components. The Assembly Instance Configurator dialog box opens. 3. Define which components should be replaced in the assembly instance and which assembly references should be updated to its context. 4. Click OK. The component will automatically be updated in Family Tables of all affected models, and update external references upon the retrieval of the instance. Controlling Assembly Family Table Instance Retrieval Use the retrieve_instance_dependencies configuration option to determine what set of objects are loaded into session when retrieving Family Table instances. By default, the configuration option value is set to instance_req_generic. In this case family table instances are retrieved with any generic models that are required for regeneration. This option maintains instance stability while saving system resources and improving performance.

Mirroring Assemblies
About Mirroring Assemblies Using the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box, you can create mirrored copies of assemblies and store them in new assembly files. This choice eliminates the need to mirror each component manually and is especially useful for symmetric models.

228

Assembly

When creating a mirrored assembly you can manipulate source components as follows: Copy the source component with a new name (default) Control the geometric and placement dependencies of mirrored components on the source components Exclude the source component from the mirroring operation Reuse the source component in the mirror assembly

By default, all the components of the source assembly are included in the mirrored assembly and are given a default name. You can define a renaming convention and change the names of the source components to fit your needs. The default renaming convention is the old name appended with a default suffix. You can change the suffix and apply it to selected components, and create a template for other renaming conventions. Note: When mirroring assemblies, plane selection is not required. Assembly mirrors are automatically performed about the XY plane. To Mirror an Assembly 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click File > Mirror Assembly. The Mirror Assembly dialog box opens. 3. Click Geometry Dependent to toggle the geometric dependency of the mirrored assembly to that of the source assembly. 4. Enter a name for the mirrored assembly in the New Name box and click OK. The Mirror Assembly Components dialog box opens. Rename target components as follows: o o o View the mirrored assembly as a tree-like hierarchy. Select components to be excluded during mirroring. Select components to be left unmirrored, thus reusing the source model.

5. Click OK. The mirrored assembly is loaded into session. Note: To save the mirrored assembly, click File > Save or the object will be discarded when Pro/ENGINEER is closed.

Top Down Design

Skeleton Models About Skeleton Models in Top-Down Design
Skeleton models capture and define design intent and product structure. Skeletons allow designers to pass along essential design information from one subsystem or 229

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

assembly to another. This essential design information is either master definitions of geometry or copied geometry from designs defined elsewhere. Any changes made to a skeleton change its components as well. The use of a top-level skeleton model allows you to control the following information from a central, top-level location (from the top down): Product structure Locations of interfaces between components 3D space claims Connections and mechanisms

Individual skeleton models can be used to build the components from the bottom up. This method ensures a robust design with the design information communicated smoothly throughout the assembly.

About Skeleton Models

When you use a skeleton model, you set the design and motion intent at the beginning of the design process for a part or subassembly. A skeleton model, placed in the assembly and propagated with it, can be developed independent of the assembly and inserted seamlessly at any time. A skeleton model can be used in more than one assembly. A skeleton model can be created at any time in the design process. The system always lists and regenerates the newly created skeleton model before all the other components and assembly features. There are two types of skeleton models: standard skeleton models and motion skeleton models. Standard skeleton models are created in an open assembly as parts. Motion skeleton models are subassemblies that contain design skeletons (standard skeletons or internal sketches) and body skeletons. Skeletons are created using curves, surfaces, and datum features. They can also include solid geometry. Although skeletons models can only be created in an assembly, they can be retrieved, manipulated, and saved as ordinary parts (standard skeleton models) or assemblies (motion skeleton models). Body skeletons are automatically saved as parts when they are created. Before creating a skeleton model, consider the following points: Only one motion skeleton can be created or inserted in an assembly. Multiple standard skeletons can be created in an assembly when the multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration option is set to yes. A skeleton model is similar to any other assembly component. It has features, layers, relations, views, bodies, and so on. External reference control settings can be used to restrict geometry and assembly placement references to skeleton models only (Edit > Setup > Ref Control > Skeleton Model). These options control references for all skeletons in the assembly.

230

Assembly

Skeleton models can maintain their own family tables. This means that assemblies can maintain different skeleton instances across a family table. All simplified representation functionality available in Part and Assembly mode is available for skeleton models (beginning with Pro/ENGINEER 2001). Skeleton models can be selected By Rule when managing simplified representations.

Skeleton models do not show up in the BOM unless you specifically include them (Info > Bill of Materials). They do not contribute to mass or surface properties. They can be displayed in drawing views and can be included during the creation and manipulation of simplified representations and external shrinkwrap features. Skeleton parts and motion skeletons are placed in the Model Tree before components with solid geometry. Because the functional characteristics of skeletons are different from other components, they are identified in the Model Tree and Mechanism Design Model Tree by: Standard skeletons and body skeletons Motion skeletons Note: Skeleton models created prior to Release 20.0 are blue by default. This color cannot be changed. Starting with Release 20.0, a component color is set only to the model, not to the component. You can create a user-defined color to display new skeleton models.

About Standard Skeleton Models

Standard skeletons are parts created to define the design intent of a component in an assembly. A standard skeleton created in one assembly can be used in another assembly when it is assembled using independent references. Whether you create or insert a standard skeleton before or after creating additional components, the system inserts the newly created skeleton as the first component. It is listed in the Model Tree and regenerated before all other components and assembly features. Standard skeletons establish 3D physical constraints. The resulting geometric information of size and location can then be incorporated into individual components, establishing common geometric information. You can use a standard skeleton to represent the interface between two components. There are two major reasons to do this: Sharing informationFor instance, the design includes two parts that are attached by bolts. A skeleton part consisting of a hole pattern can be mirrored on both parts, thus ensuring the same pattern on both. Changes made to the skeleton part are automatically propagated to both of the parts. The skeleton part can be reused in another assembly to guarantee a company-wide standard. Improved design stabilityA skeleton can represent the interface between components in the assembly. When a design has multiple configurations, the

231

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

skeleton can contain all necessary placement definitions for its components. Components are assembled relative to the skeleton to ensure there is no intercomponent dependency for placement references. Skeleton models, like regular components, can be replaced by both family table instances and other skeleton parts. When you replace a skeleton part By Copy, the copied part becomes a skeleton part as well. When a regular part or component is replaced using By Copy, the new copy can be made a skeleton. A skeleton is necessary when the copied component is the first assembly feature and is placed by default. Because a standard skeleton behaves differently from regular parts, it is not affected by assembly level features. Assembly features such as cuts and holes do not intersect skeleton model geometry. If you want to intersect a skeleton model with a cut, right-click to select the skeleton model in the Model Tree and choose Activate from the shortcut menu. Create the cut or hole local to the skeleton model. Pro/REPORT recognizes skeleton models as a type of assembly member (asm.mbr.type), so they can be filtered accordingly. You can use skeleton models in a report to obtain additional information about the model, as well as to obtain a name of an indexed drawing. With a skeleton model, you can create references between components in a subassembly as well as create references to the skeleton model itself, with the following restrictions: A part that references a skeleton model only informs Pro/PDM that it references the assembly, not the skeleton model. A skeleton model with an external reference only knows that it refers to an assembly that contains both itself and the referenced model. Pro/PDM cannot identify the referenced model. To fully regenerate a component (in a subassembly with a skeleton model) that references another component in the same subassembly, you must retrieve both the components and the subassembly.

To Create a Standard Skeleton Model

1. In an active assembly, click or Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Accept the default name or enter a new one. 3. Select Skeleton Model from the Type list and Standard from the Sub-type list. 4. Click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 5. Choose a Creation Method: o Copy From ExistingCopy the skeleton part from an existing part. Click Browse to select the part to copy.

232

Assembly o o

EmptyCreate a skeleton part with no geometry. Geometry is added after the skeleton part is created. Create FeaturesCreate a skeleton part with no geometry. The skeleton part is active when you quit the dialog box.

6. Click OK. 7. If you used one of the first two creation methods, right-click the new skeleton part and choose Activate from the shortcut menu. 8. Create geometry for the part.

About Motion Skeleton Models

A motion skeleton defines movement between bodies in an assembly. Motion skeletons are subassemblies created in an active assembly or subassembly. They contain skeleton bodies that move in relation to each other the way the bodies they represent will move in the finished assembly. The use of motion skeletons enables the capture of a Mechanism assembly's conceptual design. The basic structure and kinematics of a design can be tested in the motion skeleton before actual assembly components are created. A motion skeleton model includes a design skeleton, skeleton bodies, and predefined constraint sets. The design skeleton can be an existing skeleton model or an internal sketch with newly created geometry. Body skeletons are components created from the entities of the design skeleton, then placed in the motion skeleton with predefined constraint sets. As is the case in all Mechanism assemblies, the first body in a motion skeleton model is the ground body. As more body skeletons are created and placed, the system automatically creates datum axes to connect them. These axes appear in the Model Tree in the Group Motion_Axis folder. Use the Component Placement dashboard to place the body skeleton manually. Skeleton bodies provide the framework for component design. The system treats them as parts and they have most of the features of regular parts. A skeleton body can be opened independently of the assembly, as a part and be used as a base feature for component design. The motion skeleton model automatically updates to incorporate the newly created features. Mechanism Design recognizes a motion skeleton model as an assembly, allowing you to define and run all mechanism features.

To Create a Motion Skeleton Model

1. In an open assembly, click or Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Accept the default name or enter a new one. 3. Select Skeleton Model from the Type list and Motion from the Sub-type list. 4. Click OK. The Creation Options dialog box opens. 233

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

5. Select a Creation Method: o o o Copy From ExistingCopy the motion skeleton geometry from an existing skeleton model. Click Browse to select the model to copy. EmptyCreate a motion skeleton with no geometry. Geometry is added after the motion skeleton is created. Create FeaturesCreate a motion skeleton with no geometry. The motion skeleton is active when you quit the dialog box.

6. Click OK.

About Creating Geometry for a Motion Skeleton Model

Before creating a design skeleton for a motion skeleton, you must create geometry references. Use the Datum Coordinate System tool to create a coordinate system and the Datum Plane tool to create datum planes for the motion skeleton. Enter Sketcher to design your mechanism by sketching entities that will create the geometry. When you exit Sketcher, the sketched entities become separate curve entities. These curves are used as the body skeletons that define the body structure of the mechanism. You must select entities from the design skeleton to create a body skeleton. The entities selected must be sufficient to define a Mechanism body. The body skeleton geometry is therefore, an External Copied Geometry feature of the design skeleton. Bodies so created are placed in relation to one another with predefined sets. A predefined constraint set (pin, slider, cylinder, ball, bearing) is automatically defined based on the selected geometry and sketching assumptions. Motion axes are automatically created. Other predefined constraint sets can be manually configured on the Component Placement dashboard.

To Create a Design Skeleton

1. Right-click the motion skeleton in the Model Tree and choose Activate from the shortcut menu. 2. Click or Insert > Model Datum > Coordinate System. The Coordinate System dialog box opens. 3. Select the assembly coordinate system as a reference. 4. Enter X, Y, and Z offset values. 5. Click OK. 6. Click or Insert > Model Datum > Datum Plane. The Datum Plane dialog box opens. 7. Select references and an offset value if required. It is good practice to use the newly created coordinate system as the reference. 8. Choose the translation from the Translation list. 234

Assembly

9. Click OK. 10. Repeat steps 69 to create at least three datum planes. 11. Click or Insert > Model Datum > Sketch to enter Sketcher.

12. Select references at the prompt. 13. Sketch entities to create geometry for the motion skeleton. 14. Click to accept the sketch and quit Sketcher.

To Create a Body Skeleton

1. Create a motion skeleton if none exists. 2. In the Model Tree, right-click the newly created, or an existing motion skeleton, and choose Activate from the shortcut menu. 3. Create or insert a design skeleton in the motion skeleton. or Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create dialog 4. Click box opens. 5. Select Skeleton Model from the Type list and Body from the Sub-type list. 6. Click OK. The Creations Options dialog box opens. 7. Select a Creation Method: o o Copy From ExistingCopy the body skeleton geometry from an existing skeleton part in the assembly. Click Browse to select the part to copy. EmptyCreate a body skeleton with no geometry.

8. Click OK. The Body Definition dialog box opens. 9. Select one or more chains in the motion skeleton to define the part geometry. 10. Click Details to open the Chain dialog box. Note: For more information on chains, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. 11. Click More to expand the dialog box to select Surface Sets and Misc Refs. The Misc Refs collector will contain motion axis and datum plane references after the body is created. 12. Click Details to open the Surface Sets dialog box. Note: For more information on surface sets, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. 13. Click the Use connections in placement definition check box and click Update. Connection definitions appear in the table. There are no connection

235

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

definitions for the first body created. It is created with a default constraint as a ground body. 14. To change the type of connection, click the relevant cell in the table and select a different connection from the list. 15. Check the Invoke component placement dialog check box to edit the placement definition in the Component Placement dashboard. 16. Click .

Tip: Specify a Default Layer Name for Skeleton Models

Skeleton models can be added automatically to a default layer, so you can select them and modify their display by layer. To specify a default layer name for skeleton models, set the def_layer configuration file option value to layer_skeleton_model. The automatically created layer contains a rule that includes any skeleton model.

To Create a Display Color for Skeleton Models

Use the configuration option skeleton_model_default_color <RGB color values> to set a user-defined default color for the display of new skeleton models. Enter three decimal values from 0100 to specify the percentages of red, green, and blue (in this order) in the resulting color. You can redefine the configuration color at any time. The color applies only to newly created skeletons. Use View > Color and Appearance to change the color of the skeleton in session even after a configuration color has been set.

Display Colors for a Skeleton Model

The color of a new skeleton is controlled as follows: Default color blueDisplays the new skeleton in blue. User-defined configuration colorApplies your configuration color to all new skeletons, including those created by copying a part or skeleton with no userdefined color set. Source part colorApplies the source part or skeleton (whether or not you have defined a configuration color) when you create a skeleton by copying from a part or skeleton with a user-defined color.

When you assemble an existing skeleton model, its color does not change to a new one set by your configuration option. The skeleton already has a color, and the model is already referenced. Note: Once a display color is set, you can override it by changing the color of the skeleton model.

236

Assembly

Data Sharing Shrinkwrap Features

About Shrinkwrap Features A Shrinkwrap feature is a collection of surfaces and datums that represents the exterior shape of a model. You can use a part, a skeleton, or a top-level assembly as the source model for a Shrinkwrap feature. By default, the system automatically analyzes all components in the assembly and determines which ones will be included in the Shrinkwrap. However, you can select specific components for shrinkwrap consideration while ignoring others. The Shrinkwrap feature is created in the object that is currently being modified. All created geometry appears in the modified object. The system captures source geometry by using surfaces, datum geometry, and such customized attributes as hole filling, and quilt inclusion, according to your specifications. Note: Shrinkwrap features do not copy geometry from the level on which they are created. Shrinkwrap features conserve system resources because they include only the exterior shape of a model. Shrinkwraps of subassemblies can be useful for the manipulation of large assemblies since they reduce the memory space required for working on the source parent assembly. To Create a Shrinkwrap Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly or a part. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap. The Shrinkwrap dashboard appears with the top-level assembly as the reference model. Note: All dashboard elements are optional. You can automatically create a Shrinkwrap feature containing default shrinkwrap information by clicking .

3. To include or exclude assembly components in the Shrinkwrap, define a subset. 4. Click References and select additional shrinkwrap references: o o o o Always include surfacesInclude selected surface sets. Never include surfacesExclude selected surfaces. Include DatumsInclude selected datums. EditInclude selected annotation features.

5. Click Options to define shrinkwrap settings: o Shrinkwrap then Exclude (default)Analyze the entire assembly to identify external surfaces. Only surfaces that belong to the selected components are included in the resulting Shrinkwrap feature (used with subsets).

237

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o o o o

Exclude then ShrinkwrapBase the Shrinkwrap only on the selected components (used with subsets). LevelEnter a value (110) for the shrinkwrap quality level. The default setting is 1. The higher the quality, the higher the processing time. Auto Hole FillingFill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface. Include QuiltsInclude external quilts. Although quilt surfaces are considered for inclusion, not all are automatically included in the Shrinkwrap. Ignore Small SurfacesExclude surfaces smaller than the specified value (percentage of the model's size). Enter a whole number (0 is the default) to specify the relative size of the surface to be ignored. DependentSet geometry dependency of the Shrinkwrap feature. The Shrinkwrap feature is dependent, by default, on the source components. If the size or position of the original component are changed, the Shrinkwrap feature updates accordingly. to complete the Shrinkwrap feature.

6. Click

To Define a Component Subset 1. Retrieve an assembly or a part. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap. The Shrinkwrap dashboard appears with the top-level assembly as the reference model. 3. To include or exclude assembly components in the Shrinkwrap, click Subset. The Subset dialog box opens. Perform the following tasks: o Specify how the system handles the component subset. Click One-by-one to consider components or By Envelope to consider existing envelopes instead. When the One-by-one option is selected, you can choose to ignore or consider selected components. Select components from the Model Tree or the graphics window. Component status is displayed in the Shrinkwrap Comps column in the Model Tree.

Note: Use the Search Tool dialog box (Edit > Find) to select items by feature, attribute, and so forth. 4. Click Options and determine subset options as follows: o Shrinkwrap then Exclude (default)Shrinkwrap the entire assembly and use the surface subsets from the selected components only. This option allows you to create multiple Shrinkwrap features with different quality settings. You can accurately represent the interface points of complex designs, and less accurately (and more quickly) create looser representations of less interesting areas of the design.

238

Assembly o

Exclude then ShrinkwrapBuild the Shrinkwrap feature based on selected components only. The result is similar to creating a simplified representation of a component and then converting it into a Shrinkwrap.

Shrinkwrap Associativity Shrinkwrap features are associative and automatically update to reflect changes in the parent copied surfaces. Shrinkwrap features are updated when components have been added or removed. You can control the dependency of the Shrinkwrap feature on the surfaces it references. The independent state is useful if you wish to avoid unwanted regeneration cycles. To Update a Shrinkwrap Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly, or a part, and create a shrinkwrap feature. 2. Select the Shrinkwrap feature from the Model Tree. 3. Right-click and choose Update Shrinkwrap from the shortcut menu. Updating a Shrinkwrap Feature When you redefine the Shrinkwrap feature, it is automatically recreated, reflecting the changes in the reference model. During the re-creation process the options that affect the external surface collection (quality level, include/exclude quilts, hole filling, ignore small surfaces, component subset, and subset options) are analyzed. Surfaces that are removed as a result of component addition or removal are deleted from the feature. Consequently some Shrinkwrap feature children may fail. Note: When the Shrinkwrap feature is defined as independent or when reference models are unavailable (not in session or unavailable in the current simplified representation), such references are frozen. To Create an External Shrinkwrap Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly or a part. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap. The Shrinkwrap dashboard appears with the top-level assembly as the reference model. 3. Click o o . The Placement dialog box opens. Set the following options: Click Default to position the Shrinkwrap feature in the current model using default internal coordinate systems. Click Coord Sys to position the Shrinkwrap feature aligned to local and external coordinate systems.

Note: A coordinate system can be created on the fly. If the reference model is an assembly, the coordinate system must be a feature of the top-level assembly (no part-level or subassembly-level coordinate systems are allowed). 4. Click OK to exit the Placement dialog box.

239

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Note: Click references.

to return to the Placement dialog box and change placement

to select a model located on disk or in session from which to copy 5. Click geometry. A warning message appears stating that the external model is about to change. Click Yes to continue. When selection is complete, the model appears in a new active window. Now define surface sets on the active component from which to copy geometry. 6. Click to complete the Shrinkwrap feature.

External Shrinkwrap Features Shrinkwrap features reference surfaces and datums within the assembly context, whereas external Shrinkwrap features reference geometry from an external model (part, skeleton, or assembly) specified during creation. Shrinkwrap features can be redefined as external Shrinkwraps at any time, however, the process is irreversible. You can create an external Shrinkwrap feature in one of the following model types: An envelope A part An empty component

To Redefine Shrinkwrap References 1. Retrieve an assembly or a part. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap. The Shrinkwrap dashboard appears with the top-level assembly as the reference model. 3. Click References in the Shrinkwrap dashboard to include Shrinkwrap references: o o o Always include surfaces Never include surfaces Include Datums

4. Click Details to view or edit defined surface sets. The Surface Sets dialog box opens. 5. Select a surface, right-click, and choose one of the following options: o o o RemoveRemove the selected item from the list. Remove AllClear the list. InformationOpen the Information window.

Note: To insert a rule-based surface set, click Add, select a surface, and define a rule. 6. Click OK. 240

Assembly

To Preview Current References 1. Retrieve an assembly or a part. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap. The Shrinkwrap dashboard appears with the top-level assembly as the reference model. 3. Click References in the Shrinkwrap dashboard. 4. Click Details to view the surface sets and datum list. The References dialog box opens. 5. Click OK. To Break Shrinkwrap Dependency 1. Retrieve an assembly or a part. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap. The Shrinkwrap dashboard appears with the top-level assembly as the reference model. 3. Click Options in the Shrinkwrap dashboard. 4. Toggle between dependent and independent states: o Click Dependent (if the check box is active) to break a dependency. The relationship between the current feature and the original geometry is temporarily suspended. If the original part changes, the current feature does not change. Click the Dependent check box again to reestablish dependency.

Merge and Inheritance Features

Merge Features About Merging Components Use Merge to add or subtract the material of one part to or from another part, after they have been placed in an assembly. By default, when merge is performed material is added from the source part into a target part. If the remove material option is used, source part material is subtracted from a target part. Note: When the parts being merged have different accuracies, a message is displayed indicating the accuracy of the target part (up to a maximum of six decimal places). To undo or remove merges or cutouts, delete the merge/cutout features from the source part. If you merge parts using Merge, mirroring geometry, or adding assembly features, the system does not show the geometric tolerances attached to the merged model dimensions in Drawing mode.

241

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Example: Removing Material Using Merge

1. 2. 3. 4.

Source part Target part The parts explicitly assembled Source part after deleting/suppressing the target part

Example: Creating a Merged Part To create the example shown, assemble Part A and then merge it with Part B. The features of Part B regenerate first, and then intersect with the features of Part A to form the merged part.

242

Assembly

The Through All hole and cut that were copied do not extend through the original surfaces of Part A. Whenever a solid portion of one part intersects with a void portion of another part (for example, a hole or cut), these areas are automatically filled. However, if you now create a Through All hole in the new Part A, it penetrates all features, regardless of origin. You can merge merged parts with other parts, creating multiple subpart relationships.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Source part (A) Target part (B) Align Mate Merged part

To Merge Two Parts in an Assembly 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part, and click Edit > Activate. Note: The Merge feature will be created in the selected part. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can replace the reference model by selecting a different part from the Model Tree or graphics window.

243

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Define the Merge feature properties as follows: o o o o Add (default) or remove material geometry. Set reference type to assembly context (default). Set reference type to external (create an external Merge feature). Click References to define the following options: EditControl propagation of annotation features. Copy DatumsToggle datum copying from the original feature to the Merge feature. Note: You can copy datums only if the Dependent option is active. If the feature is independent, no datums are copied. Datums may be refited with existing geometry only. o Click Options to define the following: DependentMake the Merge feature dependent (default) or independent of the reference model. Dependent features update when changes are made in the reference part. An independent Merge feature will not update when the reference part is modified. Note: If a Merge feature is independent, you cannot externalize the feature. o 4. Click Click Properties to change Merge feature name. to complete the Merge feature.

Merge Restrictions The source part cannot be one of the following parts: An assembly datum plane A subassembly An instance of a generic part (copy the part instance to another name and use the copy) A sheetmetal part

The target part cannot be one of the following parts: An assembly datum plane A subassembly The same part as part 1 (itself) Part of an assembly pattern

244

Assembly

In addition, the following rules apply: If the target part references assembly components other than the source part, the assembly must be in session so that feature placement can be updated. After removing material, delete or suppress the source part to view the merge part. If you place the target part into the assembly using a Coord Sys placement constraint, all the assembly coordinate system references used for placement must belong to the source part. Parts must be explicitly assembled. A part cannot be used if it was assembled using packaging options. If you assemble a component that you have cut out to assembly datum planes, the system creates it without offset dimensions for component placement. If you apply shrinkage by dimension to the reference model used in a remove material procedure, the model containing the Merge feature does not reflect the shrinkage dimensions. Original dimensions are used (before shrinkage).

To Create an External Merge Feature 1. Create a merge feature and click MERGE dialog box opens. in the Merge dashboard. The EXTERNAL

2. Choose Default from the Constraints Type list to place the external merge feature in the default location or place it in a different location using a set of constraints. 3. Click to complete the feature placement. to change placement references.

Note: Click

4. Use the Options and Properties slide-up panels to define external merge feature properties. Note: Properties options are identical to standard merge features. 5. Click to complete the external merge feature.

To Merge Using Component Operations Note: You can merge or cutout multiple components simultaneously using this method. 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click Edit > Component Operations > Merge or Cut Out. Note: After you assemble components before performing a cutout procedure, hidden line removal may not function as you expect. If the assembly components physically intersect, one or both of them may not appear correctly. If this occurs, you have not placed them correctly. 245

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Select the parts where the Merge feature will be placed and click OK. 4. Select the reference parts and click OK. 5. For each iteration of steps 2 and 3, the OPTIONS menu appears. Choose the options for that specific combination of parts. o o o o ReferenceAssociate the created Merge feature and the reference part. When the reference part changes, the Merge feature changes. CopyCopy all the features and relations of the reference part into the Merge feature. No DatumsDo not include datums of the reference part in the Merge feature (available for merge by reference only). Copy DatumsInclude the datums belonging to the reference part in the Merge feature.

6. Choose Done from the OPTIONS menu, and Done from the Component menu. The Merge feature appears in the Model Tree. Follow the procedure below to edit the dimensions of a source part by changing the dimensions of a Merge feature that was created by reference. 1. In the Model Tree, right-click the created Merge feature, and select Edit from the shortcut menu. 2. Right-click in the graphics window as many times as necessary to get to the desired source feature. 3. Double-click to view the selected feature dimensions. 4. Edit dimensions as required. The dimensions are updated in both the Merge feature and the source part. Merging Using Component Operations A Merge feature can also be created from the Edit > Component Operations > Merge or Cut Out menu. Specify the component to which the Merge feature will be added, and then select the component to be merged into the first one. Merging by Reference A merge by reference creates an external reference between two Pro/ENGINEER objects similar to the Merge features produced by using Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. In this type of relationship the merged part is dependent on information in the referenced part. You can include names of datum entities from the reference model in the merged model. Layers and colors are automatically included. You can also create an external Merge feature that does not require placement in the same assembly to determine the orientation of the new Merge feature. The following rules apply for using the Reference option: The system reflects all changes to the referenced part in the merged part. You can replace a merged part by a Family Table instance.

246

Assembly

If the merged part placement is dependent on geometry that was deleted or suppressed, the system places the merged part using the last successful placement. A warning is displayed and feature placement cannot be updated. When the geometry reference is resumed, parametric placement is restored. If a reference part has been deleted or renamed, or the part does not exist in the current directory, the merged part is retrieved but is not regenerated. (If you attempted and failed to regenerate, choose Quick Fix from the FIX MODEL menu. Then click Suppress from the QUICK FIX menu to suppress the corresponding merge part.) To resolve the situation, locate and restore the referenced part. If a merged part is active in the current session, you can rename the referenced parts by clicking File > Rename. The merged part updates its references. You cannot delete the referenced parts from memory. The system copies cosmetic feature geometry in the target part to the source part. Surface features that are outside a model show up in the model when a cutout operation is performed on components in an assembly. When saving a merged part, or defining a user-defined feature, the system automatically saves the parts referenced by the merged part.

Merging Using Copy When you merge using the Copy command in the OPTIONS menu, you can modify all features of the merged part. The following rules apply: Except for placement references, you cannot reference features within a merged part to features outside that part. Therefore, when you modify the scheme of a merged part, only those features within one merge member are displayed in the window. The system adds the features of the target part (first selection) to the end of the feature list of the source part (second selection). As a result, when you set a feature of the target part as read-only, all the features of the source part become read-only as well. Features that have been merged using Copy cannot reference features that are outside of the merge group. If you try to merge a component with a part that has an imported feature, the Copy command is dimmed in the OPTIONS menu. If the first feature of a merge part is a user-defined feature or the result of using Copy in the Adv Comp Utl menu, the system automatically incorporates all associated features into the merge part.

Including Datums in Merge Features When you merge by reference, the No Datums and Copy Datums commands are available in the OPTIONS menu. You cannot modify included datums. When you cutout by reference, the system excludes datums. When you choose No Datums, the system excludes only datum planes from the merge. It merges datum axes, datum points, and coordinate systems. 247

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

When you merge using Copy, the system always copies datums, and they are added to the Merge feature. Inheritance Features About Inheritance Features Inheritance features allow one-way associative propagation of geometry and feature data from a reference part to a target part within an assembly. The created target part is fully functional even when the reference part is not in session. Use Inheritance features to create variations of existing models. An Inheritance feature begins with all of its geometry and data identical to the reference part from which it is derived. You can define the following varied items of an Inheritance feature: Dimension values, tolerances, and boundaries Geometry tolerances (part of Annotations) Parameters References Suppressed, resumed or erased state of features Annotations

Note: Varied item settings that are the same as the original model are identified with a in the Varied Items dialog box. You can add new varied items, redefine them, or remove the existing ones. To Create an Inheritance Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Use the following options to define inheritance feature properties: o o o o Add (default) or remove material geometry. Set reference type to assembly context (default). Set reference type to external. Click Options to change the following options: Varied ItemsDefine varied items properties. Refit DatumsChange the size or reference of copied datums. 248

Assembly

DependentMake the Inheritance feature dependent (default) or independent of the reference model. Dependent features update when changes are made in the reference part. An independent Inheritance feature will not update when the reference part is modified. o 5. Click Click Properties to change the name of the Inheritance feature. to complete the Inheritance feature.

Inheritance Features Capabilities Changes in the reference part are associatively propagated to the dependent Inheritance feature when both reference and target parts are in the same Pro/ENGINEER session. You can control whether Inheritance features are dependent on the reference part. Creation or modification of varied items is possible without the reference part in the Pro/ENGINEER session. Addition or removal of material geometry. The use of Relations and Family Tables with corresponding associated parameters. The ability to control whether notes from the reference model are copied. The conversion or an inheritance feature to an external Inheritance feature. Nest Inheritance features. The monitoring of parent and child relationships between subfeatures of Inheritance and other features of the part that reference them.

To Define Varied Dimensions in an Inheritance Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Select a feature of the Inheritance model. The dimensions of the selected feature appear in the model window. 7. Select a feature dimension. The dimensions are listed in the Varied Items dialog box. 249

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

8. Enter new dimension values in the New Value box. 9. To remove a dimension, select it from the list and click click . To add dimensions,

and select other features of the inheritance model.

10. Click OK. Note: To redefine the varied dimension, right-click the Inheritance feature in the Model Tree, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. To Define Dimension Boundaries in an Inheritance Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 2. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

3. Define varied dimensions. 4. Select a dimension from the Varied Items list, then select one of the following value limits from the New Dim Bound list: o o o o UpperSets the dimension value to its maximum (generates geometry based on a nominal dimension value plus the tolerance). MiddleSets the dimension value to the nominal value plus the mean of the upper and lower tolerance values. LowerSets the dimension value to its minimum (generates geometry based on a nominal dimension value minus the tolerance). NominalSets the dimension value to nominal (generates geometry based on exact ideal dimensions).

Note: If the New Dim Bound column does not appear in the Varied Items dialog box click, 5. Click OK. Note: To redefine the varied dimension boundary, right-click the Inheritance feature in the Model Tree, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. To Define Varied Features in an Inheritance Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model 250 and add it.

Assembly

selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Click the Features tab and select a feature of the Inheritance model. The selected feature is highlighted in the model and added to the features list in the Varied Items dialog box. 7. To remove a dimension, select it from the list and click click . To add dimensions,

and select other features of the Inheritance model.

8. To suppress, resume, or erase a feature, select a feature from the list and choose one of the following value limits from the New Status list: o o o Resumed (default) Suppressed Erased

9. Click OK. Note: To redefine the varied feature, right-click the Inheritance feature in the Model Tree, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. To Define Varied References in Inheritance or External Inheritance Features 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. Note: If you already have an Inheritance or external Inheritance feature in your Model Tree, right-click it, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Click the References tab and then click (default).

251

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

7. Select the reference entity within the Inheritance feature that you want to replace. Selection is limited to Inheritance feature subfeatures. 8. Select the new reference either inside or outside the Inheritance feature. (The new reference replaces the previous reference.) The replacement reference must be the same entity type. The Sub-features definition dialog box opens. 9. Select the subfeatures for which you are replacing references. Note: If varied references are listed and you want to make a change, click the item under New Refs to redefine the varied reference item or click under SubFeat to reroute the feature. to select and then add one subfeature at a time, or click All ref sub10. Click feats to add all subfeatures. You may want to add all subfeatures and then select and click to delete subfeatures that you do not want to include.

11. Click OK to accept your subfeature selections and to close the Sub-feature dialog box. 12. Click OK to close the Varied Items dialog box. The references are replaced. Note: To replace all references for subfeature of an inheritance feature, right-click the subfeature in the Model Tree, and choose Replace References from the shortcut menu. The REROUTE REFS menu appears, from which you can change the references, making them varied. The varied reference items are then added to the Inheritance feature and the Inheritance feature regenerates. To change the way columns are displayed in the Varied Items dialog box, click . Varied References When a model contains Inheritance features or other data sharing features, you may need to reroute references contained in the Inheritance feature to entities outside the Inheritance feature. In assemblies, references can be made to models other than the target model, as long as the model is within the assembly. The reference (original) part is listed in the reference collector on the Merge dashboard while the target part (the one that is activated in the Model Tree) contains the Inheritance features. When a reference is varied, the change is made only in the target part, the original part does not change. To change the references of the original part and the target model, remove the varied references and make the change to the original part. Note: You can replace references for all types of features except nested Inheritance features and those features using surface or chain collection to define references. You can replace references for an Annotation Feature (a sub-Inheritance feature) only with references inside the Inheritance feature.

252

Assembly

To Define Varied Parameters in an Inheritance Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Click the Parameters tab. The Select Parameter dialog box opens. 7. Select parameter information to define and click Insert Selected. The selected parameter information appears in the Varied Items dialog box. 8. Enter the parameter information in the Varied Items dialog box. 9. Click OK. Note: To redefine the varied parameter, right-click the Inheritance feature in the Model Tree, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. To Define Varied Annotations for Geometry Tolerances 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Click the Geom. Tols tab. 7. Select or clear the Copy All check box to copy all or individual geometry tolerances. Note: Use the Copy column to define specific annotations. This column overrides the default Copy All status. 8. Select an inherited geometry tolerance. Information about the selected geometry tolerance appears in the Varied Items dialog box. 253

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

9. Enter a new value for the geometry tolerance in the New Value text box. 10. Click OK. The geometry tolerances are replaced. Variable Annotations in Inheritance Features You can vary Annotation Elements and parameters in Inheritance features. You may copy all or individual annotation features. The Copy column in each Annotation Element section allows you to enable (Copy) or disable (Don't Copy) individual annotation status. Use the Varied Items dialog box to vary information for the following Annotation Elements: Geometry tolerances 3D notes 3D symbols Surface finishes

To Define Varied Annotations for a 3D Note 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Click the 3D Note tab. 7. Select or clear the Copy All check box to copy all or individual 3D note Annotation Elements. 8. Select an inherited 3D note. The visibility status of the selected 3D note appears in the Varied Items dialog box. 9. Change the visibility status of the 3D note in the New Visibility text box. 10. Click OK. To Define Varied Annotations for a 3D Symbol 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data >

254

Assembly

Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Click the 3D Symbol tab. 7. Select or clear the Copy All check box to copy all or individual 3D symbol Annotation Elements. 8. Select an inherited 3D symbol, and click the check box in the Copy column to toggle the copying of the symbol. 9. Click OK. To Define Varied Annotations for a Surface Finish 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data > Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode.

4. Click Options in the Merge dashboard. 5. Click Varied Items. The Varied Items dialog box and a separate window showing the Inheritance model open. 6. Click the Surf. Finish tab. 7. Select or clear the Copy All check box to copy all or individual surface finishes. 8. Select a surface finish. Information about the selected surface finish appears in the Varied Items dialog box. 9. Enter a new value. 10. Click OK. To Create an External Inheritance Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly, select a part in it, and click Edit > Activate. 2. Select a second part in the assembly as the reference model from which geometry will be copied and click Insert > Shared Data >

255

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Merge/Inheritance. The Merge dashboard appears with the reference model selected by default. You can select a different part as the reference model from the Model Tree or in the graphics window. 3. Click 4. Click to toggle between Merge mode (default) and Inheritance mode. . The EXTERNAL INHERITANCE dialog box opens.

5. Choose Default from the Constraints Type list to place the external Inheritance feature in the default location or place it in a different location using a set of constraints. 6. Click to complete the feature placement. to change placement references.

Note: Click

7. Use the Options and Properties slide-up panels to define external Inheritance feature properties. Note: Properties options are identical to standard Inheritance features. 8. Click to complete the external Inheritance feature.

External Inheritance Features An external Inheritance feature allows one-way associative propagation of geometry and feature data from a reference part to a target part without the need for assembly context. External Inheritance features are useful when representing the evolution of a design during manufacturing or when creating standard design elements. You can use external Inheritance features to either add or subtract material from the reference part geometry to or from a target part. Define the location of geometry propagated from the reference part by selecting coordinate systems on the reference and target parts. A target part can contain one or more external Inheritance features. Features propagated from the reference part are represented in the target part as subfeatures of the external Inheritance feature. You can create a reference pattern in the target part based on the pattern of external Inheritance subfeatures. Dimensions propagated from the reference part are fully accessible in Assembly, Part, and Detailed Drawings. These dimensions can be shown in a drawing of the target part. Varied items and external Inheritance feature capabilities are identical to standard Inheritance features. To Convert an Inheritance Feature to External 1. Create an inheritance feature. 2. In the Model Tree, right-click the inheritance feature and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Merge dashboard appears. 256

Assembly

then click Yes to convert the feature to an external Inheritance feature. 3. Click The EXTERNAL INHERITANCE dialog box opens. 4. Choose Default from the Constraints Type list to place the external Inheritance feature in the default location, or define a set of constrains to position the feature in a location of your choice. 5. Click to complete feature placement. to change placement references.

Note: You can always click

6. Use the Options and Properties slide-up panels to define external Inheritance feature properties. Note: Properties options are identical to standard Inheritance features. 7. Click to complete the external Inheritance feature.

To Edit the Properties of a Feature in Inheritance Features This procedure is for performing cosmetic changes to dimensions and annotation elements of features inside inheritance features. 1. Create an inheritance feature. 2. Select a dimension or an Annotation Element of the Inheritance feature in the graphics window, right-click, and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. You are prompted to confirm the operation. 3. Click Yes to confirm the prompt. If the selected item is a dimension the Dimension Properties dialog box opens. If the feature is an Annotation Element, an appropriate Annotation Element definition dialog box opens. 4. Edit the cosmetic properties of the selected dimension or Annotation Element. You can edit text color, text style, and text position. Note: You cannot edit nominal values. 5. Click OK. The changed properties are updated. To Update an Inheritance Feature 1. Create an inheritance feature. 2. Select the Inheritance feature in the Model Tree, right-click, and choose Update Inheritance from the shortcut menu. A warning is displayed before the update is performed. Choose one of the following options to continue: o YesUpdates the Inheritance feature and sets all varied items and item properties according to the base model. This option is disabled if the base model is not in session. NoCancels the update operation.

257

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o

Property OptionsOpens the Property Options dialog box. The dialog box lists edited feature properties. Click Update to toggle the update of a specific property. Click OK.

3. Click Yes to finish the update.

Copy and Publish Geometry Features

About Copy and Publish Geometry Features Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry features are Pro/ENGINEER top-down design tools to associatively communicate design criteria. With these tools you can propagate a large amount of information by copying reference geometry from model to model. For large designs, each design group can create skeleton models in their subassemblies with Copy Geometry features that reference the top-level product skeleton. No access to top-level assembly is necessary. Because each group's skeleton encompasses copied references, everyone works with the same design criteria, which remains associative. Regenerating Copy and Publish Geometry Features The order of Copy Geometry features and Publish Geometry features affects the regeneration cycle. If a Publish Geometry feature is regenerated in a model, all Copy Geometry features that reference it also regenerate. As a result, from the Copy Geometry feature forward in the feature list, the system regenerates all models with a Copy Geometry feature that references that Publish Geometry feature. Place all static information in a skeleton as early as possible in the feature list, and enter all dynamic information later. If your Publish Geometry feature references static information, place it before the dynamic information. The Publish Geometry feature will not move every time the dynamic part of the skeleton changes. Publish Geometry Features About Publish Geometry Features A Publish Geometry feature contains independent local geometry references. External references are not allowed. The created feature is not a copy of selected geometry. It is a consolidation of multiple local references that can be copied to other models. When you create a Copy Geometry or external Copy Geometry feature, you can reference a Publish Geometry feature. With a single selection, you copy a local collection of model geometry to other models as a single entity. This makes it easier to copy the same geometric references to other models and allows an efficient way to control the use of references. Publish Geometry features capture design intent. With Publish Geometry features you can: Specify component geometry for use when design group members copy geometry from that model.

258

Assembly

Predetermine the geometry to be referenced by a Copy Geometry feature. Define interfaces. Reduce the possibility that designers will select incorrect geometry to create driven models. Note: When a Publish Geometry feature fails, a Copy Geometry feature referencing the Publish Geometry feature will also fail.

You can create a Publish Geometry feature in part, skeleton, and assembly models. If you create a Publish Geometry feature in the context of an assembly, you must select the reference geometry in the source model. For example, if the feature is created in the top-level assembly, only top-level assembly surface features and datums can be referenced. You cannot reference geometry from the components of the assembly. Similarly, if a Publish Geometry feature is created in a part component by activating that part within an assembly, all geometry references must be selected from that part component. To Create a Publish Geometry Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Publish Geometry. The PUBLISHED GEOMETRY dialog box opens. 3. Select the type of reference elements on which to base the feature and add references. Note: You can only select elements of the currently active assembly components (assembly, subassembly or part). Unlike Copy Geometry and external Copy Geometry features, Publish Geometry features cannot reference other Publish Geometry features. You must define at least one of the following reference elements to complete the Publish Geometry feature: o o o o Surface SetsSelect surfaces. ChainsSelect edges or curves. ReferencesSelect various reference features. AnnotationSelect various annotation features: notes, symbols, surface finishes, geometric tolerances, reference dimensions, and driven dimensions with tolerances.

4. Click Details to view, add, or remove a reference from the list of references. 5. Click Properties to change the default, feature name. 6. Click OK. The Publish Geometry feature, identified by the appears in the Model Tree. visual indicator,

259

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Define a Publish Geometry Reference in a Copy Geometry Feature 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Copy Geometry. The Copy Geometry dashboard appears. 3. Click (default).

4. Select a previously defined Publish Geometry feature from the Model Tree or graphics window. Note: Only one Publish Geometry reference can be included in the current feature. If a Publish Geometry feature is selected for a reference, no other geometry references are allowed, and vice versa. 5. Click to complete the Copy Geometry feature.

Copy Geometry Features About Copy Geometry Features You can create internal or external Copy Geometry in a single feature. The feature can be edited and its type changed from internal to external. The Copy Geometry feature can be used to pass any type of geometric reference information and userdefined parameters to and from parts, skeleton models, and assemblies. Note: When you use Copy Geometry, only reference geometry is copied. Only surfaces and datum features are copied, not solid features. A Copy Geometry feature can be externalized. This action is irreversible. With this technique you can create features in one model that reference the geometry of another model that is not in session. You can also create an external Copy Geometry feature in Part mode and copy references from one part to another. Using a Copy Geometry feature in a top-down design can reduce the amount of data in session. The retrieval of entire reference source models is not necessary. The Copy Geometry feature takes up only half the space on disk and in session. To Create a Copy Geometry Feature You can create a Copy Geometry feature in part, skeleton, and assembly models. Note: When a publish geometry reference is selected, other references cannot be made, and vice versa. 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Copy Geometry. The Copy Geometry dashboard appears. 3. To define the copy geometry by a predefined Published Geometry feature proceed for selection, or click collector (activated by default). 260 to deactivate the publish geometry reference

Assembly

4. To define the Copy Geometry feature, click References, select the reference type, and define the references. Define at least one element: o o o o Surface SetsSelect surfaces. ChainsSelect edges or curves. ReferencesSelect various reference features. AnnotationSelect various annotation features: notes, symbols, surface finishes, geometric tolerances, reference dimensions, and driven dimensions with tolerances.

Note: Click Details to view, add, or remove a reference from the list. 5. Click Options to define one of the following elements: o o Copy all surfaces as is (default)Creates an exact copy of the selected surfaces. Exclude surfaces and Fill holesActivates two collectors: Exclude surfacesSelect surfaces to be excluded from the current copy feature. Fill holes/surfacesSelect holes on the selected surfaces to be filled. o o o Copy Inside boundaryDefines a boundary containing the surfaces to be copied. DependentSets the Copy Geometry feature dependency. Refit DatumsRefits automatically the included datums and axes to the target part outline.

Note: Copy options are available only when the Copy Geometry feature is defined by a surface set. These options are disabled when the reference model is a Published Geometry feature. 6. Click Properties to change the default, feature name. 7. Click to complete the Copy Geometry feature.

Copy Geometry References Copy Geometry features can be used to copy any geometric information from component to component. Follow these guidelines when selecting copy geometry references: Select surfaces, edges, and curves using standard Pro/ENGINEER reference collection tools. You can define a rule for collecting references, and as the design changes and new entities satisfy this rule, the references are added to the Copy Geometry feature. For example, create a Copy Geometry feature by specifying a group of surfaces. The surfaces are copied through the Copy Geometry feature. If you modify the original geometry by placing a new cut that intersects the

261

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

surfaces collected, the resulting surfaces of the cut are also included in the Copy Geometry feature. Copy quilts, vertices, and datum features, including planes, points, axes, and coordinate systems, with the Copy Geometry feature. Nest Copy Geometry features. Copy Geometry features from a different component in the assembly can be selected and copied with a Copy Geometry feature. Nesting can help avoid duplicate reference selection. Nesting can also streamline the design method. It enables consistent access to primary design information in all skeletons along an assembly path. Nesting avoids creating large generational jumps from low-level Copy Geometry features to high-level skeletons.

Copying Geometry in Top-Down Design Methodology The first step in a top-down design process is the definition of the design intent in a top-level skeleton model. Because a team working on individual subassemblies of a complex design is easier to manage, use the Copy Geometry functionality to provide the appropriate design criteria for each subassembly. As the higher-level information is copied into the respective subassemblies, you can proceed as follows: Distribute the subassemblies to individual designers, who will then base the designs on the information in the subassemblies. Add additional design intent unique to the subassemblies. This additional information can then be distributed to the subassemblies of this subassembly.

Individual designers are, to a controllable degree, insulated from the work of others. They can observe design progress by opening the top-level assembly with all of the latest modifications. In addition to using Copy Geometry features in skeleton models, you can also use Copy Geometry features to communicate geometry to or from any part, subassembly, or skeleton model. Propagation of top-level design intent while adding appropriate system-specific information can be repeated on as many levels of the assembly as desired. Ultimately, the appropriate references for the design of a single part can be copied into that part and then handed off to a low-level designer for component design relative to global references. Rarely is there a good reason to copy geometry from a part to a skeleton. This procedure is by definition not part of a true top-down methodology. However, sometimes you must accommodate existing parts in a bottom-up fashion. This technique can undermine the stability of a top-down design by introducing the possibility of skeleton model failure due to missing or changed external references. Circular references may also become a concern. About External Copy Geometry The external Copy Geometry functionality copies geometry from model to model without copying the geometry in the context of the assembly. Dependency on the

262

Assembly

assembly and all models along the path between the two components is avoided. When a Copy Geometry feature is created in Part mode, it is automatically defined as external. Source and target components must be relatively positioned, but are independent of the assembly context. When assembly components are assembled using the same coordinate system, you can use the Coord Sys location option to copy geometry from one component to another. When all the components are assembled, the copied geometry of the target models is coincident to the referenced geometry of the external model. Components can be deleted from the assembly without losing copied geometry associativity of copied geometry (which happens with internal Copy Geometry features when the target component model is deleted). In addition, none of the other external Copy Geometry features that reference the component will fail. Although the models are associative to each other through the external copy geometry features, the components are completely independent. In other words, associativity is not controlled by the assembly model. An independent external Copy Geometry feature remains frozen in its original state, whether or not its external reference model is in session and its geometry has been updated. It does not fail when copied references are missing from the parent model. If the external reference model is an assembly, all the geometric references must be chosen from the same model. The first selection determines which model this will be. If the first reference is selected from geometry (an assembly surface, datum, and so forth) of the top-level assembly, all subsequent references must be from top-level assembly geometry. If the first reference is chosen from an assembly component model, all subsequent reference selections must be made from that model. To Redefine a Copy Geometry as an External Copy Geometry Feature A local Copy Geometry feature can be redefined as an external Copy Geometry feature. However, an external Copy Geometry feature cannot be redefined as a Copy Geometry feature. 1. Create a Copy Geometry feature. 2. Select the Copy Geometry feature from the Model Tree, right-click, and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Copy Geometry dashboard appears. 3. Click , then Yes. The Placement dialog box opens.

4. Choose one of the following options to specify the external placement reference for the copied geometry: o o DefaultPlaces the copied geometry in the current model using the default location. Cur PlacementPlaces the copied geometry in the current model using the current relative placement.

263

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o

Coord SysPlaces the copied geometry in the current model by aligning coordinate systems. You must first select a coordinate system on the reference model, and then select a coordinate system on the target model. Note: To preserve geometry location, use a coordinate system that is coincident with the one chosen in the external model.

5. Click OK. 6. Click to complete the Copy Geometry feature.

Redefining Copy Geometry Features Copy Geometry features can be redefined as follows: Rename a data sharing feature. Specify a default layer name for Copy Geometry features. Display reference status in the Model Tree. Update frozen external reference placement. Reroute references to implicitly copied edges and surfaces. Reroute Copy Geometry features to another Publish Geometry feature. Reroute Copy Geometry features to a level higher in the assembly than the level on which the feature was created. Include Copy Geometry features in local groups. Redefine a Copy Geometry feature to change it to an external Copy Geometry feature.

External Dependency of Copy Geometry Features The following rules apply to external Copy Geometry features: You create the dependency by selecting references, that is, explicitly copying geometry, from one component into another as a Copy Geometry feature. You select all references for a single Copy Geometry feature from the same component. You can reference all Pro/ENGINEER geometry, existing Copy Geometry and Publish Geometry features. When the parent component is not in session, the geometry copied by the Copy Geometry feature remains frozen while the parent component is unavailable. You can control the behavior of Copy Geometry features when the parent component is in session but some of the referenced entities are missing. When parent geometry that was copied is missing (deleted or suppressed) a dependent Copy Geometry feature fails regeneration. However, you can prevent copy geometry features from failing when a reference is missing. If you set the

264

Assembly

configuration file option fail_ref_copy_when_missing_orig to no (the default is yes), during regeneration the system automatically freezes any copied geometry for which the original is missing, preventing the Copy Geometry feature from failing. You can change the dependency of an individual Copy Geometry feature and switch easily between dependency states using the Dependent option. Also use the Dependent option to stop feature update for improved regeneration performance. Geometry is available after it is selected as a reference. The geometry appears relative to the rest of the parts geometry, as it did in the context of the assembly where the geometry was selected. Copied reference information includes geometry, entity names, colors, line styles, and layer information. Copy Geometry features create external dependencies and are not allowed in start models. Reference status information is available in the Model Tree. Copy Geometry features can have a Copied Ref status of Active, Frozen, Suppressed, Missing, or Independent. View parent information about a model that contains a Copy Geometry feature in the Global Reference Viewer.

To Reroute Copy Geometry Features to Another Publish Geometry Feature You can reroute copy geometry features with children from one publish geometry feature to another. 1. Create a Copy Geometry feature and use a predefined published geometry to define it. 2. Right-click the Copy Geometry feature in the Model Tree and choose Edit References from the shortcut menu. Click Yes at the prompt. The REROUTE REFS menu appears. 3. Select an alternate Publish Geometry feature. At the map prompt, o o Click No for automatic mapping. Click Yes to manually reroute reference entities. The Reroute References dialog box opens. Select the entities to be rerouted, then click alternative entity from the graphics window. to select

Note: Only entities that belong to the publish geometry feature can be selected.

265

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Tip: Freezing Copied Geometry to Prevent Failure You can prevent Copy Geometry features from failing when a reference is missing. If you set the configuration file option fail_ref_copy_when_missing_orig to no (the default is yes), the system automatically freezes any copied geometry for which the original reference is missing. This prevents the Copy Geometry feature from failing. A warning is displayed. Explicitly and Implicitly Copied Geometry Two types of geometry are copied when you create a Copy Geometry feature: explicitly copied geometry and implicitly copied geometry. Some geometry references that you select (such as explicitly copy), include implicitly copied geometry. For example, if you select a surface for your Copy Geometry feature, the surface itself is explicitly copied and the edges of the surface are implicitly copied. If you reference any implicitly copied geometry of a Copy Geometry feature, and then reroute the copy Geometry feature references to new source geometry, the implicit reference fails because the original parent geometry (the implicitly copied references) are no longer available. Therefore, make sure that you explicitly copy (select) all pertinent geometry in a Copy Geometry feature. Otherwise, you may need to redefine features that reference implicitly copied geometry.

Annotation Propagation
About Propagating Annotation Elements into Data Sharing Features Annotation Elements can be automatically propagated into data sharing features. These include Copy Geometry, Publish Geometry, Shrinkwrap, Merge, and Inheritance features. Geometry entity parameters are also propagated to data sharing features. You can automatically propagate annotation planes referenced by Annotation Elements that are valid for propagation. An annotation plane is a datum plane that defines the orientation of an annotation item with respect to a 3D model. Propagated annotations can be defined as dependent or independent of referenced parts. If Annotation Elements are dependent on referenced parts, the elements in the data shared feature are read-only. These types of Annotation Elements must be redefined as independent in order to be modified. About Propagating Annotation Element Display Status Through Data Sharing Features You can select an Annotation Element and use the shortcut menu command Hide to place an Annotation Element on the Hidden Items layer, or use Unhide to remove an item from the Hidden Items layer. If the source Annotation Element is then propagated through a Data Sharing feature, the Hide or Unhide display status is propagated to the target model. If, for example, the source Annotation Element is hidden and then propagated through a Data Sharing feature, the Annotation Element is automatically added to

266

Assembly

the Hidden Items layer in the target part. The Hide or Unhide display status is propagated only when you create the Data Sharing feature. Redefining or regenerating the source features does not impact the display status of the propagated Annotation Element. Propagating Layers Through Merge Features When you add an Annotation Element to a Merge feature in the following scenario: The source model contains an Annotation Element in a layer. The target model does not contain a layer with the same name.

then the layer name from the source model is propagated to the target model. The newly created layer in the target model contains the Annotation Element from the source model, and the Hide or Unhide display status of the layer is also propagated. If the source model and the target model contain a layer with the same name, the layer display status may not propagate. Consider the following scenario: The source model contains Annotation Element AE_1 on hidden layer, LAYER_TEST. The target model also contains a layer, LAYER_TEST. AE_1 is propagated through a Data Sharing feature to the target model.

AE_1 in the Data Sharing feature is placed in the target model layer, LAYER_TEST. If there are no other items in LAYER_TEST of the target model, then the hidden display status of the layer is propagated from the source. However, if other items do exist on LAYER_TEST in the target model, the display status of LAYER_TEST in the target model does not change. Propagating Layers Through Copy Geometry and Shrinkwrap Features For Copy Geometry and Shrinkwrap features, layer assignments transfer only if a layer with the same name exists in the target model. The display status is always whatever the status is for that layer in the target model, regardless of the setting in the source model. Note: If you are propagating a Data Sharing feature to an assembly, the Annotation Element display status is propagated at the model level only. To Propagate an Annotation to Data Sharing Features 1. Retrieve an assembly. 2. Click Insert > Shared Data. Select a shared data element (Copy Geometry, Shrinkwrap, or Merge/Inheritance). A corresponding dashboard appears. 3. Click References, then Edit in the Annotations area of the slide-up panel. The Propagate annotation dialog box opens. 4. To copy all Annotation Elements, click the Copy All check box.

267

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

5. To copy individual Annotation Elements, clear the Copy All check box and click . Select individual Annotation Elements in the graphics window, Model Tree, or search tool. 6. To make all selected Annotation Elements dependent (default), click the Dependent check box. To make a specific Annotation Element independent, click the Dependency check box in the list of selected Annotation Elements. 7. To propagate annotation planes automatically, click the Auto Include check box. 8. To automatically propagate datum plane references in an Annotation Element, click the Auto Include check box. 9. Click OK.

Layouts Preparing Layouts

About Layouts A layout is a nonparametric 2D sketch used as an engineering notebook to conceptually document and annotate parts and assemblies. It maintains design intent in a central location as solid models are developed. A sketch can be created at the beginning of the design process, or a drawing from an assembly or part can be imported into Layout mode. Any IGES, DWG, or DXF file can be imported into a layout. By importing a drawing you can use an existing design as a layout for the remaining design process. Layouts are not precision-scaled drawings and are not associative with actual threedimensional (3D) geometry. Like drawings, layouts have a setup file, a format, and one or more sheets. Use a layout to: Develop basic assembly geometry as a 2D conceptual sketch. Create global datums that define assembly intent. Determine mathematical relations between critical design parameters. Document an assembly as a whole.

A layout enables you to define the basic requirements and constraints of an assembly without using extensive or detailed geometry. It establishes parameters and the mathematical relations between them for dimensions. Global datums facilitate automatic component assembly and automatic component replacement. The sketched geometry and annotations in a layout are stored in a file with a .lay extension. You can create, store, and access the reference information for the assembly (global parameters and datums) through a layout. Design information is communicated to assemblies, subassemblies, and parts by declaring them to the layout. When an assembly is retrieved or regenerated, the 268

Assembly

system regenerates all layouts, including those declared to subassemblies and parts, and then regenerates the assembly itself. Regeneration of layouts first ensures that references and driven parameters in the assembly are current. If you do not want the layouts to be automatically regenerated, do not set the regen_layout_w_assem configuration file option to no. To Work with Multiple Sheets Like drawings, layouts can consist of multiple sheets. To Add a New Sheet Click Insert > Sheet. A new sheet appears in the graphics window. To Switch Between Sheets Select the number of the sheet you want to display from the Sheet List the Layout toolbar or enter a number. To Reorder a Sheet 1. Click Edit > Move Sheet. The Move Sheet dialog box opens. 2. Select one of the options below to change the position of the current sheet: o o Insert at beginningInserts the current sheet as the first sheet in the layout. SheetInserts the current sheet before the sheet number selected. on

To Remove a Sheet Click Edit > Remove > Sheets. Enter the number of the sheet to be removed. To Create a Layout 1. Click File > New > Layout and enter a name for the layout. The New Layout dialog box opens. 2. Choose an option: o o o Use templateCreates a layout from an existing template. Empty with formatCreates an empty layout with a specified format. Click Browse and select a format from the Open dialog box. EmptyCreates an empty layout with the specified Orientation and Size.

3. Click OK. For more information on drawing templates, search the Detailed Drawings functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.

269

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Create a Reference Datum Plane for a Layout 1. Click Insert > Draft Datum > Plane. The Get Point menu appears. 2. Choose one of the following options as a datum plane start point: o Pick PntClick in the layout window to select the start point. Drag the mouse to draw the datum plane. Click a second time to select the end point. VertexClick a vertex to select the start point, and then select a vertex or a point on an entity as an end point. On EntityClick a point on an entity to select the start point, and then select a point on an entity or a vertex as an end point. Rel CoordsCreate a datum plane with a start point offset from the end point of the previously created datum plane. Enter the X and Y offset values. Choose one of the first three options above and select the end point. Abs CoordsEnter the X and Y values for the start point's absolute coordinates, and then select one of the following options to create the end point: Pick PntSelect a point in the graphics window. VertexSelect a vertex in the graphics window. On EntitySelect a point on an entity. 3. At the prompt, enter a name for the datum plane. Press ENTER or click To Create a Reference Datum Axis for a Layout 1. Click Insert > Draft Datum > Axis. The Get Point menu appears. 2. Choose one of the following options as the datum axis start point: o o o o Pick PntClick in the layout window to select the start point. Drag the mouse to draw the datum axis. Click once more to select the end point. VertexClick a vertex as the datum axis start point, and then select a vertex or a point on an entity as an end point. On EntityClick a point on an entity to select the start point, and then select a point on an entity or a vertex as an end point. Rel CoordsCreate a datum axis with a start point that is offset from the end point of the previously created datum axis. Enter the X and Y offset values. Choose one of the first three options above and select the end point. Abs CoordsEnter the X and Y values for the start point's absolute coordinates, then select one of the following options to create the end point: .

o o o

270

Assembly

Pick PntSelect a point in the graphics window. VertexSelect a vertex in the graphics window. On EntitySelect a point on an entity. 3. At the prompt, enter a name for the draft axis. Press ENTER or click To Create a Reference Datum Point for a Layout 1. Click or Insert > Model Datum > Point. Choose the point type. The Get Point menu appears. Note: For more information on datum point types search the Part functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. 2. Choose one of the following point placement options: o o o o o Pick PntClick in the layout window. VertexClick a vertex. On EntityClick a point on an entity. Rel Coords Enter X and Y offset values to place a point relative to the previous point. Abs CoordsEnter X and Y values for the point's absolute coordinates. . .

3. At the prompt, enter a name for the point and press ENTER or click To Create a Reference Datum Coordinate System for a Layout

1. Click or Insert > Model Datum > Coordinate System. The Get Point menu appears. 2. Choose one of the following coordinate system placement options: o o o o o Pick PntClick in the layout window. VertexClick a vertex. On EntityClick a point on an entity. Rel CoordsPlace a coordinate system relative to the previously created coordinate system. Enter X and Y offset values. Abs CoodsEnter X and Y values for the coordinate system's absolute coordinates. .

3. At the prompt, enter a name for the point and press ENTER or click

271

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

About Reference Datums in Layout Mode You sketch, place, and name global reference datum planes, axes, coordinate systems, and points in a layout to convey the assembly design intent. Although the datum geometry in layouts has only visual significance, you can declare the datum names in a layout to corresponding datums in associated parts to prepare them for automatic assembly. For example, when two parts reference the same global datum axis, the system will align those axes. When two parts reference the same global datum plane, Pro/ENGINEER aligns those surfaces. Establishing these references facilitates automatic assembly and preserves design intent when you modify part details. Because layouts are two-dimensional, the datum planes are displayed on edge with surfaces normal to the layout sheet. The coordinate systems always have their xyplane on the plane of the layout sheet. Note: For more information on datum features, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Example: A Layout Reference Datum Plane and Axis The figure below shows a reference datum and axis.

1. 2. 3.

Datum plane Datum axis Balloon notes

To Delete Reference Datum Entities from a Layout 1. Select the entity to be deleted in the layout window. 2. Right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu or click Edit > Delete. To Import a Drawing into a Layout 1. Open an empty layout file. 272

Assembly

2. Click Insert > Shared Data > From File. The Open dialog box opens. 3. Select the file to import and click Open. Note: Imported geometry is not updated when the original file is updated. A layout is nonparametric and does not maintain a link to the original file. For more information on IGES files, search the Pro/ENGINEER Interface section of the Data Exchange functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Global Dimensions and Relations in a Layout About Global Parameters Parameters created in a layout are global, and they can be accessed in other modes. Declare the layout and use local relations to declare the global parameters to the local ones. Once declared, dimension values and relations specified in a layout can directly affect the values of component dimensions in an assembly. Use a Parameter Table to assign different parameter values and relations to different component configurations. Layout dimensions are created as parameters with a name and a numeric value. To switch between viewing dimension values or names in the layout window click Info > Switch Dimensions. Note: Layout sketches are nonparametric. They do not update when the layout dimensions are changed. To create user-defined global parameters, you write defining relations. All models declared to the active layout can then access these variables. Relations are userdefined rules for dimensions. For example, you have defined the relation XYZ = 27.4 * 1.7 in a layout. When you access the parameter XYZ in other modes through local relations, the value is calculated from the global relation. The following restrictions apply to relations in Layout mode: Only global relations can be defined in Layout mode. A relation created in another mode cannot be accessed in Layout mode. Relations are not automatically reevaluated. To evaluate them click Relations dialog box or regenerate the layout. from the

For more information on parameters and relations, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Create Parameters in Layout Mode 1. Click Tools > Parameters. The Parameters dialog box opens. All parameters in the layout are listed. 2. Click to create a new parameter. Accept the default name or rename the parameter. You can change the type of parameter, the parameter value, and whether the parameter is designated. 273

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

For more information on parameters, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Create a Global Dimension 1. Click Insert > Dimension > New References. The Attach Type menu appears. 2. Choose the dimension placement position: o On EntityAttaches the dimension to the entity at the selected point. Select an entity to set the dimension for it, or select two entities to set the dimension between them. When applicable, the Dim Orient menu appears. Select one of the following options: HorizontalAttaches the dimension horizontally. VerticalAttaches the dimension vertically. SlantedAttaches the dimension at a slant. ParallelAttaches the dimension parallel to the entity. NormalAttaches the dimension normal to the entity. o o o o MidpointAttaches the dimension to the midpoint of the selected entity. The Dim Orient menu appears. See options above. CenterAttaches the dimension to the center of a circular edge. IntersectAttaches the dimension to the closest intersection point of two selected entities. Make LineReferences X or Y axes. Choose an option from the MAKELINE menu: 2 PointsSelect two vertexes to create two lines and a dimension between them. Horiz LineSelect two entities to create horizontal lines and a dimension between them. Vert LineSelect two entities to create vertical lines and a dimension between them. 3. Enter a symbolic name for the global dimension. 4. Enter a numeric value for the dimension. The dimension is displayed with its symbolic name. 5. Middle-click to complete the dimension. Create another dimension or click Return to quit.

274

Assembly

To Modify Global Dimension Properties 1. Select the dimension in the layout window, right-click, and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Dimension Properties dialog box opens. 2. Modify the desired properties and click OK. To restore changed values, click Restore Values. To Create a Table of Parameters 1. Open a layout or create a new one. 2. Create parameters to include in the table. 3. Click Table > Insert > Table. The Table Create menu appears with the Get Point menu beneath it. 4. Select the creation options: o Direction of rows: DescendingThe rows progress downward from the top. AscendingThe rows progress upward from the bottom. o Direction of columns: RightwardThe columns progress from left to right. LeftwardThe columns progress from right to left. o Column width: By Num CharsColumn width is determined by numbers. By LengthColumn width is determined by the units entered. 5. Choose the start point of the table from the Get Point menu: o o o o o Pick PntClick in the layout window. VertexClick a vertex. On EntityClick a point on an entity. Rel CoordsEnter X and Y values for the start point of relative coordinates. Abs CoordsEnter X and Y values for start point of absolute coordinates.

6. Follow the prompts in the message area to create the table. 7. Double-click a cell in the table. The Note Properties dialog box opens. 8. Enter the text or value in the Text box. 9. To enter parameter values that update automatically when changed, type &parameter_name.

275

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

10. To change text properties, click Text Style. To Obtain Global Parameter Information To obtain information for a global parameter, it must be in the current model or in a referenced layout. 1. Click Tools > Relations. The Relations dialog box opens. 2. Click Show > Where Used. Information appears about global dimensions, datums, axes, and user-defined parameters that belong to a layout. 3. Select the name of the parameter in the graphics window, or choose Names and enter the parameter name. An Information window lists all direct references to the global entity and writes them to a file named parametername.txt in the current working directory. Note: Do not select dimension symbols in parts or assemblies, especially if you have given a dimension symbol the same name as a real global parameter. To Write Relations for Global Dimensions 1. Click Tools > Relations. The Relations dialog box opens. 2. Click Local Parameters. The dialog box expands to include parameters created in the layout. 3. Enter the name of a parameter or click 4. Select a parameter from the list and click to the relation. . A parameter list appears. . The parameter is added

5. Enter an arithmetic symbol or use those to the left of the Relations box to create the relations. 6. Click OK. 7. Click Edit > Regenerate to reevaluate the layout relations. About Parameter Tables Parameters and dimensions created in a layout can be used to assign values for different configurations of a model by setting up a Parameter Table. A Parameter Table created in a layout, similar to a Family Table, simplifies storage and access to value sets used for manipulating dimensions and parametric information. Parameter Tables maintain design intent, while allowing adjustment for different parameter values. The global parameters are numeric or yes/no and control the dimension values of components and the mathematical relations between them in an assembly. Note: Before you can create a Parameter Table, you must create parameters.

276

Assembly

To Create a Parameter Table A parameter table makes it easy to switch between different configuration options of an assembly. Create the table and then select the value set to configure the assembly. To Create a Parameter Table 1. Click Tools > Parameters. The Parameters dialog box opens. 2. Click Parameters > Param Table. The PARAM TABLE menu appears. 3. Click Add Param and choose the parameters from the list to be added to the table. 4. Click Done. 5. To delete a parameter from the table, click Del Param, and then select the parameter to be deleted from the list. To Add New Parameter Value Sets to the Table 1. Click Parameters > Param Table from the Parameter dialog box. The Param Table menu appears. 2. Click Edit in the Param Table menu. The Pro/Table dialog box appears. 3. Type in a new instance name and the instance values for the parameters in the table. You can create as many instances as you want. Note: Instance names cannot contain spaces. 4. Click File > Exit to save the changes and return to the layout. To Change a Layout Value Set 1. Click Parameters > Param Table from the Parameter dialog box. The Param Table menu appears. 2. Click Apply Set. The Instances list appears. 3. Select the required instance. 4. Click Done/Return. The values of the parameters in the Parameters dialog box change to those of the instance selected. 5. Click OK. 6. Click Edit > Regenerate. The layout displays with the new parameter values. To Display the Parameter Table 1. Click Parameters > Param Table from the Parameter dialog box. The Param Table menu appears. 2. Click Show. The Pro/Table dialog box opens. Note: The table cannot be edited using this command.

277

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Example: A Parameter Table The following example shows the use of a Parameter Table in a layout. In this example, the fan in the layout can be a table model or a floor model with 4 or 6 blades. A Parameter Table determines the values for each set of parameters. When you choose a set of parameters and regenerate the layout, the values in the layout update to reflect those of the set.

The following figure shows a Parameter Table created for the fan layout.

When you activate a different parameter set for the layout, you must regenerate the layout for it to be visible in the parameter table in the layout sheet. In the figure below, the parameter set has been changed to Floor_6_blades.

278

Assembly

The layout remains unchanged. A layout is not parametric and does not update according to the parameter values. Note: Parameters governed by a relation can be used in the Parameter Table.

Annotating Layouts
About Annotating Layouts Notes and balloons are useful for documenting design parameters and component information in the layout. The notes display the actual numeric value of the parameters. To Add Notes to a Layout 1. Click Insert > Note. The Note Types menu appears. 2. Choose one of the following leader options: o o o No LeaderCreates a note without a leader. With LeaderCreates the note with a leader. ISO LeaderCreates the note with an ISO leader.

279

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o o

On ItemCreates the note attached to the selected item. OffsetCreates the note with its position offset from a specified entity.

3. Choose the type of note: o o EnterEnters the note text from the keyboard. FileEnters the note text from a file.

4. Choose the text direction: o o o HorizontalPlaces the text horizontally. Vertical Places the text vertically. AnglularPlaces the text at an angle.

5. Choose the leader type, if applicable: o o o StandardCreates multiple leaders attached to multiple entities. Normal LeaderCreates a single leader normal to an entity. Tangent LeaderCreates a single leader tangent to an entity.

6. Choose the note text justification option: o o o o o o LeftAligns the note text left. CenterAligns the note text in the center. RightAligns the note text right. DefaultAligns note text by default. Style LibCreates or modifies a text style. Cur StyleSets the current style as a text style.

7. Click Make Note. after each line of text. The text 8. Type the note and press ENTER or click appears, beginning at the point you selected. 9. To quit the notemaking process, press ENTER on an empty line. The Text Symbol options appear. If required, enter a symbol as part of the note. 10. Click Close. 11. When you have finished creating notes, click Done/Return. For more information on annotations, search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Include Parameter Values in Notes 1. Create a relation or a parameter and give a value to parametername.

280

Assembly

2. Create a note and enter &parametername in the note. The system substitutes the numeric value for &parametername, which changes as the associated part is modified.

Declaring Layouts
About Declaring Layouts Information is exchanged between layouts and components or other layouts when you declare the layout to a component or another layout. You can use datum features, such as points and axes, for automatic assembly or to control dimensions of components in a specific instance of the assembly. To reference global datums, you must also declare them to the specific datums in the component. To reference parameters, you must create relations that link local parameters to the global parameters in the layout. A model can be declared to multiple layouts. If a model is declared to a layout that references one or more other layouts, the model references these layouts also. Therefore, you can explicitly declare and use global parameters from a parent layout even if they do not exist in the layout to which the model is declared. Pro/ENGINEER processes relations in order from the relations file. For example, if you set d2 = 30 it overrides the existing relation for d2, d2 = Height. The following restrictions apply: You can modify a global reference only at its highest level. After a layout has been declared, follow these guidelines to create a new parameter: o o o Place the parameter in the lowest level for a local parameter. Place the parameter in the highest level for a global parameter. To change a local parameter to a global parameter, redeclare the layout and delete the local version of the parameter.

You can access information about all declared datums, global dimensions, and the layouts that they reference using the List Decl command in the Declare menu. Pro/ENGINEER displays the information in an Information window and then writes it to a file named refitem.txt in the current working directory. One of three messages appears when the name of the model datum no longer corresponds to the name of the layout datum: WARNING: 3D item has been deleted or suppressed. An axis or datum is no longer present to match its counterpart in the layout. WARNING: 3D item reference is invalidignored. A name that has been declared to a layout has been used to name an undeclarable entity. WARNING: 3D item has been renamed to [name in model]. An axis or datum has a name that is different from its counterpart in the layout.

281

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

If a declared name in the model is inconsistent with its counterpart in the layout, use the Undecl Name command in the Declare menu to rectify the problem. About Layout Hierarchy When you declare a layout to another layout, you establish a hierarchical relationship between them. The current layout becomes a child of the layout to which it is declared. You can set the global datums and dimensions of the parent layout to govern those of the current layout. You must create global references since the system does not create them automatically. A prompt appears when you declare the layout, Duplication of global symbol symbolname. Delete local version? [No]. If you want a global reference, enter Yes. The system then deletes the symbol name from the current layout and replaces it with a cross-reference pointing to the layout in which the symbol resides. If you enter No, the local parameter remains independent of the global one. If you keep a local version, you can use the same symbol name in many layouts. For example, the Length symbol can represent the length of a beam, a shaft, and a pipe. If all of these Length parameters are completely independent (that is, modifying Length for one does not affect Length for another), the parameter name can be the same for each model. The creation of a global reference is useful for controlling parameter values at a single location. If you modify a single parameter in a parent layout, the system passes the modified value down through the layout hierarchy to the associated models. You can create as many hierarchical levels as you like. You can also declare a layout to multiple unrelated parents. To Declare a Layout to Another Layout 1. With the layout open, create or open another layout. 2. Click File > Declare. The DECLARE menu opens. 3. Click Declare Lay. A menu with a list of active layouts appears. 4. Select the name of the layout to which you want to declare the current layout. Note: Although the name of the current layout appears in the list, you cannot declare a layout to itself. A warning message appears: Declaration is circular. Similarly, you cannot declare two layouts to each other or make other circular declarations. 5. Delete or accept local versions of duplicate global parameters. To Declare a Model to a Layout 1. With the layout in session, open a part or assembly. 2. Click File > Declare. The DECLARE menu appears.

282

Assembly

3. Click Declare Lay. A menu with a list of layouts active in the current session appears. 4. Select the name of the layout to which you want to declare the model. The model now references the layout. To Create Relations From a Layout 1. Create a new layout or open an existing one. 2. Create a new component or open an existing one. 3. Declare the component to the layout. 4. Display dimensions or create other parameters for the component. 5. Click Tools > Relations. The Relations dialog box opens. 6. Click Local Parameters. The dialog box expands to include parameters created in the layout. 7. Create relations linking the parameters created in the layout to those of the component. 8. Click OK. 9. Click or Edit > Regenerate and the new relations take effect.

Rules for Skeleton Models and Layouts The following rules apply to the relationship between skeletons and layouts: If a skeleton model is introduced to an assembly with layouts declared to it, you must confirm that you want the system to declare the layout to the skeleton model as well. When declaring a layout to an assembly with a skeleton, you must confirm that you want the system to declare the layout to the skeleton. When undeclaring a layout in an assembly with a skeleton, you must confirm that you want the system to undeclare the layout in the skeleton as well. Use the DECLARE command in the SKEL SETUP menu to declare the skeleton model to a layout. Activate the skeleton model in an assembly and select Edit > Setup. The DECLARE menu allows you to declare layouts that were already declared to the assembly but not the skeleton, or to exclusively declare layouts to the skeleton.

To Undeclare a Model from a Layout You can undeclare a layout only if there are no global references. 1. Click File > Declare. The DECLARE menu appears.

283

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

2. Click UnDeclr Lay. A list of layouts to which the model is declared appears. 3. Select the name of the layout that you want to undeclare. Tip: Remove Global References to Undeclare a Layout You can undeclare a layout only if there are no global references. Use one of the following methods to remove them: Delete relations containing global variables. Redeclare or undeclare explicitly declared references. Clear all tabular references.

Declaring Datums in a Layout

About Declaring Datums To facilitate automatic assembly, global datums created in a layout are declared in each part of the assembly. Before you can declare datums, you must declare the assembly and parts to the appropriate layout. Datum plane orientation is shown by an arrow. Choose Flip from the Direction menu to change the datum plane orientation (or all the members of a pattern of datum planes). The following rules apply when declaring datum planes: Axes and datum planes can be declared in Part mode only. If you have used a reference axis or datum plane in a declaration, you cannot delete it from a layout unless you delete the corresponding part entities and undeclare the layout.

When you explicitly declare a datum, you select the part or assembly datum and enter the name of its global reference. The datum then appears with a global name. Explicit declarations are simple to use and easy to visualize but have two limitations. You cannot: Have two datums on the same model with the same explicit declaration (two datums with the same name). Have one datum with two different explicit declarations (one datum with two names).

Use a table declaration to declare more than one datum in a component to create a placement definition (for example, to assemble a bolt automatically into many holes in a plate). To Declare an Axis, Planar Surface, or Datum Plane Explicitly 1. Click File > Declare. The DECLARE menu opens. 2. Click DeclareName. 284

Assembly

3. Select the axis, planar surface, or datum plane to declare. In Assembly mode, use only assembly datum planes and axes. 4. If you select a plane, flip the orientation of the datum plane as necessary to correspond with its orientation in the layout. 5. Enter the global datum name. The local datum is renamed appropriately. 6. Declarations are stored with the model. To change a datum declaration, select the datum and choose UnDeclName from the DECLARE menu. If you try to declare a datum that you have already declared to another datum, the Redeclare menu displays the commands Replace and Quit. Choose Replace to replace the existing declaration with the new one, or choose Quit to leave it as is. You must declare the model to the layout before creating an explicit declaration. About Declaring Datums by Table Table declarations require more organization and planning, but they accommodate more sophisticated assemblies. Component datums retain their names when you use table declarations. The system connects them with the global names based on the table definitions. Select File > Declare > Table to declare more than one global datum from a layout to local datums. You can have multiple tables for a model corresponding to the references used in different assemblies. You cannot have multiple explicit declarations, since these reference the datum name. Table declarations can be used to declare: Different datums with the same global name (for example, to assemble bolts automatically into many single holes) by creating a table that contains the common declarations for each hole. Individual datums with two different names (for example, to assemble parts into a subassembly using a datum with one reference name and then to assemble the subassembly into the main assembly using the same datum with a different reference name).

Each line in the table corresponds to a single assembly instance. Each line must contain all of the declarations used to automatically assemble that instance. Use the following format for each line in the table: local dtm ref #1 = global dtm ref # 1, local dtm ref #2 = global dtm ref # 2, ... Note: A negative sign (-) in front of a local datum reference indicates that the plane will be assembled in its flipped state. Both global and model datum references can appear in multiple lines of the table. All references must have unique global names. A datum axis and a datum plane cannot be declared with the same name. To Declare Datums by Table 1. Retrieve a part or a component declared to a layout. 2. Click File > Declare. The Declare menu appears. 285

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Click Table. The TAB_DECLARE menu appears. 4. Choose one of the following commands: o o o Add XrefAdds a new table declaration. Modify XrefModifies a table declaration. The Xref notepad window opens with the table rows declared. Change the declarations required. Show XrefOpens an Information Window to view the table declarations.

5. Enter the declarations for each row of the table. Make sure that each row contains a complete placement definition for the component. 6. Click Done/Return. To Undeclare Datums 1. Click Edit > Declare. The DECLARE menu appears. 2. Click UnDecl Name. 3. Select the datum to be undeclared. Its original name replaces the name of the datum to which it was declared. About Automatic Assembly Using Layouts Using layouts to assemble components automatically is a simple process. First, declare the assembly and the parts being assembled to the same layout. Second, declare global datums in each part. Sufficient placement references must exist in each component. Parts that reference the same datums are aligned. When a parameter table exists in the layout, you must choose the parameter set required before placing components. When you inset a component into the assembly, the AUTO/MAN menu appears. Click Automatic to automatically place the component using layout constraints. Note: During automatic assembly, Pro/ENGINEER considers explicit declarations before table declarations. You can automatically replace automatically assembled components. The replacing component must be declared to the layout and have datums declared to the global datums used as placement references. Click Edit > Replace and choose Layout as the Replace by option. Example: Automatic Assembly Using Declared Datums This example shows how to use a reference datum plane and axis for automatic assembly of a bolt to all three holes in a flange. The sketch of the bolt and flange is only an illustration with no dimensions.

286

Assembly

First a layout is created with a datum plane and a datum axis.

1. 2.

Datum plane BOLT_HEAD Datum axis BOLT_AXIS

The layout is declared to the bolt part, then the datum plane and axis are declared to the corresponding axis and plane in the bolt.

1. 2.

Declared datum plane Declared datum axis

The layout is declared to the flange part. Since all three holes will be used for component placement and the same references are used to place each occurrence of the bolt, a table declaration is used. The axis for each hole in the flange is declared to the BOLT_AXIS datum axis while the datum plane as the surface of the flange is declared for each hole. See the table below for placement definitions for each hole in the flange.

287

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

1. 2.

Declared datum plane Declared datum axes

The bolts are automatically assembled in the three holes.

1. 2.

Declared datum plane BOLT_HEAD Declared datum axes BOLT_AXIS

288

Assembly

Layout Case Studies

About Case Studies Sometimes it can be useful to create a parametric layout, also called a case study. For example, you may want to track the size of an assembly envelope as the sizes of the assembly components change. A case study is a two-dimensional parametric sketch, similar to one created in Sketcher mode. Unlike a regular sketch, however, a case study can contain global relations associated with a layout in addition to relations associated with the sketch. A case study sketch has no associativity to the global layout until dimensions have been declared. You use case study relations to specify case study dimensions to be the same as the global layout dimensions. If one is modified, the other is automatically updated. Case study reference dimensions control additional parameters through relations, so you are not limited to the sketch dimensions. The parametric nature of a case study makes it ideal for testing motion limits and interference in a mechanism before you design the parts. Change or move an entity in a case study to see how other entities move or change parametrically. When you create a case study, a subwindow appears over the layout containing the Sketcher grid. You can create or retrieve two-dimensional geometry using typical Sketcher tools. In addition, you can copy any undimensioned geometry in the layout into the case study window. For more information on creating a sketch, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To Create a Case Study 1. In an open layout, click Tools > Case Study. 2. At the prompt, enter the name of a case study to open or enter a new name and click o o o o or press ENTER. The ENTER menu appears. CreateCreates a new case study. RetrieveRetrieves a case study. ListLists case studies created. ImportImports a case study.

3. Click Create. 4. At the prompt, enter a name for the new sketch. Sketcher opens. 5. When you have completed the sketch and have set the relations, save the sketch and click Sketch > Done. You return to the layout. To Retrieve a Case Study 1. In an open layout with a case study, click Tools > Case Study.

289

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

2. At the prompt, enter the name of a case study to open or enter a new name and click or press ENTER. The ENTER menu appears.

3. Select an option for opening the case study: o o o RetrieveProvides a list of case studies. ListOpens an Information window with a list of all sketches. ImportProvides a prompt in which to enter the name of a sketch to import.

Note: You cannot retrieve a case study with reference dimensions outside the layout. 4. Select the case study and click Open. The case study opens. To Copy Undimensioned Geometry into a Case Study 1. In a case study, click File > Import > Insert Layout. 2. Select the desired layout geometry. 3. Click OK when complete. Pro/ENGINEER copies the selected geometry into the case study. Note: After you have sketched the desired entities, dimension the geometry and regenerate the case study. To Create Dimensions in a Case Study 1. Click Sketch > Dimension and choose one of the following options: o o NormalCreates a regular dimension. ReferenceCreates a reference dimension. These have symbolic names (RD#). When the system solves the sketch, they revert to their numeric form. They cannot be edited. BaselineCreates an ordinate baseline dimension. ExplainDisplays information in the message area for an existing dimension.

o o

2. Follow the prompts to create the dimension. About Case Study Relations Relations pass information from the layout to the case study. Case study relations have specific functionality: When you add relations to the Relations dialog box, units appear in two formats: o Dimensions are labeled d1, d2, d3, and so forth.

290

Assembly o

Entity lengths, coordinate systems, and points are labeled as e1, e2, e3, and so forth.

You can write relations for procedures on entity lengths using the notation elen(#). For example, to add the length of sides e1, e2, and e3, enter: length=elen(1)+elen(2)+elen(3)

You can write relations for procedures on the X and Y distance between the first coordinate system sketched to another coordinate system or point using the notation ecoord[x or y](#). For example, to compute hyp, the shortest distance between the first coordinate system sketched and a point labeled e1, enter: hyp=sqrt(ecoordx(1)*ecoordx(1)+ecoordy(1)* ecoordy(1))

In a layout, you can include free notes with embedded relation symbols from a case study by using an ampersand (&) before the symbol. For example, you could include a relation that would extract the value for length, previously defined in the case study, and add it to the layout: TOTAL LENGTH= &length To Add Case Study Relations 1. Click Tools > Relations. The Relations dialog box opens. 2. Click Local Parameters. The dialog box expands to include parameters created in the layout. 3. Click .

4. Select parameters from the graphics window or enter parameter names to create the relations and click OK. 5. Repeat steps three and four to add additional relations. To Modify Case Study Relations 1. Click Tools > Relations. The Relations dialog box opens. 2. Modify the relations and click OK. 3. To recalculate the relations in the case study, click Edit > Regenerate. To Declare Case Study Dimensions 1. In a layout case study, define a relation using the global dimension as a parameter. 2. Regenerate the object so that the relationship takes effect. 3. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Declaration. 4. Select a dimension in the case study sketch. You are prompted to select a dimension.

291

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

5. Select the dimension and enter the name of the existing global dimension in the layout. Note: To change the constraints established by the declarations, you must remove the declarations.

Managing Large Assemblies

Simplified Representations About Simplified Representations
Simplified representations improve the regeneration, retrieval, and display times of assemblies, so you can work more efficiently. Use simplified representations to control which members of an assembly are brought into session and displayed. For example, to speed the regeneration and display process, you can temporarily remove a complicated and unrelated subassembly from your portion of the assembly. You can create multiple simplified representations for an assembly. Each simplified representation can correspond to an area or level of detail of the assembly in which individual designers or groups are working. The name of the active simplified representation appears in the graphics window. You can simplify an assembly by excluding components in a particular representation or substituting one component (part or assembly) for another. Substitutions can simplify your working environment, while still including critical geometry. You can use simplified representations in Assembly, Manufacturing, Part, and Drawing modes, as well as in Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/CASTING, and Pro/PROCESS for assemblies. In Part mode, you can simplify part geometry to include or exclude individual features, define a work region, or copy surfaces to create a surface envelope. In Drawing mode, you can create multiple views of an assembly. The simplified representation must be specified before a view is added. Note: You can create a simplified representation for assembly skeletons. Information is provided in the Pro/ENGINEER Part Help.

About Creating Simplified Representations

When an assembly is created it is displayed in default representation. The default representation includes all assembly components in their master representation. When you create a simplified representation, you designate the way that individual components are represented in the assembly. The definition of a simplified representation consists only of components that have been selected for specific representation types. Simplified representations can be created on the fly or by using predefined rules that include zones, model names, geometric size, geometric distance, parent and child relationships, and parametric expressions. Simplified representations created by defined rules update parametrically upon retrieval and regeneration according to changes made to the model. These simplified representations reflect the rules as the design changes.

292

Assembly

Excluding and Substituting Components The inclusion, exclusion, or substitution of components affects only the current simplified representation. The appearance of the assembly changes, but there is no effect on other features or component. Components or subassemblies can be excluded from a particular simplified representation, and selected components can be excluded from an included subassembly. Rules and Restrictions To assemble a simplified representation of a part or subassembly into an assembly, the top-level assembly must also be a simplified representation (not a master representation). For an assembly in a simplified representation, the following functions are unavailable: Restructuring components, creating Family Tables, and using integrate Creating a cutout Deleting or suppressing substituted components Redefining components that are excluded or substituted

To Create a Simplified Representation On the Fly

1. In an open assembly, select one or several components, click View > Representation, and choose one of the following options: ExcludeExcludes the selected components from the simplified representation. Master RepSets the selected components to Master representation mode. If the top level assembly is in its default state of Master representation, it is automatically set to Exclude. Assembly OnlyHides selected components while displaying assembly features that intersect the selected components. Geometry OnlySets the selected components to Geometry representation mode. Graphics OnlySets the selected components to Graphics representation mode. Symbolic OnlyHides the selected components and represents them with a symbol. Click Insert > Annotations > Symbol to define a symbol. User DefinedActivates a simplified representation from the selected component. or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens to 2. Click the Simp Rep tab. 293

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Click Edit > Save. The Save Display Elements dialog box opens. Accept the default name of the new simplified representation or enter a new one and click OK. The new representation is added to the list of simplified representations in the View Manager and is set to active. 4. Click Close to exist the View Manager. Note: Creating simplified representations on the fly is recommended for most simplified representations. The second method of using rules is only required for simplified representation that update on regeneration.

To Create Simplified Representations Using Definition Rules

Each rule consists of an action and one or more conditions. The conditions appear in an editable list and are executed in bottom-up order. 1. In an open assembly, click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 2. Click New. A default name for the simplified representation appears. Accept the name or enter a new one. The EDIT dialog box opens. Note: The list of simplified representations appears in alphanumeric order. Plan the names in advance to make it easier to find specific representations. 3. Click to set up rule actions. The Rule Actions dialog box opens.

. Use the Rep Action column to set a representation 4. To add a rule, click action. To change the representation action, click within the column and select one of the following options: o o o o o o Exclude Master Rep Geometry Rep Graphics Rep Assem Only Symbolic Only

The Condition column lists previously defined conditions. If no conditions were defined, the column is empty. Right-click in the Condition column and select one of the following options from the shortcut menu: o o o o NewOpens the Rule Editor dialog box to create a new condition. RedefineOpens the Rule Editor dialog box to redefine an existing condition. RenameRenames an existing condition. DeleteDeletes the selected condition.

294

Assembly

5. In the Rule Editor, click Options > Build Query. The query builder opens. 6. Define a rule using Attributes, History, Status, or Geometry. 7. Click Add New to add the rule to the query builder. For a combination of several rules use the logical operators Or and And. 8. Click OK.

Types of Simplified Representations

The main types of simplified representation are Geometry, Graphics, and Symbolic. Use the View Manager dialog box to select the representation type. All simplified representations provide access to components in the assembly and are based on the Master representation. Graphics and Geometry representations speed up the retrieval process of large assemblies. However, you cannot modify component features in them. Assembly features such as cuts and holes are represented, so an accurate geometric model is displayed while performance is improved. You can access component model information from the Info menu or from the Model Tree. However, because Graphics and Geometry representations do not contain part model features, individual part feature information is not available for these representations. Master representations reflect the fully detailed assembly. The Model Tree lists all its components and identifies them as included, excluded, or substituted. Note: When an assembly is created, the Default representation and the Master representation are identical. You can update the Default representation to create a variation of the Master representation. Graphics representations contain only information for display so you can quickly browse through a large assembly. Graphics representations cannot be modified or referenced. The type of available graphic display depends on the save_model_display configuration option setting: o o o wireframe (default)Components appear in wireframe. shading_low or (shading_med, shading_high)Components are shaded in various levels. shading_lodComponent shading depends on the View Performance dialog box setting. Click View > Display Settings > Performance to access this dialog box.

Graphics representations display information that is saved in the assembly context. If parts are modified outside the context of the assembly, their display is not updated until the master representation of the assembly is retrieved. Geometry representations contain complete component geometry information. Compared with Graphics representations, Geometry representations take longer to retrieve and require more memory. They can be used to perform the following tasks: o Remove hidden lines. 295

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o o o

Obtain measurement information. Calculate mass properties. Reference other assembly components.

Unlike Graphics representations, Geometry representation intersections update to changes made to the assembly (but not changes made to the part), such as dimension modification, feature redefinition, changes in component placement, and so forth. Symbolic representations allow you to represent components with a symbol. Placement of a Symbolic representation is similar to that of datum points. Pointtags for the symbolic representations are visible in the assembly. It is very difficult to differentiate them from datum point features if datum point display is on. Assembly Only representations allow you to hide selected components while displaying assembly features that intersect the selected components.

Example: Excluding a Component from a Simplified Representation

The Master representation.

296

Assembly

A simplified representation. The blower subassembly is excluded.

A simplified representation. All components except the piston subassembly and the crankshaft are excluded.

To Change Properties of a Simplified Representation

1. Create a simplified representation and then close the View Manager dialog box. The name of the active simplified representation appears in the graphics window. 2. To change the simplified representation of a component, select it in the Model Tree or graphics window, click View > Representation, and then choose one of the following options: Exclude 297

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Master Rep Assembly Only Geometry Only Graphics Only Symbolic Only User Defined Note: You can also click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. Click Properties and make changes to the simplified representation. 3. To save the changes, click . The View Manager dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. Right-click the current representation and choose Save from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Save. 4. Click Close.

Opening a Simplified Representation by Default

The open_simplified_rep_by_default configuration option enables you to open an assembly in a selected simplified representation. When this option is set to yes, the Open Rep dialog box prompts you to select a simplified representation state whenever an assembly is retrieved. In this way you can avoid opening large assemblies in their Master representations and conserve system resources. You can specify a representation name to be highlighted when the Open Rep dialog opens. Add the name of the representation in place of yes or no for the configuration option. If the model does not have a representation by that name, it will open the Open Rep dialog box and prompt you to create a new representation. Clear the Create New Simplified Rep check box to select a different representation. Note: open_simplified_rep_by_default only affects assembly simplified representations. For retrieving drawing simplified representations, set the configuration option open_draw_simp_rep_by_default to yes.

To Set a Simplified Representation to Active

1. In an open assembly, click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 2. Double-click a simplified representation, or right-click and choose Set Active from the shortcut menu, or click Display > Set Active. Note: The red arrow indicates the current active representation.

298

Assembly

To Retrieve a Simplified Representation of an Assembly

1. Click File > Open. The File Open dialog box opens. 2. Select an assembly, and then click Open Rep. The Open Rep dialog box opens. 3. Select an existing simplified representations or click Define to create a new one. Note: Click 4. Click OK. Note: If you saved a simplified representation when some of the assembly components were not in session, the system will not be able to open the assembly file. to preview the selected simplified representation.

Retrieving Simplified Representations

You can retrieve an assembly in an existing simplified representation or create a new simplified representation on the fly with the Open Rep command in the File Open dialog box. If an assembly representation excludes all instances of a particular component, that component is not retrieved with the representation. The regen_simp_retrieve configuration option enables you to control the regeneration of simplified representation assemblies. When this configuration option is set to yes, simplified representation assemblies are regenerated upon retrieval and placement references are updated. The system retrieves and regenerates only active models. Models that are missing external references because of simplified representations are not regenerated. When retrieving the Master representation of an assembly, the system brings all models into session before retrieving substitute components. Substitute components are retrieved into session only if they have existing references.

Tip: Retrieve Components Before Saving a Simplified Representation

When you back up or save an assembly in a simplified representation without all components in memory, a warning message appears. You can continue or cancel the operation. The warning appears when some components are missing during an operation of File > Backup to a local directory, or File > Save to a connected workspace, for example, from a local disk to a Pro/INTRALINK database. Bring all necessary components of the assembly into session before saving the file.

To Copy a Simplified Representation

1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 2. Right-click a simplified representation and choose Copy from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Copy.

299

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Accept the default name for the copied representation or enter a new one, and then click OK. If the simplified representation includes user-defined definition rules, the Copy Options dialog box opens. 4. Select one of the following options: o Copy without Definition RulesCopies the current status of all components in the new representation. The copy does not contain definition rules and on-demand updating is disabled. Copy with Definition RulesCopies the last saved component status in the new representation. The copy contains definition rules and on-demand updating is enabled.

Note: Simplified representation with definition rules can cause instability when used in drawings. The contents of the representation can change as the assembly changes. 5. Click OK.

To Rename a Simplified Representation

1. In an open assembly, click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 2. Right-click the simplified representation name to be changed and choose Rename from the shortcut menu, or select the simplified representation and click Edit > Rename. 3. Enter a new name. 4. Click Close.

To Delete a Simplified Representation

When you delete a parametric simplified representation, all the information associated with it is deleted. or View > View Manager. The View Manager 1. In an open assembly, click dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 2. Right-click the name of the simplified representation to delete and choose Remove from the shortcut menu, or select the simplified representation and click Edit > Remove.

To List Simplified Representations

1. In an open assembly, click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 2. Click Display > List for a description of all user-defined simplified representations.

300

Assembly

To Substitute a Simplified Representation for a Subassembly or Part

1. Create a new simplified representation for the assembly component you want to substitute. 2. Open the assembly and select the component to be substituted. 3. Click View > Representation > User Defined. The Select Rep dialog box opens. 4. Select the user-defined representation to replace the selected component and click Apply. The component is substituted in the graphics window. 5. To save the change, click dialog box opens. or View > View Manager. The View Manager

6. Right-click the active representation and choose Save from the shortcut menu, or click Edit > Save. The Save Display Elements dialog box opens. 7. Click OK to save the changes to the simplified representation. Alternatively, you can substitute a simplified representation for a subassembly or part by completing the following procedure: 1. Create a new simplified representation for the assembly component you want to substitute. or View > View Manager. The View Manager 2. Open the assembly and click dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 3. Activate a simplified representation and click Properties. 4. Select a component for substitution and click opens. . The Select Rep dialog box

5. Select a user-defined representation and click Apply. The component is substituted in the graphics window.

About Placing a Component in a Simplified Representation

When you edit the placement definition of a subassembly that includes components in a simplified representation, references to components excluded from the simplified representation may be required. The missing components can be called into the assembly during an Edit Definition operation with the Retrieve Refs command. The missing components appear in the graphics window for reference purposes. When editing is complete, the excluded components disappear from the graphics window.

301

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

To Retrieve Placement References

1. In an open assembly, right-click a subassembly with an excluded component and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Component Placement dashboard appears. 2. Right-click the constraint set in the navigation area of the Placement panel or in the graphics window and choose Retrieve Refs from the shortcut menu. The Confirmation menu manager appears. 3. Click Confirm. The component excluded from the simplified representation appears in its proper place in the assembly. . The component 4. Edit the placement definition of the component and click excluded from the simplified representation disappears from the graphics window. 5. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed to remove retrieved components from memory.

Simplified Representations in Top-Down and Bottom-Up Design

Use simplified representations in top-down and bottom-up design approaches to conceptualize your design and to simplify the representation of complex assemblies. When you use a top-down design approach, you create space claims called envelopes for components in an assembly. You build the detailed parts and subassemblies to fit the envelopes. For example, you might create envelopes for the engine, transmission, and many other complex subassemblies in an automotive design. As each team creates detailed designs of its subassembly, you can substitute the fully detailed subassembly for the corresponding envelope. When you use a bottom-up approach, you start with a complex assembly and simplify it. One simplified representation could act as a design's table of contents by substituting a lower-level simplified representation for each subassembly. Another simplified representation might exclude portions of the design to focus on specific areas.

Updating Mass Properties of Simplified Representations

Use the force_upd_assem_mp_in_simp_rep configuration option to control the update of top-level assembly mass properties according to simplified representation definitions. Set the configuration option to yes to reflect simplified representation definitions in mass properties calculations. Set the configuration option to no to disregard simplified representation definitions and perform all mass property calculations on the top-level Master representation.

302

Assembly

On-Demand Simplified Representations About On-Demand Simplified Representations

When an assembly component is excluded from a simplified representation, or when it is displayed in a Graphics state, that component cannot be redefined, rerouted, or repeated. To make the component available for editing, you must redefine the simplified representation or activate a different one. With on-demand simplified representations, you can specify whether and when to retrieve components not completely included in a simplified representation. Control on-demand settings in the following ways: Retrieve Master or Geometry representations of components in a non-editable state. Define the conditions under which dynamic, on-demand simplified representations update. Enable or disable dynamic updating. Retrieve and erase components that you need to reference temporarily while you are working.

Dynamic, on-demand simplified representations improve system performance. They allow you to work with a minimum amount of model data. Additional design content is available as needed.

To Define On-Demand Simplified Representations Settings

1. In an open assembly, click Tools > Assembly Setting > On Demand. The OnDemand Settings dialog box opens. 2. Set a mode of operation for on-demand retrieval: o o o PromptA confirmation is required before each retrieval of on-demand simplified representations. Never prompt (default)Models are retrieved without confirmation. DisableOn-Demand retrieval is disabled.

Note: Select Retrieve backed up references to retrieve the original model of any backed-up references. Upon retrieval, the backed-up references are updated to reflect changes in the original models. 3. Select a task from the task list to define its setting in On-Demand mode: o o ActivationSelect On-Demand Activation to retrieve the Master Representation for activating a component. RegenerationSelect On-Demand Regeneration to retrieve simplified parent components in a higher representation level upon model regeneration. Click Automatic for automatic selection of the representation

303

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

type to retrieve, or click Master to retrieve all simplified representations in their Master representation. o SelectionSelect On-Demand Selection to retrieve simplified components in a higher representation level for selecting internal items. Click Automatic or Master. EditingSelect On-Demand Editing to retrieve simplified components and their parents in a higher representation level for editing purposes. Click Automatic, Master, or Master with Ancestors (parents of parents). Clean UpSelect On-Demand Clean Up to remove unmodified simplified representations retrieved on-demand. Click Remove to maintain removed models in session, or click Remove and Erase to erase retrieved models from session. Note: Modified on-demand simplified representations are not automatically removed or erased from memory. To erase such components click File > Erase > Component Reps. When you modify values of components in a Graphics representation, the changes do not take effect until the model is regenerated. To avoid losing your changes, regenerate the assembly before you remove the retrieved components from memory. 4. Click OK.

To Erase Unused On-Demand Component Representations

In some cases components that are retrieved on-demand remain in memory. Use the following procedure to erase On-Demand components that are currently not used in any simplified representation. 1. In an open assembly with unused on-demand simplified representations, click File > Erase > Component Reps. The Erase Unused On-Demand Reps dialog box opens. 2. Click one of the following options: o Erase un-modified components only (default)Erases only unmodified on-demand component representations. Modified representations are not erased. Erase all repsErases all on-demand component representations.

3. Click OK.

304

Assembly

External Simplified Representations About External Simplified Representations

Use external simplified representations to store simplified representations of assemblies without having to modify the original assembly. External simplified representations are stored as new models of a special assembly type. You can create multiple external simplified representations to correspond to different assembly areas and levels of detail. Low-level components without top-level and intermediatelevel assemblies can be included, so multiple users can work simultaneously. The use of external simplified representations minimizes the risk of accidental modifications to top-level assemblies. All the components in an external simplified representation are the same as those in the reference assembly. Therefore, it is not necessary to propagate modifications made to the external simplified representation or reference assembly. All modifications to external simplified representations are automatically reflected in the reference assembly. Rules for External Simplified Representations External simplified representations are stored in a separate assembly (.asm) file with an external simplified representation subtype. The creation, redefinition, or removal of an external simplified representation does not change the reference assembly. The reference assembly need not be in session when working with external simplified representations. Components from any level of the reference assembly can be included in the external simplified representation. The reference assembly and intermediate subassemblies can be excluded even if low-level components are included. When a model contains substituted components, the top level assembly is always included in the external simplified representation. The location of components included in external simplified representations is fully associated with corresponding components of the reference assembly. You can specify whether components included in external simplified representations can be modified or used for reference purposes only. References can be created within external simplified representations. Pro/ENGINEER treats such references as if they were created in the reference assembly. Component and feature operations can be performed on the top level of an external simplified representation model.

305

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Creating External Simplified Representations Use the following methods to create external simplified representations: View > View ManagerSelect a simplified representation, then click Edit > Copy as External. File > NewSelect the reference assembly model during the assembly creation process. File > Save a CopySave a copy of your assembly by specifying an external simplified representation as the type of file to be saved.

To Create an External Simplified Representation Using View Manager

This procedure saves a simplified representation of an open assembly. 1. In an open assembly, click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens to the Simp Rep tab. 2. Select a simplified representation and click Edit > Copy as External. The Create External Simplified Rep dialog box opens. 3. Enter a name for the external simplified representation and select one of the following options: o Open in a separate windowOpens the external simplified representation in a new active window. The master assembly becomes inactive. Save the modelSaves the external simplified representation. The saved model is not displayed in the graphics window and the master assembly is left active.

4. Click OK.

To Create an External Simplified Representation Using the New Dialog Box

This procedure creates an external simplified representation without opening the reference assembly. 1. Click File > New. The New dialog box opens. 2. Click Assembly and select Ext. Simp. Rep from the Sub-type list. 3. Enter a name for the external simplified representation or accept the default and click OK. The Open dialog box opens. 4. Select a reference assembly and click one of the following: o OpenOpens the assembly in a separate window and the EDIT:<Representation Number> dialog box opens. A second column labelled EDIT:<Representation Number> appears in the Model Tree. By

306

Assembly

default Master Rep appears next to the assembly name. Use the Include and Exclude tabs to specify components for inclusion or exclusion from the external simplified representation. Click o when complete.

Open RepOpens the Open Rep dialog box. Choose one of the following operations: Select a representation type and click OK. Define the simplified representation and click when complete.

Click Create New Simplified Rep and click OK. Enter a name for the simplified representation at the prompt or accept the default name and click . Define the simplified representation and click when complete.

Note: The Enable On-Demand Updating option is available for a representation type other than the Master representation.

To Create an External Simplified Representation Using Save a Copy

This procedure copies an active simplified representation without reopening the reference assembly. 1. In an open assembly with an active simplified representation, click File > Save a Copy. The Save a Copy dialog box opens. 2. Enter a new model name. 3. Select External Simplified Representation in the Type box and click OK. The copy is saved as an external simplified representation of the currently active simplified representation.

To Set the Purpose of an External Simplified Representation Component

This procedure determines if components within an external simplified representation are modifiable or not. Feature and component operations cannot be carried out on components specified for reference use. 1. Open an external simplified representation and select a top-level component from the Model Tree. 2. Click Edit > Set For Ref. Only to use components as references. Note: To make the component modifiable again, select the top-level component and click Edit > Modifiable.

To Redefine an External Simplified Representation

1. Open an external simplified representation assembly. 2. Select the top-level component in the Model Tree and click Edit > Definition. The Open Rep dialog box opens. 307

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

3. Select a representation type and click OK. The EDIT:<Representation Number> dialog box opens. 4. Use the Include and Exclude tabs to specify components for inclusion or exclusion from the external simplified representation. 5. Click when complete.

To Update an External Simplified Representation

This procedure updates an external simplified representation to reflect changes in the reference assembly. 1. Open an external simplified representation assembly and select the top-level component from the Model Tree. 2. Click Edit > Update Representation. The Open Rep dialog box opens. 3. Select a representation type and click OK. The external simplified representation is updated. Note: In case of a structural conflict between the external simplified representation and the reference assembly, you may need to redefine the external simplified representation.

Lightweight Components in Simplified Representations About Symbolic Representations

Symbolic representations or lightweight components are not represented as solid models but as symbols in the assembly. Lightweight components are created as symbolic simplified representations. Lightweight components contain minimal geometry which improves system performance time. However, you can apply mass properties to symbolic simplified representations. Note: Set the allow_create_symb_rep configuration option to yes to create symbolic representations. You can use lightweight components in the following ways: Assemble a lightweight component. Substitute a solid component with lightweight component. Create a lightweight component on-the-fly when adding a component into an assembly.

An example of lightweight component use would be fasteners in an assembly. Usually, descriptive symbols with parameter information identify the components in a drawing. Lightweight components can retain parameters, relations, mass properties, Family Table information, and they appear in the Bill of Materials (BOM).

308

Assembly

To Assemble a Lightweight Component

1. Create or redefine a user-defined simplified representation of the assembly. 2. Click or Insert > Component > Assemble. The Open dialog box opens.

3. Select a component that contains a symbol. The Open Rep dialog box opens. 4. Select Symbolic Rep and then click OK. The Symbolic Component dialog box opens to the Attachment tab. 5. Specify the Origin, Annotation Plane, and Orientation Reference to place the symbol. 6. Click the Symbol tab and select a symbol from the Symbol Instance list. The selected symbol is displayed in the graphics window. 7. Click OK. Note: To edit the symbol properties, right-click the lightweight component in the Model Tree and choose Edit Definition from the shortcut menu.

Shrinkwrap Models About Shrinkwrap Models

A Shrinkwrap model is a Pro/ENGINEER part composed of a collection of surfaces that represents the exterior shape of a source model. You can use a part or an assembly as the source model for a Shrinkwrap. Shrinkwrap models usually reduce disk and memory usage by more than 90 percent. This varies according to the complexity of the source model and the quality setting used to generate the Shrinkwrap model. Memory saving is considerable in assemblies with many hidden components. When a low to mid range quality setting is used, the Shrinkwrap model collects a smaller number of surfaces and the resulting file is smaller. The recommended method for creating a Shrinkwrap model is to try various combinations of settings for different models to obtain a firsthand account of the differences in file size. Create Shrinkwrap models to perform the following tasks: Represent complex design assemblies with one lightweight part. Improve system performance with large assemblies (Shrinkwrap models load faster than complex models). Provide an accurate external representation of the model for use by other design teams, suppliers, or customers, without disclosing the model's internal design. Others can visualize the product and conduct space claim studies, form and fit studies, interference checking, and so forth, while you protect trade secrets, patented designs, and other proprietary information. Control and handle the amount of information included in the model: o Close holes and gaps.

309

Assembly - Help Topic Collection o o o

Control the level of detail. Assign exact mass properties from the original model. Include additional datum geometry referenced from the original model.

Export to standard formats, such as IGES, STEP, and VRML. Use as standard assembly components. Produce a visualization of complex assemblies using tools such as Windchill and the Web.

Shrinkwrap models can be created automatically or manually by specifying surfaces to be included in the model. The Shrinkwrap model is stored as a separate Pro/ENGINEER part. Note: Shrinkwrap models are not associative. They do not update when the source model is modified.

Types of Shrinkwrap Models

You can create the following types of non associative Shrinkwrap model: a surface subset, a faceted solid, or a merged solid. The following figure shows a normal shaded version of a model. The figures that follow illustrate the changes that occur when different types of Shrinkwrap settings are applied to the model.

Surface Subset A surface subset Shrinkwrap model is a single part, composed of a collection of surfaces and datum features, that represents the external surfaces of a reference model. You can adjust the quality level of the collected surfaces. Applying a higher quality increases the amount of surfaces to be included in the Shrinkwrap. You can exclude surfaces to reduce the model size or add surfaces to get a better representation of the source model. The surface subset is the fastest Shrinkwrap method and results in the smallest model size, one comprised of surfaces only. Each surface collected from the exterior of the original design is copied into the Shrinkwrap model. Colors are retained. Creating a surface subset Shrinkwrap model produces external Copy Geometry features. 310

Assembly

The following figure shows a full-color surface subset Shrinkwrap model at level 5 quality.

Faceted Solid A faceted solid Shrinkwrap model provides an approximate visual representation of the original model. It is a single solid model, representing all external surfaces, with additional surfaces added to bridge gaps and complete the solid. You can adjust the quality level of the collected surfaces. Higher quality increases both the accuracy of the representation and the size of the output file. No colors are retained. Creating a faceted solid Shrinkwrap model produces an external Copy Geometry feature and a protrusion. The following figure shows a faceted shaded Shrinkwrap model at level 5 quality.

Merged Solid A merged solid Shrinkwrap model provides a very accurate solid representation of the original model. The system merges external components from the reference assembly model into a single part representing the solid geometry in all collected components. The system creates the exported Shrinkwrap model by merging and copying components from the reference model into the Shrinkwrap model. When a merged solid Shrinkwrap model has an enclosed cavity, the system fills it with solid geometry. Colors are retained. Creating a merged solid Shrinkwrap model produces an external Copy Geometry feature and a protrusion.

311

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

The following figure shows a merged shaded Shrinkwrap model at level 5 quality.

To Create a Surface Subset Exported Shrinkwrap Model

1. Retrieve a part or an assembly (or a simplified representation of an assembly) as the source model. 2. Click File > Save a Copy. The Save a Copy dialog box opens. In the Type list, click Shrinkwrap. 3. Enter a name for the Shrinkwrap model in the New Name box, or accept the default name and click OK. The Create Shrinkwrap dialog box opens. 4. In the Creation Method area of the dialog box, click Surface Subset. 5. In the Quality area of the dialog box, specify the Shrinkwrap model quality level. The quality level ranges from 010 (the default value is 1). When zero is selected the system does not collect any surfaces. Instead, you can select surfaces manually using the Select Surfaces collection button.

6. In the Special Handling area of the dialog box, select or clear any of the following options: o o o o Fill holes (selected by default)Fills all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface in the Shrinkwrap model. Ignore Skeletons (selected by default)Excludes skeleton model geometry from the Shrinkwrap model. Ignore quilts (selected by default)Excludes external quilts from the Shrinkwrap model. Ignore small surfaces (selected by default)Excludes surfaces smaller than the specified percentage of the model's size from the Shrinkwrap model. Enter an integer (0100). Assign Mass PropertiesAssigns mass properties of the source model to the Shrinkwrap model.

7. In the Include Datum References area of the dialog box, select additional geometry to be copied into the Shrinkwrap model. Click 312 Select Datums and

Assembly

select datum planes, points, curves, axes, and coordinate system references to be included or removed from the Shrinkwrap model. Note: If you change the Shrinkwrap creation method after specifying some references, these references are no longer displayed. If you switch back to surface subset creation, the references are displayed again. 8. In the Preview Options area of the dialog box, select one of the following options to view selected surfaces: o Real Colors (default)Displays only selected surfaces, that is, the surfaces that will be copied into the Shrinkwrap model in their original colors. You Select can select invisible (unselected) surfaces manually using Surfaces. During the next preview, these surfaces are displayed in their original colors. This method provides faster preview display. o Gray-OrangeDisplays the active model in orange, with selected surfaces shown in gray. You can select visible orange surfaces manually using Select Surfaces. During the next preview, these surfaces are displayed in gray. The message window provides information in the format "X of Y surfaces kept." 9. In the Additional Surfaces area of the dialog box, select individual surfaces to be Select Surfaces and select surfaces included in the Shrinkwrap model. Click to add to or remove from the Shrinkwrap model. Note: If you change the quality level after selecting surfaces, all surfaces that you manually selected previously remain selected. 10. In the Output File Name area of the dialog box, specify the Shrinkwrap model name. The system assigns the Shrinkwrap model a default file name based on the name of the source model. Accept the default file name in the format model_name_sw0001 or enter a new name. The system automatically appends the extension .prt to the file name. When the source model is a simplified representation of an assembly, the default name of the Shrinkwrap model is simplifiedrepname_sw.prt. You can select or clear Use default template (selected by default). 11. Click Preview to display the current reference selections and to obtain graphical and textual feedback about the subset of information that will be captured in the Shrinkwrap model. The model is displayed according to the preview method selected, Real Colors or Gray-Orange. You can zoom in and select unselected surfaces to include, or you can undo selections using Select Surfaces.

Note: If you click View > Repaint during preview, the display of selected surfaces disappears from the source model, leaving it on display in its original colors. When you click Preview again, the selected surfaces are again displayed. 12. Click OK. The system copies a subset of information from the source model to create a Shrinkwrap model and saves the new part to the working directory. The subset consists of selected surfaces from the source model, mass properties and 313

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

additional geometry according to your specifications. The Create Shrinkwrap dialog box remains open and the source model remains in session as the current object. 13. Click Close.

Setting Quality Levels for Shrinkwrap Models

You can adjust the quality level of a Shrinkwrap model using the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box. The higher the quality, the more detailed the Shrinkwrap. However, processing time increases as well. The recommended method for creating a Shrinkwrap model is to specify a low quality setting, preview the results, and gradually increase the quality level as necessary. Faceted Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Models Quality is inversely proportional to the size of the triangles used to create the faceted model. At a lower setting, the system creates fewer, larger triangles more quickly, producing a roughly accurate representation of the object's shape. At a higher setting, the system creates many smaller triangles, producing a more detailed, more accurate representation of the model. The system automatically joins triangles when needed to bridge gaps. Merged Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Models At a low quality setting, a merged solid Shrinkwrap model is composed of a rough collection of contributing components. At a higher setting, the system collects contributing components more accurately, producing a more accurate representation of the object's shape.

To Create a Faceted Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Model

1. Retrieve a part or an assembly (or a simplified representation of an assembly) as the source model. 2. Click File > Save a Copy. The Save a Copy dialog box opens. In the Type list box, click Shrinkwrap. 3. Enter a name for the Shrinkwrap model in the New Name box, or accept the default name and click OK. The Create Shrinkwrap dialog box opens. 4. In the Creation Method area of the dialog box, select Faceted Solid. Note: The Quality, Special Handling, and Include Datum References areas of the dialog box are set in the same way as when a surface subset Shrinkwrap model is created. 5. In the Faceted Solid Options area of the dialog box, you can select Invert Triangle Pairs. 6. In the Output Format area of the dialog box, specify one of the following output file formats:

314

Assembly o o o o Part (selected by default)Creates a Pro/ENGINEER part with normal geometry. LW PartCreates a lightweight Pro/ENGINEER part with faceted geometry. STLCreates an STL file. VRMLCreates a VRML file.

The system automatically appends the extension .stl to STL file names and the extension .wrl to VRML file names. Select or clear Use default template (selected by default for Part and LW Part file formats; not available for STL or VRML file formats). 7. Click OK. The system computes faceted solid geometry to create a solid Shrinkwrap model, and saves the new part. The subset consists of faceted solid geometry from the source model, along with mass properties and additional geometry according to your specifications. The Create Shrinkwrap dialog box remains open and the source model remains in session as the current object. 8. Click Close.

Lightweight Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap Parts

Lightweight parts can be created by importing an STL, VRML, or faceted Catia file, or by creating a faceted solid Shrinkwrap model in LW Part file format. Creating a faceted solid Shrinkwrap model in LW Part file format produces a new part with a facet feature. All the surfaces of this facet feature are planar and all its edges are straight. Using LW Part instead of Part as the output file format for a faceted solid Shrinkwrap model reduces the size of the resulting part. Lightweight parts can be viewed in wireframe or shaded display style. Fast HLR, which is based on shading, is available. You can create cross sections or compute a whole-model projected area. You can select and assemble lightweight parts. Lightweight parts can be modified after creation. Note: A part can have both normal geometry and lightweight faceted geometry.

To Create a Merged Solid Exported Shrinkwrap Model

1. Retrieve an assembly (or a simplified representation of an assembly) as the source model. 2. Click File > Save a Copy. The Save a Copy dialog box opens. In the Type list, click Shrinkwrap. 3. Enter a name for the Shrinkwrap model in the New Name box, or accept the default name and click OK. The Create Shrinkwrap dialog box opens. 4. In the Creation Method area of the dialog box, select Merged Solid. Note: The Quality, Special Handling, and Include Datum References areas of the dialog box are set in the same way as when a surface subset Shrinkwrap model is created. 315

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

5. In the Include Datum References area of the dialog box, you can select additional Select Datums and geometry to be included in the Shrinkwrap model. Click select datum planes, points, curves, axes, and coordinate system references to be included or removed from the Shrinkwrap model. Note: If you change the Shrinkwrap creation method after specifying some references, these references are no longer displayed. If you switch back to merged solid creation, the references are again displayed. 6. In the Additional Components area of the dialog box, you can select individual Select components to contribute to the Shrinkwrap model. Click Components and select components to be added or removed from those collected by the system or selected manually using Select Components. 7. In the Output File Name area of the dialog box, specify the Shrinkwrap model name. Select or clear Use default template (selected by default). 8. Click Preview to obtain graphical and textual feedback about the subset of information that will be captured in the Shrinkwrap model. The message window provides information about how many components were included and how many excluded from the representation, in the format "X of Y components have been selected." You can add or remove components using Select Components.

9. Click OK. The system copies a subset of information from the source model to create a Shrinkwrap model and saves the new part to disk. The subset consists of solid geometry collected from all collected components from the source model, along with mass properties and additional geometry according to your specifications. The Create Shrinkwrap dialog box remains open and the source model remains in session as the current object. 10. Click Close.

Display Styles About Display Styles

You can assign four display styles to the components in your model. Modifying the display style improves computer performance as assemblies become larger. The two main display styles are shaded (solid) and lined. Line styles display the outlines of the component or model in increasing detail. The following display styles are available: WireframeDisplays front and back lines equally. Hidden LineDisplays hidden lines in faint tones. No HiddenDoes not display lines behind forward surfaces. ShadedDisplays the model as a shaded solid.

316

Assembly

To Create a Display Style

1. Click or View > View Manager.

2. Click Style. 3. Click New. A default name for the style representation appears. 4. Accept the default style name or type a new name and press ENTER. The Edit: Style dialog box opens. 5. Select components and then select a display style: o o o Select a component to be Blanked. Click the Show tab and select a display style. Click the By Display tab and select a subassembly. Click Show and select a display style for the subassembly. .

6. Click

7. Click Close.

To Change the Display Style of a Component

1. Select the components in the graphics window or Model Tree that you want affected by the display style. 2. Click View > Display Style and select a display style from the list. The component display style changes.

Envelopes About Envelopes

An envelope is a part created to represent a predetermined set of components (parts and subassemblies) in an assembly. The envelope uses simple geometry to reduce memory usage and looks similar to the components it represents. Envelopes must have both geometry and a nonempty list of reference components. They can be displayed in the Model Tree along with information concerning the part geometry and the list of components. Although envelopes are stored as part files with a .prt extension, you can only use them as envelopes in the assembly in which they were created. Envelope parts do not appear in the Assembly BOM. To use an envelope part, you must explicitly include it in a simplified representation. Substitute it for the components that it represents. An envelope can be used in multiple simplified representations. Use the By Envelope option in the View Manager dialog box to include an envelope in a simplified representation and automatically substitute its reference components. Components represented by the envelope can still be explicitly included, excluded, or substituted.

317

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

If the assembly contains closed quilt zones, you can select components to be included in the envelope by selecting a zone. Note: You can create an envelope while a simplified representation is active, without the master representation being in session. Envelopes can be created using Shrinkwrap methods only when the master representation is in session.

To Create an Envelope
1. Click or Insert > Component > Create. The Component Create dialog box opens. 2. Select Envelope. Accept the default Envelope Name. 3. Click OK. The Envelope Definition dialog box opens. 4. To include all components in a zone in an envelope, select By Zone. Note: By Zone is only available if the assembly contains a closed quilt zone. 5. Select the components that the envelope will replace from the graphics window or the Model Tree. 6. Click the Show only included components in the Model Tree check box to remove all other components from the Model Tree. 7. Click the Include box to remove the include/exclude toggle when selecting components in the Model Tree or graphics window. 8. Click the Exclude box and select components to be excluded from the envelope. Selected components will not be included in the envelope. 9. Click Envelope Part. The Envelope Method dialog box opens. 10. Select an envelope creation method: Create Envelope PartUse one of the following methods to create an envelope part: o Copy from ExistingCopy the envelope geometry from an existing part. Click Browse to select the part to copy. Click OK. The Component Placement dashboard appears. Define envelope part placement and click . o Locate Default DatumsUse one of the following methods to locate datum planes for a new envelope part: Three PlanesSelect three orthogonal datum planes to which the default new envelope part datum planes will be assembled. Axis Normal To PlaneSelect a single datum plane and an axis that is normal to it. The new envelope part is created with a datum plane and an axis is used to place the new component.

318

Assembly

Align Csys To CsysSelect a coordinate system in the top-level assembly. A new envelope part is created with a default coordinate system and default datum planes that is used to place the new component. o EmptyCreate an envelope part with no geometry. Geometry can be added after part creation by right-clicking the envelope part in the Model Tree and selecting Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. Create FeaturesCreate features for a new part. It appears as the active part in the Model Tree.

Select Existing Assembly ComponentSelect a component in the assembly and click OK. The Confirmation dialog box opens. Click Confirm to continue. Surface Subset ShrinkwrapSpecify the shrinkwrap Quality Level and Attributes. External referenced surfaces are copied into the shrinkwrap. Faceted Solid ShrinkwrapSpecify the shrinkwrap Quality Level and Attributes. The faceted solid geometry is computed to represent the selected external surfaces. This shrinkwrap type cannot be modified and is not associative with geometry changes in these models. 11. Accept the default Name or enter a new one. 12. Click OK. You return to the Envelope Definition dialog box. 13. Click OK.

To Include an Envelope in an Assembly

1. Click or View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. Simp Rep is selected by default. 2. Create a new simplified representation or select an existing one. 3. Click Edit > Redefine to set definition rules. The Edit dialog box opens. 4. Click Substitute > By Envelope. The Select Envelope(s) list appears. 5. Select the envelope from the list. 6. Click .

To Modify an Envelope
1. Click View > Envelope Manager. The Envelope Manager dialog box opens. 2. Select the envelope to be modified. 3. Click Edit. The Menu Manager opens prompting you to confirm. You can also right-click the envelope in the Model Tree and select Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Envelope Definition dialog box opens. Note: When you modify the list of components in an envelope, all simplified representations using that envelope are also updated to reflect the changes. 319

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

4. Click Envelope Geometry. The envelope activates for redefinition. 5. To modify an envelope created with a shrinkwrap method, redefine the shrinkwrap feature by excluding or including components, and then update the envelope geometry. 6. Use the Insert and Edit menus or the Feature toolbar to create new features for the envelope part. 7. Click OK.

To Delete an Envelope
1. Click View > Envelope Manager. The Envelope Manager dialog box opens. 2. Select the name of the envelope to be deleted and click Delete. Note: When envelopes are displayed in the Model Tree, you can right-click the envelope in the Model Tree and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

To Display Envelopes in the Model Tree

1. Click Settings > Tree Filters on the Model Tree menu bar. The Model Tree Items dialog box opens. 2. Select Envelope Components from the Display column. 3. Click OK. The envelopes appear in the Model Tree. Note: Envelopes placed in the assembly using predefined constraint sets appear in the Mechanism Design Tree Bodies folder.

Configuring Assemblies with PROGRAM

About Program
Each model in Pro/ENGINEER contains a listing of major design steps and parameters that can be edited when new design specifications arise. To enter the Pro/PROGRAM environment, click Tools > Program. For more information search the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.

320

Assembly

Glossary
Glossary for Assembly
Term assembly Definition A collection of components that are placed together using constraint sets to form a model. A simplified representation that excludes subassembly components. Only the assembly-level features and components of a subassembly are included. An assembly object without solid representation that must appear in the bill of materials or in a Product Data Management program. Examples include glue, paint, rivets, and screws. A two-dimensional, parametric layout used to test motion limits and interference in a mechanism before designing the parts. A part or a subassembly within the assembly. Components are arranged relative to each other via placement constraints. Stored constraints, connections, and other information that is used to automate component placement. A saved interface can be used whenever the component is placed in an assembly. The positioning of a part or subassembly in an assembly. It is based on placement-definition sets that determine how and where the component relates to the assembly. A set of specifications for placing an assembly component. A data-sharing feature that passes geometric information and user-defined parameters from a reference model. A view of the internal structure of a model created by a plane cutting through an assembly or part. A part or subassembly that has no geometry.

assembly only representation

bulk item

case study

component

component interface

component placement

constraint set

copy geometry

cross section

empty component

321

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Term envelope

Definition A part created to represent a predetermined set of components in an assembly. The envelope uses simple geometry to reduce system memory usage and looks similar to the components it represents. A customizable view to display assembly components separated from each other. Exploded views are used to illustrate how a model is assembled and what components are required. A component that readily adapts to new, different, or changing variables. A component whose placement in the assembly is fixed when its parent component is deleted or suppressed. A light-weight representation of the assembly that contains complete information on component geometry. An assembly representation that contains only information for display. The assembly cannot be modified or referenced. A type of merge feature that enables one way propagation of geometry and feature data from one part to another. An assembly containing exchangeable groups or representations of parts or subassemblies. The assembly component from which material is removed when a subtractive feature is created. A nonparametric, 2D sketch that drives parts and assemblies. A full and detailed representation of the assembly. A data-sharing feature that adds or subtracts the material of one component to or from another component after they have been placed in an assembly. The basis for the automatic creation of constraints during component placement.

exploded view

flexible component

frozen component

geometry representation

graphics representation

inheritance feature

interchange assembly

intersected component layout

master representation merge feature

orientation assumption

322

Assembly

Term packaged component

Definition An assembly component that is not fully constrained. All moving assembly components are packaged. An assembly in which a component position updates as the referenced components move or change. A function that identifies a potential placement location when a component is dragged during the placement process. Releasing the mouse button snaps the component to the identified location. A data-sharing feature that contains independent local geometry references. It can be copied to other models. The reorganization of components in an assembly. A feature that allows associative propagation of data from a reference component to a target component. A collection of surfaces and datums that represents the exterior shape of a model. A representation of an assembly in which a reduced number of components are brought into session. A predetermined structural framework of a component. You create it to define space, geometry, component placement, and connections and mechanisms at the beginning of the design process. With a skeleton model, you can pass along essential design information from one subsystem or assembly to another. A capture of an assembly with a degree of freedom in a particular orientation. A standard component that can be used as a template for the creation of new parts or assemblies. An assembly that is placed within a higher level assembly. A feature, such as a hole that is created to remove material.

parametric assembly

proximity snapping

publish geometry feature

restructuring data-sharing feature

shrinkwrap

simplified representation skeleton model

snapshot

start component

subassembly

subtractive feature

323

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Term symbolic representation top-down design

Definition A simplified representation in which component geometry is represented by a datum point. The creation of a product by first conceptualizing it and specifying top-level design criteria. Those criteria are then passed to all of the parts and components as they are created and detailed. An assembly component that is neither assembled nor packaged. A defined region within a model.

unplaced component

zone

324

Index
A accuracy settings absolute 121 modifying 122 relative 120 accuracy settings 122 annotations overview 266 propagating 267 annotations 266 assemblies about creating 4 activating 118 editing 119 mirroring 228, 229 regenerating 125, 126 restructuring 124 assemblies 4 assembly features copying 112, 113 creating 110, 111 editing 111 in part mode 118 B Bill of Materials (BOM) bulk items 33 displaying envelopes in 317 Bill of Materials (BOM) 220 bodies defining 57 ground 57 overview 56 bodies 56 bulk items assembling 28 creating 27 creating templates for 27 defining parameters for 28 example 32 in Bill of Materials 33 overview 26 bulk items 26 C case studies creating 289 relations 291 case studies 289 clearance 218, 219 collision detection 93 component operations copying 148 deleting 105, 106 freezing 107 grouping 104 reordering 106 rerouting placement references 106 resuming 108 suppressing 107

325

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

component operations 104 component placement automatic 94 multiple occurrences 42 overview 40 placement preferences 100 resolving failures 129 user interface 34 using a pattern 72 using placement constraints 43 component placement 40 components intersected. See intersected components 113 placing in a simplified representation 301 resolving regeneration failures 127 retrieving placement references 302 components 301 configuration options 5, 6 constraint sets converting user-defined to predefined 64 displaying 40 offset values 49 orientation assumptions 49 user-defined 43 constraint sets 43 constraint sets 51 constraint sets 109 constraint sets 109 Copy Geometry features

creating 260 externalizing 262, 263, 264 overview 260, 261, 262 redefining 264 rerouting 265 Copy Geometry features 260 copying 213 D dimensional tolerances displaying 119 editing 120 modifying 120 dimensional tolerances 120 dimensions 217, 221 display styles changing 317 creating 181 editing 181, 182 overview 180, 182, 316 display styles 180 display styles 316 displaying constraint sets in 40 displaying envelopes in 320 dragging applying constraints during 88 assembly entities 87 excluding components from 91, 92 locking a body prior to 90 overview 86 specifying motion axis position while 89

326

Index

dragging 86 E empty components 22 envelopes creating 318 creating using zones 318 defining 318 displaying 320 editing 319, 320 excluding components from 318 geometry in 319 in Bill of Materials 317 in the Model Tree 317, 320 including 319 overview 317 substituting 319 envelopes 317 exploded views 171 external simplified representations creating 306, 307 defining a component's purpose in 307 overview 305 redefining 307 updating 308 external simplified representations 305 external simplified representations 307 F Family Tables using motion axis parameters and dimensions 64 Family Tables 130

Family Tables 228 flexible components defining 157, 158, 159, 164, 165 dimensions 160, 162 excluding from dragging operation 161 features 160 geometry tolerances 162 overview 156 parameters 163, 164 placing 157 propagating 165, 166 replacing 135 varied items 158 flexible components 156 G graphics window displaying connections 65 I Info menu 217, 218 Inheritance features creating 248 editing feature properties 257 externalizing 255, 256 overview 248 updating 257 varying annotations 253, 254, 255 varying dimensions 249, 250 varying features 250 varying parameters 253 varying references 251, 252

327

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

Inheritance features 248 interchange assemblies displaying 147 functional components 140 overview 139 removing 147 replacing a component with 131 simplify component 143, 144 interchange assemblies 139 interfaces for components configuration options 102 defining 95 defining a template 96 editing 96 for automatic placement 94 nested. see nested interfaces 103 overview 94 placement preferences 100 redefining component placement 99 saving when placing component 99 setting rules for 99, 100 using interface matching 97 interfaces for components 94 intersected components adding components to be intersected 115 displaying 116 example 116 reintersecting components 117 removing components from the list 118 setting visibility levels 116 328

using subtractive features 113, 114 visibility 115 intersections 155 L layouts adding datums 284, 285 annotating 280 creating 269 declaring 281 global dimensions relations 273 overview 268 replacing a component with 132 layouts 268 M manipulating components adjusting component position 83 orient mode 82 overview 80, 81 rotating components 82 setting dragging preferences 85 translating movement of a component 82 using move shortcuts 81 manipulating components 80 master representations creating 294 overview 292 master representations 292 Mechanism Model Tree 59 Merge features creating 242, 243

Index

externalizing 245 overview 241 restrictions 244 Merge features 241 mirrored components creating 151, 154 overview 150 rules 155 mirrored components 150 Model Tree 214, 216 motion axis setting dynamic properties for 63 setting motion limits 62 setting regeneration value 61 setting zero position 60 motion axis 60 N nested interfaces defining 103 using to place components 103 nested interfaces 103 O on-demand simplified representations defining settings 303 overview 303 on-demand simplified representations 303 orienting assemblies overview 183 saving 184 orienting assemblies 183

P packaged components adding 67 configuration options 66 finalizing 69 fixing location of 69 moving 67 parts activating in an assembly 118 assembly features in parts 118 copying 25 creating 23, 24, 25, 26 editing a part feature 122 regenerating 125 solid 23 pasting 213 patterns assembling components to 72 dimension 76, 77 reference 74 table 78, 79 Pro/PROGRAM 320 proximity snapping assembling components using 84 automatically placing components using 94 setting tolerance allowances 85 proximity snapping 84 Publish Geometry features creating 259 defining references 260

329

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

overview 258 Publish Geometry features 258 R reference control environment 205 reference control 203 reference control 205 reference control 207 reference control (external) backing up 210 replacing 212 setting scope 208, 209, 211 skeletons 210 reference control (external) 207 reference control (object-specific) defining 204 overview 203, 205 reference control (object-specific) 203 reference path displaying dependencies 193 reference path 192 Reference Viewer filtering 190 investigating 189 reference path 192 Reference Viewer 188 regeneration changed parts 126 customizing 126 selected parts 125 relations 219 330

replacing components overview 130 reference pairing 136, 137 rules and restrictions 133 replacing components 130 resolving failures component placement 129 missing component 127 renamed component 128 retrieval failure of assembly feature 129 S searching 167, 168, 169, 170 shared data 237, 241, 248, 258 Shrinkwrap features breaking dependencies 241 creating 237 defining subsets 238 externalizing 239, 240 overview 237, 239 redefining references 240 updating 239 Shrinkwrap features 237 Shrinkwrap models faceted solid 314, 315 merged solid 315 overview 309 replacing a component with 131 surface subsets 312 Shrinkwrap models 309 simplified representations

Index

activating 298 changing properties 297 copying 299 creating 292, 293 deleting 300 editing 294 envelopes in 292 examples 296 geometry only 293 geometry rep 294 listing 300 opening by default 298 overview 292 placing components in 301 renaming 300 retrieving 299 substituting components in 292 substituting for a component 301 types of 295 simplified representations 2 simplified representations 292 skeletons activating 119 body skeletons 235 BOMS in skeletons 220 design skeletons 234 display colors 236 editing 123 intersecting by assembly features 113 motion skeletons 233

Overview 2 replacement copies 134 standard skeletons 231, 232 skeletons 229 skeletons 230 skeletons 283 snapshots capturing 90 copying constraints 89 editing 91 in exploded views 90 overview 86 removing 91 using snapshot construction 91 snapshots 86 start components 213 subassemblies activating in an assembly 118 creating 21 subassemblies 22 symbolic representations overview 295, 308 placing 309 symbolic representations 308 T temporary interfaces 102 top-down design 229, 262 U unplaced components creating 71 including 72 331

Assembly - Help Topic Collection

placing 71 unplaced components 71 V View Manager 171, 174, 175, 180, 183 views exploded creating 171, 172 overview 171 setting 172 views exploded 171

Z zones clipping 176 creating 176, 177, 180 overview 175 redefining 178, 179 viewing 179 zones 175

332